Vivid 3 Ultrasound

GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
2300163-100
Revision 0
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert

TM TM
0344
User’s Manual
Copyright2001 General Electric Co.

Operating Documentation
Table of Contents
7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV
&KDSWHU
,QWURGXFWLRQ
System Overview................................................................................... 1-1
Attention ............................................................................................................. 1-1
Safety ................................................................................................................. 1-1
Prescription Device ............................................................................................ 1-2
Contraindications................................................................................................ 1-2
Interference Caution........................................................................................... 1-2
Devices Not to be Used Near This Equipment ..................... 1-2
This Manual’s Content .......................................................................... 1-3
Introductory Material ............................................................. 1-3
Getting Started...................................................................... 1-3
Scanning Modes and Related Information............................ 1-3
Additional Information ........................................................... 1-4
This Manual’s Format ........................................................................... 1-5
Conventions used in this Manual ........................................................ 1-6
Typographic Conventions................................................................................... 1-6
Alert Icons .......................................................................................................... 1-7
Control Panel Icons ............................................................................................ 1-8
Contact Information .............................................................................. 1-9
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Table of Contents 1

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
&KDSWHU
*HWWLQJ6WDUWHG
Introduction ............................................................................................2-1
Warnings.................................................................................................2-2
Preparing the Unit for Use ....................................................................2-3
Site Requirements ..............................................................................................2-3
Power Requirements .............................................................2-3
Operating Environment .........................................................2-3
Environmental Requirements ................................................2-4
Unit Description...................................................................................................2-5
Vivid 3 Pro Physical Specifications .......................................2-8
Vivid 3 Expert Physical Specifications...................................2-8
Rear View of the Unit ............................................................2-9
Connecting the Unit ..........................................................................................2-10
Voltage Level Checks..........................................................2-10
Electrical Safety Requirements ...........................................2-10
Connecting to the Electrical Outlet ......................................2-11
Connecting the Peripherals .................................................2-11
Rear Panel Connections ....................................................2-12
Connecting the Footswitch ..................................................2-13
Wheels ................................................................................2-13
Pedal ...................................................................................2-13
Switching On/Off ...............................................................................................2-15
Switching On the Unit ..........................................................2-15
Initialization..........................................................................2-15
Switching Off the Unit ..........................................................2-16
Transportation and Positioning .........................................................................2-20
Moving Precautions .............................................................2-20
Transporting the Unit ...........................................................2-23
Reinstalling at a New Location ............................................2-24
Connecting and Disconnecting Probes.............................................................2-25
Adjusting the Display Monitor ...........................................................................2-27
Vivid 3 Pro Monitor Adjustment ...........................................2-27
Vivid 3 Expert Monitor Adjustment ......................................2-28
Table of Contents 2 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
Operator Controls ............................................................................... 2-29

Control Panel.................................................................................................... 2-30
Button Illumination .............................................................. 2-30
Control Panel Layout........................................................................................ 2-31
Pre-examination Buttons .................................................... 2-33
Scan Mode Selection Buttons............................................. 2-34
Freeze Buttons ................................................................... 2-36
Display Format Buttons....................................................... 2-37
Measurement Buttons......................................................... 2-38
Exit Button .......................................................................... 2-38
Archiving & Reporting Buttons ............................................ 2-39
Physio Button...................................................................... 2-40
VCR Control Buttons .......................................................... 2-40
Print Buttons ....................................................................... 2-40
Trackball Operation ............................................................ 2-41
Basic Mode Parameter Adjustment Rotaries ...................... 2-42
Soft Keys ............................................................................ 2-43
Function Buttons 1-4........................................................... 2-45
Alphanumeric Keyboard ..................................................... 2-46
Footswitch Operation ....................................................................................... 2-48
Beginning an Examination ................................................................. 2-49
Logging On to the System (Configurable) ........................................................ 2-49
User Log On (Password Protected System) ....................... 2-50
Changing the System Password......................................... 2-51
Password Unknown (Password Protected System)............ 2-53
User Log On (Unprotected System).................................... 2-54
Entering Patient Details.................................................................................... 2-56
Defining a New Patient ....................................................... 2-58
Changing Patient Information ............................................. 2-61
Selecting a Probe and Application ................................................................... 2-62
Beginning a Scan ................................................................................ 2-65
Scanning Screen Layout .................................................................................. 2-65
Basic Scanning Operations .............................................................................. 2-67
Storing Images and Cineloops............................................ 2-67
Storing Images on VCR ...................................................... 2-67
Inserting Text Annotations .................................................. 2-68
Inserting Bodymark Annotations ......................................... 2-74
Depth Adjustment ............................................................... 2-77
Zoom................................................................................... 2-77
Performing Measurements.................................................. 2-77

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
&KDSWHU
0RGHV
Introduction ............................................................................................3-1
Mode Management.................................................................................3-3
Acoustic Output Control ......................................................................................3-3
Using the Soft Keys ............................................................................................3-3
Soft Menu Rocker..................................................................3-4
2D-Mode Imaging ...................................................................................3-6
Accessing 2D-Mode............................................................................................3-6
Adjusting the Gain in a 2D Image .......................................................................3-6
Using Zoom in 2D-Mode .....................................................................................3-7
Working with Cineloops ......................................................................................3-8
Cine Control Soft Key Map ..................................................3-10
Working in Split Screen Mode...........................................................................3-13
Duplicating an Image ........................................................................................3-15
Enlarging the split screen display area .............................................................3-15
Automatic Tissue Optimization (ATO)...............................................................3-16
2D-Mode Soft Key Map.....................................................................................3-17
2D-Mode Soft Menu..........................................................................................3-18
Pop-up Soft Menus..............................................................3-18
CFM-Mode Imaging..............................................................................3-19
Accessing CFM-Mode.......................................................................................3-19
Adjusting the CFM-Mode Image .......................................................................3-20
Color Gain.........................................................................................................3-20
Using Zoom in CFM-Mode................................................................................3-21
Exiting CFM-Mode ............................................................................................3-21
CFM-Mode Soft Key Map .................................................................................3-22
CFM-Mode Soft Key Combinations - 1................................3-23
CFM-Mode Soft Key Combinations - 4 ...............................3-26
CFM-Mode Soft Menu.......................................................................................3-28
Pop-up Soft Menus..............................................................3-28

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
M-Mode Imaging .................................................................................. 3-31

Accessing M-Mode........................................................................................... 3-32
Adjusting the Total Gain in an M-Mode Image ................................................. 3-33
Adjusting the 2D Image in M-Mode .................................................................. 3-33
Using Zoom in M-Mode .................................................................................... 3-34
Resizing/Repositioning the M-Mode Display.................................................... 3-34
Enlarging the 2D Image.................................................................................... 3-34
Using Dual or Quad M-Mode Display............................................................... 3-35
Exiting M-Mode ................................................................................................ 3-35
M-Mode Soft Key Map...................................................................................... 3-36
M-Mode Soft Key Combinations - 1 .................................... 3-36
M-Mode Soft Key Combinations - 2 .................................... 3-37
M-Mode Soft Menu........................................................................................... 3-38
Pop-Up Soft Menus ............................................................ 3-38
Color M-Mode Imaging........................................................................ 3-39
Accessing Color M-Mode ................................................................................. 3-39
Managing Color M-Mode Images ..................................................................... 3-40
Exiting Color M-Mode....................................................................................... 3-40
Color M-Mode Soft Key Map ............................................................................ 3-41
Color M-Mode Soft Key Combinations................................ 3-41
Anatomical M-Mode Imaging.............................................................. 3-43
Accessing Anatomical M-Mode ........................................................................ 3-44
Positioning the M Cursor .................................................................................. 3-45
Adjusting the Anatomical M-Mode Image......................................................... 3-46
Exiting Anatomical M-Mode.............................................................................. 3-46
Anatomical M-Mode Soft Key Map................................................................... 3-47
Anatomical M-Mode Soft Menu ........................................................................ 3-48
Pop-up Soft Menus ............................................................. 3-48
Curved Anatomical M-Mode Imaging ................................................ 3-49
Accessing CAM-Mode...................................................................................... 3-50
Adjusting the Curved Anatomical M-Mode Image ............................................ 3-50
Exiting Anatomical M-Mode.............................................................................. 3-50

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
Doppler Mode Imaging ........................................................................3-52

Regular Doppler Display ...................................................................................3-53
Accessing PW Doppler Mode or CW Doppler Mode ...........3-53
Duplex Doppler Display ....................................................................................3-56
Triplex Doppler Display.....................................................................................3-58
Adjusting the Gain in Doppler Mode .................................................................3-60
Using Zoom in Doppler Mode ...........................................................................3-60
Enlarging the 2D Image ....................................................................................3-60
Steering on Vascular Applications ....................................................................3-60
Smart Doppler .....................................................................3-61
Exiting Doppler Mode........................................................................................3-62
Soft Key Combinations in PW Doppler Mode ...................................................3-63
PW Doppler Mode Soft Key Combinations - 1 ....................3-63
PW Doppler Mode Soft Key Combinations - 2 ....................3-64
PW Doppler Mode Soft Menu ...........................................................................3-65
Pop-up Soft Menu ...............................................................3-65
Soft Key Combinations in CW Doppler Mode ...................................................3-66
CW Doppler Mode Soft Key Combinations - 1 ....................3-66
CW Doppler Mode Soft Key Combinations - 2 ....................3-67
CW Doppler Mode Soft Menu ...........................................................................3-68
AngioTM Mode Imaging ......................................................................3-69
Accessing AngioTM Mode ................................................................................3-69
Soft Key Combinations in AngioTM Mode ........................................................3-70
AngioTM Mode Soft Key Combinations - 1.......................................................3-71
AngioTM Mode Soft Key Combinations - 2 .........................3-72
AngioTM Mode Soft Key Combinations - 3 .........................3-73
AngioTM Mode Soft Menu ................................................................................3-74
Soft Key and Soft Menu Functions ....................................................3-76
Soft Menu Rocker Functions.............................................................................3-87

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
&KDSWHU
3K\VLRORJLFDO7UDFHV
Introduction ........................................................................................... 4-1
ECG & Phono Display ........................................................................... 4-2
Connecting the Electrodes................................................................... 4-3
ECG Cable ......................................................................................................... 4-3
Adjusting the ECG & Phono Display ................................................... 4-5
Changing the Trace Sweep Speed in 2D-Mode................................................. 4-5
Changing the ECG Trace Amplitude .................................................................. 4-6
Changing the ECG Trace Position ..................................................................... 4-6
Selecting an External ECD Input........................................................................ 4-7
Hiding the ECG Signal Trace ............................................................................. 4-7
Using the Heart Sound Microphone Device ....................................................... 4-8
Changing the Phono Trace Amplitude ............................................................... 4-8
Changing the Phono Trace Position................................................................... 4-9
Selecting a Phono Filter ..................................................................................... 4-9
ECG & Phono Soft Key Functions ..................................................... 4-10

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
&KDSWHU
6WUHVV(FKR
Introduction ............................................................................................5-1
Stress Echo Mode and Protocols.........................................................5-2
Acquisition...........................................................................................................5-4
Selecting an Image................................................................5-5
Selecting a Projection/Level ..................................................5-7
Deleting or Replacing Acquired Images ................................5-8
Setting Timers for Projections and Levels ...........................5-10
Analysis.............................................................................................................5-12
Scoring Acquired Heart Cycles ...........................................5-13
Scoring Stress Echo Data ...................................................5-14
BullsEye Scoring Diagram...................................................5-16
Exercise Stress Examinations ..........................................................................5-18
Selecting and Storing Heart Cycles.....................................5-20
Displaying, Hiding or Resetting the Capture Buffer .............5-22
Viewing Completed Calculations and Scoring..................................5-23
Editing and/or Creating Stress Templates ........................................5-24
Selecting a Base Template .................................................5-24
Adding/Deleting Levels........................................................5-26
Assigning New Labels to Levels or Projections...................5-26
Defining New Groups ..........................................................5-28
Deleting Groups ..................................................................5-30
Saving an Edited Template .................................................5-31

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
&KDSWHU
&DUGLDF0HDVXUHPHQWDQG$QDO\VLV
Introduction ........................................................................................... 6-1
Measure.................................................................................................. 6-2
Measure and Assign ............................................................................ 6-3
Performing Measurements ................................................................................. 6-5
2D-Mode ............................................................................... 6-5
M-Mode............................................................................... 6-15
Doppler Mode ..................................................................... 6-22
General Controls .............................................................................................. 6-34
Highlighting Measurements ................................................ 6-34
Modifying Measurements.................................................... 6-35
Assigning a Parameter Label after Measurement............... 6-36
Modifying Assigned Measurements using the Menu Button6-38
Deleting Assigned Measurements using the Menu Button . 6-39
Deleting Measurements Individually ................................... 6-40
Deleting all the Measurements from the Screen................. 6-41
Controlling the Result Table Size........................................ 6-42
Assign and Measure ........................................................................... 6-43
An example for PISA, a Study.......................................................................... 6-45
Prompted Step-by-Step Procedures ................................................................ 6-47
Worksheet ............................................................................................ 6-48
Right Atrium Pressure (RAP) Selection............................................................ 6-52
Including or Excluding Values in a Calculation................................................. 6-53
Manually Changing a Value ............................................................................. 6-53

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
&KDSWHU
9DVFXODU0HDVXUHPHQWDQG$QDO\VLV
Introduction ............................................................................................7-1
Operating the Vascular Package ..........................................................7-2
Using the Vascular Measurement Tools .............................................................7-2
Measurement Tools ...............................................................................7-3
2D-Mode Tools ...................................................................................................7-3
Distance (2D Caliper) ............................................................7-3
Percentage D Reduction (%DR) ...........................................7-5
Percentage A Reduction (%AR) ............................................7-7
Area (2D Area) ......................................................................7-9
Doppler Mode Tools..........................................................................................7-11
Velocity ................................................................................7-11
PS & ED ..............................................................................7-13
Automatic Trace ..................................................................7-15
Manual Trace ......................................................................7-18
Volume Flow (VF)................................................................7-20
Available Study Protocols...................................................................7-22
Measurements ..................................................................................................7-23
Calculations ......................................................................................................7-23
Carotid Artery Evaluation ..................................................................................7-24
Basic Carotid Artery Evaluation...........................................7-24
Extended Carotid Artery Evaluation ....................................7-24
Worksheet ...........................................................................7-25
Lower Extremities Arterial Evaluation ...............................................................7-27
Lower Extremities Arterial Evaluation..................................7-27
Upper Extremities Arterial Evaluation ...............................................................7-28
Upper Extremities Arterial Evaluation..................................7-28
Aorto-Iliac Arterial Evaluation............................................................................7-29
Aorto-Iliac Arterial Evaluation ..............................................7-29
Renal Evaluation...............................................................................................7-30
Renal Evaluation .................................................................7-30
Transcranial Evaluation ....................................................................................7-31
Transcranial Evaluation .......................................................7-31
Real-time Spectral Tracing and
Measurement Function........................................................................7-32

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
&KDSWHU
6KDUHG6HUYLFHV
Introduction ........................................................................................... 8-1
Operating Room (OR) Package............................................................ 8-2
Automatic Tissue Optimization........................................................................... 8-2
FlexiView ............................................................................................................ 8-3
FlexiView Quad Screen ........................................................ 8-4
Reference (Baseline) Cineloops ........................................... 8-6
FlexiView for Single Screen ................................................ 8-11
OB Package ......................................................................................... 8-12
Operating the OB Package .............................................................................. 8-12
Patient Details..................................................................... 8-13
Performing an Obstetric Evaluation .................................... 8-14
Using the OB Measurement Tools...................................... 8-15
On-Screen OB Mini-Report................................................. 8-15
Measurement Tools.......................................................................................... 8-16
2D Caliper ........................................................................... 8-17
Ellipse Tool ......................................................................... 8-19
Trace Tool........................................................................... 8-21
Heart Rate (HR) Measurement Tool ................................... 8-23
M Caliper Measurement Tool.............................................. 8-25
PS & ED Tool...................................................................... 8-27
Velocity Tool ....................................................................... 8-29
Automatic Trace Tool.......................................................... 8-30
Manual Trace Tool .............................................................. 8-33
Available Study Protocols .................................................................. 8-35
Early Gestation ................................................................... 8-36
Fetal Growth ....................................................................... 8-36
Fetal Growth - Extended ..................................................... 8-37
AFI (Amniotic Fluid Index) Study ........................................ 8-37
Measurements.................................................................................................. 8-38
Calculations...................................................................................................... 8-40
Worksheet ........................................................................................................ 8-42
Adjusting the Method by Which a Calculation is Made ....... 8-44
Adjusting the Chart by Which a Calculation is Made .......... 8-45
Including or Excluding Values in a Calculation ................... 8-46
Manually Changing a Value ................................................ 8-47
Restoring Automatic Calculation......................................... 8-48

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
GYN Package........................................................................................8-49
Available Study Protocols .................................................................................8-49
Ovarian Measurements .......................................................8-49
Uterine Measurements ........................................................8-50
Calculations .........................................................................8-50
Fetal Heart Evaluation .........................................................................8-50
Abdominal Evaluation .........................................................................8-51
Available Study Protocols .................................................................................8-51
Organ Dimension Measurements........................................8-52
Bladder Volume Measurements ..........................................8-52
&KDSWHU
5HSRUWLQJ
Introduction ............................................................................................9-1
Creating Reports....................................................................................9-2
Generating Reports.............................................................................................9-3
Editing Reports ...................................................................................................9-4
Including Images in Reports ..................................................9-8
Printing Reports.....................................................................9-9
Retrieving Saved Reports and Creating New Reports .....................9-10
Saving Reports in PDF and/or CHM Format......................................9-13
Soft Key Functions ..............................................................................9-15

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
&KDSWHU
3DWLHQW0DQDJHPHQWDQG$UFKLYLQJ
Introduction ......................................................................................... 10-1
Archiving Package (option)................................................................ 10-2
Local and Remote Archiving ............................................................................ 10-2
Database Management .................................................................................... 10-3
Adding or Locating Patient Records ................................................. 10-5
Adding a Patient Record .................................................................................. 10-5
Beginning an Examination on an Archived Patient .......................................... 10-6
Sorting Data ................................................................................................... 10-11
Searching with Field Filters ............................................................................ 10-12
Archiving/Storing Images and Cineloops ....................................... 10-14
Storing An Image............................................................................................ 10-16
Storing a Split Screen Image.......................................................................... 10-17
Storing a Cineloop.......................................................................................... 10-18
Direct Storage ................................................................... 10-19
Viewing Stored Images and Cineloops ........................................... 10-20
Retrieving and Editing Archived Information ................................. 10-22
Editing Patient Data in the Archive................................................................. 10-22
Redisplaying the Clipboard ............................................................................ 10-32
Deleting Archived Information ........................................................................ 10-32
Additional Archived Information and Data ..................................... 10-37
Exiting the Archiving Function ........................................................ 10-37

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
Back Up Procedures..........................................................................10-38
Backup Scheduling .........................................................................................10-39
Scheduling a Backup.........................................................10-40
Stopping the Backup Notification ......................................10-42
Performing a Backup ......................................................................................10-43
Interrupting the Backup Process.....................................................................10-44
Purging Backed Up Exams .............................................................................10-45
Automatic Purge ................................................................10-45
Restoring from Backup ...................................................................................10-45
Exporting Images and Reports to External Media ..........................10-49
Disk Formatting and Labeling ..........................................................10-53
CD-R Writer Functionality..................................................10-56
System Messages .............................................................10-57
&KDSWHU
&RQQHFWLYLW\
Introduction ..........................................................................................11-1
Dataflows ..............................................................................................11-2
Selecting a Dataflow when Logging On ............................................................11-3
Selecting a Dataflow During an Examination....................................................11-4
Viewing Dataflow Properties .............................................................................11-5
Supported Dataflows ...........................................................................11-6
Basic Dataflows ................................................................................................11-6
EchoNet Dataflows ...........................................................................................11-9
DICOM Network Dataflows .............................................................................11-11
Supported Services ...........................................................................11-15
Exporting Data ...................................................................................11-16
Patient Transfer..................................................................................11-18

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
&KDSWHU
3HULSKHUDOV
Introduction ......................................................................................... 12-1
System Connections for Peripherals ................................................ 12-2
Printers................................................................................................. 12-4
Sony Black & White Thermal Video Printer...................................................... 12-4
European Specifications ..................................................... 12-4
US Specifications................................................................ 12-5
Sony Color Thermal Video Printer.................................................................... 12-6
European Specifications ..................................................... 12-6
US Specifications................................................................ 12-7
HP InkJet Printer .............................................................................................. 12-8
European and US Specifications ........................................ 12-8
Printer Configuration ........................................................... 12-9
Video Cassette Recorder.................................................................. 12-10
European Specifications ................................................... 12-11
US Specifications.............................................................. 12-11
VCR Operation ............................................................................................... 12-12
VCR Soft Key Map............................................................ 12-12
VCR Soft Menu ................................................................. 12-13
Recording and Reviewing an Examination ....................... 12-15
Adjusting the Counter ....................................................... 12-16
Searching for a Counter Number ...................................... 12-18

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
&KDSWHU
3UREHV
Introduction ..........................................................................................13-1
Environmental Requirements .............................................................13-2
Probe Orientation.................................................................................13-3
Probe Labeling .....................................................................................13-4
Probe Integration .................................................................................13-7
Connecting the Probe .......................................................................................13-7
Activating the Probe..........................................................................................13-9
Coupling Gels ......................................................................13-9
Disconnecting the Probe.................................................................................13-10
Care and Maintenance.......................................................................13-11
Inspecting Probes ...........................................................................................13-12
Cleaning Probes .............................................................................................13-13
Disinfecting Probes .........................................................................................13-15
Probe Safety .......................................................................................13-17
Electrical Hazards ...........................................................................................13-17
Mechanical Hazards .......................................................................................13-17
Biological Hazards ..........................................................................................13-18
Probe Types .......................................................................................13-19
Probe Naming Conventions ............................................................................13-19
Probe Definitions ...............................................................13-20
Phased Array Sector Probes ..........................................................................13-21
3S Probe ...........................................................................13-21
5S Probe ...........................................................................13-22
7S Probe ...........................................................................13-23
10S Probe .........................................................................13-24
5T Probe............................................................................13-25
6T Probe............................................................................13-26
8T Probe............................................................................13-27
P509 Probe (Japan Only) ..................................................13-28
Non-Imaging Doppler Pencil Probes...............................................................13-29
2D (P2D) Probe .................................................................13-29
6D (P6D) Probe .................................................................13-30

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
Curved Array (Convex) Probes ...................................................................... 13-31

C358 Probe....................................................................... 13-31
Linear Array Probes ....................................................................................... 13-32
7L (546L) Probe ................................................................ 13-32
10L (739L) Probe .............................................................. 13-33
i739 Probe ........................................................................ 13-34
T739 Probe ....................................................................... 13-35
Adapter ............................................................................. 13-36
Biopsy ................................................................................................ 13-37
Biopsy Guide Bracket Instructions ................................................................. 13-37
Transesophageal Probe.................................................................... 13-38
&KDSWHU
3UHVHWVDQG6\VWHP6HWXS
Introduction ......................................................................................... 14-1
Application Presets............................................................................. 14-1
Selecting an Application Preset........................................................................ 14-2
Modifying Factory-Defined Presets .................................................................. 14-4
User-Modified Presets ........................................................ 14-4
Restoring Factory-Defined Presets..................................... 14-6
User-Created Application Presets....................................... 14-7
Saving Application Presets............................................................................... 14-8
System Configuration ......................................................................... 14-9
Hospital Info Tab ............................................................................................ 14-11
System Tab .................................................................................................... 14-11
MA Options Tab ............................................................................................. 14-24
MA Options Tab Configuration.......................................... 14-25
Tools Tab .......................................................................... 14-27
Studies Tab....................................................................... 14-28
Assignment Tab ................................................................ 14-30
Worksheet Tab ................................................................. 14-31
MA Options Features ........................................................ 14-33

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
Archive Tab.....................................................................................................14-34
Stress Tab.......................................................................................................14-38
Report Tab ......................................................................................................14-42
VCR/ECG Tab ................................................................................................14-46
Annotation Settings Tab..................................................................................14-49
Configuring Fonts ..............................................................14-50
Setting the Home Position for the Text Cursor ..................14-51
System Options Tab .......................................................................................14-53
Installing Options ...............................................................14-54
Vocabulary Tab...............................................................................................14-55
Modifying Vocabulary Settings ..........................................14-56
Printers Tab ....................................................................................................14-59
Setting the Default Printer .................................................14-60
Controlling the Speed vs Quality of Printouts ....................14-61
Connectivity Tab .............................................................................................14-63
Views Subsidiary Tab ........................................................14-64
Tools Subsidiary Tab.........................................................14-67
Local Settings Subsidiary Tab ...........................................14-70
Miscellaneous Tab ..........................................................................................14-71
Doppler Options ................................................................14-71
Measurements...................................................................14-71
Users ...................................................................................................14-72
User Groups....................................................................................................14-72
Configuring Users ...........................................................................................14-73
Adding a New User ...........................................................14-73
Editing a User ....................................................................14-75
User Logon .....................................................................................................14-76

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
&KDSWHU
8VHU0DLQWHQDQFH
Introduction ......................................................................................... 15-1
Periodic Maintenance ......................................................................... 15-2
iLinq...................................................................................................... 15-2
Inspecting the System ........................................................................ 15-3
Cleaning the Unit................................................................................. 15-4
Prevention of Static Electricity Interference..................................... 15-5
Handling Probes.................................................................................. 15-5
Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 15-6
Monitor Alignment ............................................................................................ 15-6
Activity Log and Problem Reports .................................................................... 15-7
System Malfunction .......................................................................................... 15-9
Restarting the Unit.......................................................................................... 15-10

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Table of Contents
&KDSWHU
6DIHW\
Introduction ..........................................................................................16-1
Important Safety Considerations .......................................................16-2
Patient Safety....................................................................................................16-2
Patient Identification ............................................................16-2
Diagnostic Information.........................................................16-3
Mechanical Hazards ............................................................16-3
Personnel and Equipment Safety .....................................................................16-4
Device Labels ...................................................................................................16-7
Electrical Safety ...................................................................................16-8
Internally Connected Peripheral Devices..........................................................16-8
External Connection of Other Peripheral Devices ............................................16-8
UL-2601-1 Standard ............................................................16-8
IEC 601-1 Standard.............................................................16-8
Owner Responsibility ..........................................................................16-9
Possible Biological Effects ................................................................................16-9
Power Information on Screen .........................................................................16-10
Safety of Ultrasound..........................................................................16-11
ALARA Statement...........................................................................................16-11
Training ...........................................................................................................16-11
Allergic Reactions To Latex-Containing
Medical Devices..............................................................................................16-12
System Controls Affecting Acoustic
Output .................................................................................................16-13
Probe Selection...............................................................................................16-13
Application Selection.......................................................................................16-13
Changing Imaging Modes ...............................................................................16-14
Transmit Power...............................................................................................16-14
Combined Modes ..............................................................16-15
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .............................................................16-16
,QGH[ ,

2300163-100 Rev. 0
List of Figures
/LVWRI)LJXUHV
Figure 2-1: Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert Ultrasound Unit 2-5
Figure 2-2: Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert Ultrasound Unit Rear View 2-9
Figure 2-3: Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert Ultrasound Unit Pedal 2-13
Figure 2-4: Shut Down Screen 2-17
Figure 2-5: Control Panel Layout 2-31
Figure 2-6: Control Panel Layout Diagram 2-32
Figure 2-7: Soft Keys Diagrams 2-43
Figure 2-8: Footswitch 2-48
Figure 2-9: User Log On Dialog Box 2-50
Figure 2-10: Change Password Dialog Box 2-52
Figure 2-11: User Log On Dialog Box (Unprotected System) 2-54
Figure 2-12: 2D Default Scanning Screen 2-56
Figure 2-13: Select Screen 2-57
Figure 2-14: Main Details Screen 2-58
Figure 2-15: Select Probe and Application Screen (Pro) 2-62
Figure 2-16: Select Probe and Application Screen (Expert) 2-63
Figure 2-17: Scanning Screen Layout 2-65
Figure 2-18: Typical Annotations Display with Mode-Specific
Annotation Menu 2-68
Figure 2-19: Bodymark Annotations Chart 2-74
Figure 3-1: Adjusting Values in Soft Menus 3-5
Figure 3-2: Zoom Reference Image 3-7
Figure 3-3: Split Screen - Two Windows 3-13
Figure 3-4: Quad Screen - Four Windows 3-14
Figure 3-5: Color Flow Mode 3-19
Figure 3-6: M-Mode Display 3-31
Figure 3-7: M Cursor 3-32
Figure 3-8: Color M Cursor 3-39
Figure 3-9: CW and 2D-Mode 3-54
Figure 4-1: Physiological Traces On Scanned Image 4-2
Figure 4-2: Connection Sockets for ECG Cables 4-3
Figure 4-3: ECG & Phono Soft Keys 4-5
Figure 5-1: Selecting a Stress Echo Mode Template 5-2
Figure 5-2: Acquiring Images 5-4
Figure 5-3: Stress Echo Analysis Screen 5-13
Figure 5-4: Stress Echo Scoring Menu 5-14
Figure 5-5: Exercise Stress Examination Screen 5-18
Figure 5-6: Buffer Options Pop-up Menu 5-22
Figure 5-7: Group Editing Options 5-28
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual List of Figures 1

2300163-100 Rev. 0
List of Figures
Figure 5-8: Cell Editing Options List 5-29

Figure 6-1: Measurements on an Image 6-4
Figure 6-2: Length Measurements 6-5
Figure 6-3: Area Measurements 6-7
Figure 6-4: Volume Measurements 6-10
Figure 6-5: M Caliper Measurements 6-15
Figure 6-6: Height Measurements 6-17
Figure 6-7: LV Measurements 6-19
Figure 6-8: Velocity and Pressure Measurements 6-22
Figure 6-9: Velocity and Pressure Measurements 6-25
Figure 6-10: Doppler Wave Trace 6-26
Figure 6-11: Example of Completed Typical LV M-Mode Study 6-47
Figure 6-12: Worksheet Screen 6-49
Figure 6-13: Calculation Method Pop-up Menu 6-51
Figure 7-1: Distance Measurement on a 2D Image 7-3
Figure 7-2: Percentage D Reduction Measurements 7-6
Figure 7-3: Percentage A Reduction Measurements 7-8
Figure 7-4: 2D Area Measurement 7-10
Figure 7-5: Velocity Measurement 7-11
Figure 7-6: PS & ED Measurement 7-14
Figure 7-7: ICA/CCA Worksheet Page 7-26
Figure 8-1: FlexiView Quad Screen 8-5
Figure 8-2: "Time From Start" Stamp 8-9
Figure 8-3: Patient Details Screen/OB Main Details Page 8-13
Figure 8-4: OB Mini-Report 8-15
Figure 8-5: Distance Measurement on a 2D Image 8-17
Figure 8-6: Caliper Measurement 8-20
Figure 8-7: Trace Measurement 8-22
Figure 8-8: M Caliper Measurements 8-25
Figure 8-9: OB Worksheet Screen 8-42
Figure 8-10: Calculation Method Pop-Up Menu 8-44
Figure 8-11: Chart Pop-Up Menu 8-45
Figure 9-1: Generated Report (Example) 9-3
Figure 9-2: Alternate Report Templates Menu 9-4
Figure 9-3: Expanded Alternative Reports Menu 9-5
Figure 9-4: Report Name Entry Dialog Box 9-6
Figure 9-5: Archived Reports List 9-11
Figure 10-1: General Status Screen 10-3
Figure 10-2: Select Screen 10-6
Figure 10-3: Empty Main Details Screen 10-7
Figure 10-4: Patient List Screen 10-8
Figure 10-5: Main Details Page 10-9
Figure 10-6: Search Field Filtering 10-12
List of Figures 2 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

2300163-100 Rev. 0
List of Figures
Figure 10-7: Stored Images and Cineloops 10-14

Figure 10-8: Patient Exam List Screen 10-27
Figure 10-9: Worksheet 10-31
Figure 10-10: Delete Patient Record Dialog Box 10-33
Figure 10-11: Archived Image Options 10-35
Figure 10-12: Delete Examination Confirmation Dialog Box 10-36
Figure 10-13: General Status Screen 10-40
Figure 10-14: Backup Screen 10-41
Figure 10-15: Removable Media Utility Screen 10-43
Figure 10-16 Export Option Menu 10-50
Figure 10-17 Save As Window 10-50
Figure 10-18: Removable Media Utility Screen 10-53
Figure 11-2: Patient List Screen 11-4
Figure 11-3: Connectivity Tab 11-5
Figure 11-4: Export Pop-up Menu 11-17
Figure 11-5: Export to Media Storage Services 11-17
Figure 11-6: Patient Transfer Screen 11-18
Figure 12-1: Rear Panel Connectors 12-3
Figure 12-2: Adjust VCR Counter Pop-up Menu 12-16
Figure 12-3: Search Dialog Box 12-18
Figure 13-1: Orientation Markers on Probe 13-3
Figure 13-2: Probe Orientation Indicator on Screen 13-3
Figure 13-3: Probe Labeling (Example) 13-4
Figure 13-6: Connecting a Probe 13-8
Figure 13-7: Disconnecting a Probe 13-10
Figure 13-8: Probe Parts 13-12
Figure 13-9: Probe Immersion Levels 13-14
Figure 13-10: 3S Probe 13-21
Figure 13-14: 5T Probe 13-25
Figure 13-17: P509 Probe 13-28
Figure 13-18: 2D (P2D) Probe 13-29
Figure 13-19: 6D (P6D) Probe 13-30
Figure 13-20: C358 Curved Array Probe 13-31
Figure 13-21: 7L (546L) Probe 13-32
Figure 13-22: 10L (739L) Probe 13-33
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual List of Figures 3

2300163-100 Rev. 0
List of Figures
Figure 13-23: i739 Probe 13-34

Figure 13-24: T739 Probe 13-35
Figure 14-3: Save Preset Dialog Box 14-5
Figure 14-4: Hospital Info Tab 14-10
Figure 14-5: System Tab 14-11
Figure 14-6: Save Presets Screen 14-18
Figure 14-7: Restore Presets Screen 14-20
Figure 14-8: Restore Factory Presets Screen 14-22
Figure 14-9: MA Options Tab/Tools Subsidiary Tab 14-24
Figure 14-10: MA Options Tab/Studies Subsidiary Tab 14-28
Figure 14-11: MA Options Tab/Assignment Subsidiary Tab 14-30
Figure 14-12: MA Options Tab/Worksheet Subsidiary Tab 14-31
Figure 14-13: Archive Tab 14-34
Figure 14-14: Stress Tab 14-38
Figure 14-15: Report Tab 14-42
Figure 14-16: VCR/ECG Tab 14-46
Figure 14-17: Annotation Settings Tab 14-49
Figure 14-18: Font Dialog Box 14-50
Figure 14-19: System Options Tab 14-53
Figure 14-20: Vocabulary Tab 14-55
Figure 14-21: Add Dialog Box 14-57
Figure 14-22: Modify Dialog Box 14-57
Figure 14-23: Printers Tab 14-59
Figure 14-24: Document Properties Dialog Box 14-61
Figure 14-25: Connectivity Tab 14-63
Figure 14-26: Connectivity Tab/Tools Subsidiary Tab 14-67
Figure 14-27: Personnel Information Screen 14-74
Figure 15-1: iLinq Icon 15-2
Figure 15-2: Failure Report Screen 15-7
Figure 15-3: Failure Report Calendar 15-8
List of Figures 4 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Revision History
5HYLVLRQ+LVWRU\
5HDVRQ)RU&KDQJH
Revision Date Reason for Change

0 7 September 2001 Initial Release
/LVWRI(IIHFWLYH3DJHV
Page Number Revision Number Page Number Revision Number
Title Page 0 14-1 thru 14-78 0
Revision History 0 15-1 thru 15-10 0

A and B
Table of Contents 0 16-1 thru 16-18

1 thru 20 0
Table of Figures 0 Index I thru X 0

1 thru 4
1-1 thru 10 0
2-1 thru 2-78 0
3-1 thru 3-90 0

4-1 thru 4-10 0
5-1 thru 5-32 0
6-1 thru 6-54 0
7-1 thru 7-34 0
8-1 thru 8-52 0
9-1 thru 9-18 0

10-1 thru 10-58 0
11-1 thru 11-20 0
12 -1 thru 12-18 0
13-1 thru 13 -38 0
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Revision History A

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Revision History
Please verify that you are using the latest revision of this document.
Information pertaining to this document is maintained on GPC (GE
Medical Systems Global Product Configuration). If you need to know the
latest revision, contact your distributor, local GE Sales Representative or
in the USA call the GE Ultrasound Clinical Answer Center
at 1-800-682-5327 or 414-524-5255.
Revision History B Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Introduction
&KDSWHU
,QWURGXFWLRQ
6\VWHP2YHUYLHZ
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit can be used to apply
ultrasound energy to obtain 2D-Mode, Color Doppler, Power Doppler
(Angio), M-Mode and Color M-Mode images, as well as PW and CW
Doppler spectra.
The probes that are intended for these studies are described in
Chapter 13, Probes.
$WWHQWLRQ
Read and understand all the instructions in this User’s Manual before
attempting to use the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit. Keep
the manual with the equipment at all times. Periodically review the
procedures for operation and safety precautions.
6DIHW\
Ensure that the appropriate safety precautions are taken before
operating the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit.
Important: All information in Chapter 16, Safety, should be read and

understood before operating the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit.
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual 1-1

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Introduction
3UHVFULSWLRQ'HYLFH
)RU86$2QO\
Caution: United States law restricts this device to sale or use by, or on the
order of, a physician.
&RQWUDLQGLFDWLRQV
The GE Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit is not intended for
opthalmic use or any use causing the ultrasound beam to pass through
the eye. The acoustic levels at which this system operates exceed the
FDA limits for opthalmic use.
,QWHUIHUHQFH&DXWLRQ
'HYLFHV1RWWREH8VHG1HDU7KLV(TXLSPHQW
Devices which intrinsically transmit radio waves such as cellular
phones, radio transceivers, mobile radio transmitters, radio-controlled
toys, and so on, should not be operated near the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3
Expert ultrasound unit.
Medical staff in charge of the unit are required to instruct technicians,
patients, and other people who may be around the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3
Expert ultrasound unit, to fully comply with the above
recommendations.
Caution: Do not use the devices listed in the previous paragraph near the
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit. Use of these devices near the unit
could cause it to malfunction.
1-2 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Introduction
7KLV0DQXDO·V&RQWHQW
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual is organized to provide all
the information needed to start scanning immediately.
,QWURGXFWRU\0DWHULDO
Chapter 1, Introduction, provides the following information:
• General overview of the unit.
• Conventions used in the book.
*HWWLQJ6WDUWHG
Chapter 2, Getting Started, provides the following information:
• Preparing the system for use.
• Physical and electronic description of the unit.
• Connecting the unit.
• Operator controls, including a description of the control panel and
each one of the available controls.
• Beginning a scan, including how to log on, enter a new patient’s
details, select a probe, insert annotations and save data.
6FDQQLQJ0RGHVDQG5HODWHG,QIRUPDWLRQ
Chapter 3, Modes, describes the basic scan modes and the features
common to each of them.
Chapter 4, Physiological Traces, describes the ECG and Phono
wave forms that are displayed on the screen in all modes.
Chapter 5, Stress Echo, describes the Stress Echo operation, which
provides a matrix of measurements to enable the user to efficiently
examine heart function.
Chapter 6, Cardiac Measurement and Analysis, describes the
common conventions and functionality used for taking cardiac
measurements, and the analysis procedure.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Introduction
$GGLWLRQDO,QIRUPDWLRQ
Chapter 7, Vascular Measurement and Analysis, describes the
common conventions and functionality used for taking vascular
measurements, and the analysis procedure.
Chapter 8, Shared Services, describes the common conventions and
functionality used for the OB, GYN and Operating Room applications
and procedures.
Chapter 9, Reporting, describes the generation of reports, and
includes all the procedures for editing reports and retrieving reports
from the archive.
Chapter 10, Patient Management and Archiving, describes the
management of all patient data, as well as the optional integrated
Archive Package, which archives the data collected during the
examination in a database.
Chapter 11, Connectivity, describes the procedures and functionality
of connecting the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit to a
network.
Chapter 12, Peripherals, describes VCR operation and the
peripherals that can operate with the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit.
Chapter 13, Probes, describes the probes that are supported by the
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert system.
Chapter 14, Presets and System Setup, describes the global
configuration of the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit and how
to select and modify application presets.
Chapter 15, User Maintenance, describes the procedure for
maintaining the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit.
Chapter 16, Safety, provides safety instructions that are to be followed
upon installation of the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit and
must be reviewed before operation.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Introduction
7KLV0DQXDO·V)RUPDW
Data has been arranged in a format that will assist the user in finding
information easily and quickly.
7DEOHRI
&RQWHQWV
Topics are located in the main table of contents.
+HDGHUV
)RRWHUV
The chapter name and page number are displayed on the outer corner
of every page.
5HIHUHQFHV
Cross references are noted in the text. Cross references, other than
those to text in this manual, can be found in the Reference Manual.
,QGH[
Extensive tool that provides easy reference to ideas, topics, terms,

titles, headings and cross references.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Introduction
&RQYHQWLRQVXVHGLQWKLV0DQXDO
7\SRJUDSKLF&RQYHQWLRQV
The following typographic conventions are used to assist in the
identification of different types of information:
Bold type Denotes buttons, soft keys, soft key rotaries and
field names that are displayed on the screen.
Italic type Denotes the names of windows, screens and dialog

boxes, for example, New Patient window.
<key> Indicates the names of function keys on the

alphanumeric keyboard.
7 Indicates that the alphanumeric keyboard should be

used for entering text.
Notes provide additional important information

Note:
about the subject under which they are located, for
example, exceptions to a general rule.
Indicates an important note or a hint.
Indicates whether the function being described is

standard or optional on the Vivid 3 Pro and/or the
Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit accordingly. Various
versions of this icon indicate different combinations
of functions.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Introduction
$OHUW,FRQV
The following icons highlight safety issues:
Caution
Warning
Danger

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Introduction
&RQWURO3DQHO,FRQV
Other icons are used to demonstrate operational procedures, such as:
TRACKBALL.
Standard control panel button, labeled according to its function.
Light indicator (LED) control panel button for functions that can be
toggled on and off, labeled according to its function.
Control panel rotary, labeled according to its function.
Alphanumeric keyboard function keys.
Soft key (without LED), labeled according to its current function.
Soft key rotary, labeled according to its current function.
Steer rocker key.
Soft Menu key (4-way rocker).

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Introduction
&RQWDFW,QIRUPDWLRQ
If additional information or assistance is needed, please contact the
local distributor or the appropriate support resource listed below:
USA
GE Medical Systems Tel: (1) 800-437-1171
Ultrasound Service Engineering
4855 W. Electric Avenue
Milwaukee, WI 53219
Customer Answer Center Tel: (1) 800-682-5327
Canada
Milwaukee, WI 53219
Latin America
Milwaukee, WI 53219
Europe
GE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH & Tel: 49 (0) 212/2802-0
Co. KG 0130-81-6370 Toll Free
Beethovenstraße 239
Postfach 11 05 60, D-42665 Solingen Fax: 49 (0) 212/2802-28
Asia
GE Ultrasound Asia Tel: (65) 291-8528
Service Department - Ultrasound
298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06 Fax: (65) 272-3997
Central Plaza
Singapore 168730

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Introduction

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
&KDSWHU
*HWWLQJ6WDUWHG
,QWURGXFWLRQ
This chapter provides general information for preparing and operating
the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit, and includes the
following sections:
• Warnings, page 2-2, lists important safety information that must be
read before operating the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound
unit.
• Preparing the Unit for Use, page 2-3, describes the site
requirements for the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit,
and the procedures involved in transporting and connecting the
unit.
• Operator Controls, page 2-29, describes the operator controls on
the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit, including the control
panel and the footswitch.
• Beginning an Examination, page 2-49, describes the procedures
for beginning an examination, such as entering patient details and
selecting a probe.
• Beginning a Scan, page 2-65, describes the procedures for
beginning a scan, and the basic scanning operations.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
:DUQLQJV
Warning: All the warnings in Chapter 16, Safety, should be read and
understood before operating the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit.
Warning: To avoid spillage into the unit or control panel, never set liquids on
the unit. Maintain a clean environment. Turn off the circuit breaker before
cleaning the unit. Refer to Chapter 15, User Maintenance, for cleaning
instructions and regular preventative maintenance procedures.
Warning: Service representatives authorized by GE will unpack and install the

unit. Do not attempt to install the unit without the service representative.
Warning: Operating the unit with the wrong voltage range will cause damage
and void the factory warranty.
Warning: Only qualified physicians or ultrasound sonographers should perform

scans of patients for medical diagnostic reasons. Request training, if needed.
Ensure that unauthorized personnel do not tamper with the unit.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
3UHSDULQJWKH8QLWIRU8VH
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit must operate within the
proper environment and in accordance with the requirements described
in this section. Before using the unit, ensure that all these requirements
are met.
6LWH5HTXLUHPHQWV
The following site requirements are necessary for the Vivid 3 Pro/
Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit to function optimally:
3RZHU5HTXLUHPHQWV
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit requires a separate
power outlet with at least a 12 amp circuit breaker for 100-120 VAC
(Japan/USA) or at least a 6 amp circuit breaker for 220/230/240 VAC
(Australia/Africa/Europe/Latin America).
2SHUDWLQJ(QYLURQPHQW
Ensure that there is sufficient air flow around the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3
Warning: DO NOT install the unit in a location where the display screen is
exposed to direct light. Reflections on the screen make it difficult to view
images.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
(QYLURQPHQWDO5HTXLUHPHQWV
The operational environment of the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit requires constant maintenance. Different temperature
and humidity ranges are specified for operation, storage and
transportation, and are shown in the table below:
Requirement Temperature Humidity Air Pressure
Operational 10 to 50oC 50-70% 700-1060 hPa

50 to 122oF
Storage -20 to 60oC 10-95% 700-1060 hPa

-4 to 140oF
Transport -20 to 60oC 10-95% 700-1060 hPa

-4 to 140oF
(OHFWURPDJQHWLF,QWHUIHUHQFH
Ensure that the following criteria are met to protect the system from
electromagnetic interference:
• Operate the unit at least 4.6 m (15 feet) away from equipment that
emits strong electromagnetic radiation.
• Operate the unit in an area enclosed by walls, floors and ceilings
comprised of wood, plaster or concrete, which help prevent
electromagnetic interference.
• Shield the unit when operating it in the vicinity of radio broadcast
equipment.
Note: The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit is approved for use in
hospitals, clinics and other environmentally qualified facilities, in terms of the
prevention of radio wave interference. Operation of the ultrasound unit in an
inappropriate environment can cause electronic interference to radios and
television sets situated near the medical equipment.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
8QLW'HVFULSWLRQ
The following picture illustrates the front and side view of the Vivid 3
Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit:
5 2
12 6
4
7
3
8
14
13
16
15
17
9
18
10
Figure 2-1: Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert Ultrasound Unit

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
1. Display Monitor
Swivels to the left and right, and tilts up and down.
• 15" Monitor (Vivid 3 Pro ultrasound unit)
• 17" Monitor (Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit)
2. Speakers
3. Alphanumeric Keyboard
4. On/Off Switch
5. General Storage Areas

Situated on either side of the front panel on the top surface, on
either side of the monitor.
6. Probe Holders and Gel Holders

Situated on either side of the front panel. The closest holder to the
monitor on each side is for storing bottles of gel.
7. Control Panel
Contains all the buttons and the alphanumeric keyboard used to
operate the ultrasound unit.
8. Front Handles with Raise/Lower Grip Lever

The grip lever located midway underneath the front handles
enables the user to raise or lower the front panel and monitor.
9. Probe Ports
• Two active probe ports, one park probe port and one pencil
probe port (Vivid 3 Pro ultrasound unit).
• Three active probe ports and one pencil probe port (Vivid 3
Expert ultrasound unit).

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
10. Foot Brake

Three-position brake. LEFT locks the wheels, MIDDLE unlocks the
wheels, and RIGHT locks the swivel action.
11. Footswitch (Not Shown)

Configurable footswitch that enables certain keyboard commands
to be operated by foot.
12. Color Printer Bay

The color printer is contained in the upper-left side bay of the unit.
13. Peripherals Storage Area

The VCR recorder and black & white printer are positioned on the
peripheral storage area under the front panel.
14. Cable Hook
15. Floppy/MO Disk(optional)/CD-R Drive
16. Air Filter Vent
17. ECG Cable (Internal/External) Phono Connections
18. Footswitch Connection

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
9LYLG3UR3K\VLFDO6SHFLILFDWLRQV
Size Metric Imperial
Height (with monitor) 131 - 145 cm 52 - 57 in
Width 62.5 cm 25 in
Depth 112 cm 44 in
(100 cm without rear handle) (39 in without rear handle)
Weight (with monitor) 160 kg 353 lbs
9LYLG([SHUW3K\VLFDO6SHFLILFDWLRQV
Size Metric Imperial
Height (with monitor) 134 - 148 cm 53 - 58 in

Width 62.5 cm 25 in
Depth 112 cm 44 in
(100 cm without rear handle) (39 in without rear handle)
Weight (with monitor) 168 kg 370 lbs

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
5HDU9LHZRIWKH8QLW
Figure 2-2: Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert Ultrasound Unit Rear View
1. Monitor cables, video and power cables

2. Power cable storage hook
3. Circuit breaker On/Off switch
4. Ground screw
5. Main power cable socket

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
&RQQHFWLQJWKH8QLW
Before connecting the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit,
perform preliminary checks of the power cord, voltage level, and
compliance with electrical safety requirements. Use only the power
supply cords, cables and plugs provided by or designated by GE
Medical Systems. Ensure that the power cord and plug are intact and
that the power plug is the proper hospital-grade type.
Note: A GE-qualified person should perform the initial system installation.
Products equipped with a power source plug should be connected to

the fixed power socket which has the protective grounding conductor.
Never use any adapter or converter to connect with a power source
plug (for example, three-prong to two-prong converter).
Warning: Failure to provide an adequate earth circuit can cause electrical

shock, resulting in serious injury.
9ROWDJH/HYHO&KHFNV
Before connecting the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit to the
power source, perform the following voltage level checks:
1. Check the label near the mains input connector. A yellow label
indicates the input connector is either 100 V, 120 V, 220 - 230 V or
230 - 240 V.
2. Check the voltage indicated on the label:
• 100 V 60-50 Hz 8A
• 120 V 60-50 Hz 18A
• 220 - 230 V 60-50 Hz 4A
• 230 - 240 V 60-50 Hz 4A
Maximum power requirement = 1.2 KVa
Maximum allowed voltage deviation = + 10 %
Warning: If the mains supply is not within the specified range, DO NOT
CONNECT THE UNIT TO THE POWER SOURCE. Contact the dealer to have
the unit adjusted for the specific mains supply.
(OHFWULFDO6DIHW\5HTXLUHPHQWV
Ensure that all equipment connected to the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit complies with national safety requirements for medical

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
equipment. These safety requirements include: IEC601, CSA22.2,

AS3200.1 and UL544.
&RQQHFWLQJWRWKH(OHFWULFDO2XWOHW
Before connecting the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit to the
electrical outlet, ensure that the wall outlet is of the appropriate type,
and that the power switch is turned off.
Note: To assure grounding reliability, connect to a "hospital grade" or "hospital

only" grounded power outlet.
To connect the unit to the electrical outlet:

1. Uncoil the power cable, allowing sufficient slack so that the plug will
not pull out of the power socket if the unit is moved slightly.
2. Secure the power plug in the mains power socket.
Warning: The unit’s power must be supplied from a separate, properly rated
outlet to avoid the risk of fire. Refer to the Power Requirements section on
page 2-3 for rating information. The power plug should not, under any
circumstances, be altered to a configuration rated less than that specified for
the current. DO NOT use an extension cord or adapter plug.
&RQQHFWLQJWKH3HULSKHUDOV
The peripheral connectors are located under covers on the top rear of
the unit, beneath the monitor. The basic peripheral setup is performed
by the service representative when the unit is installed. For detailed
instructions on connecting peripherals, refer to Chapter 12, Peripherals.
Note: To access the rear panel connectors, unscrew the two screws on the top
of the rear panel, then lift the cover.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
5HDU3DQHO&RQQHFWLRQV
Name Description
AUDIO IN L/R 2 RCA jacks.

AUDIO OUT L/R 2 RCA jacks carrying the Doppler Audio Signals.
Video Out 1, 2 2 BNC connectors for composite color video output

(PAL or NTSC).
Video Out B&W BNC connector for composite B&W video output to a
hard copy printer.
RGB Video Out 4 BNC connectors for high quality RGB color output
containing Red, Green, Blue and Sync. signals.
Located in Color Printer Bay. Activated by Print A on
the control panel.
MIC Microphone input.
S-Video OUT 4-pin connector for output to a S-VHS VCR.
S-Video IN 4-pin connector for input from a S-VHS VCR.

PRINT TRIG. BNC connector for the exposure control of a multi-
imager or another black and white peripheral.
Activated by Print B on the control panel.
NETWORK Modular network jack input from external network

services.
RS232 One standard 9-pin RS232 connector for VCR control

(1, 2) and one 9-pin connector reserved for future use.
VGA 15-pin S-VGA connector to the unit’s monitor.
Parallel Port Parallel connector to an InkJet report printer.
AC OUT Two isolated power outputs for external peripherals.

Fuses 3 x 4 A/220 V, thermal CB.
Modem Modular phone jack input from telephone line, for use
with service platform (iLinq)
USB Universal serial bus connector input from peripherals

with USB connections and technical support.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
&RQQHFWLQJWKH)RRWVZLWFK
Connect the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit’s triple
footswitch to the FOOTSWITCH input on the left side of the front panel.
Each of the footswitch pedals may be assigned to correspond with
various control panel functions. For further information, refer to the
System Tab section, page 14-11.
:KHHOV
Examine the wheels frequently for defects to avoid breaking or
jamming.
Wheel Position Characteristics
Front Swivel, swivel lock and full lock.
Rear Swivel, but do not lock.
3HGDO
The pedal is located between the front wheels of the unit and enables
the user to control the movement of the wheels. When it is in the middle
position, the wheels can be moved freely.
Figure 2-3: Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert Ultrasound Unit Pedal
Pedal Position Function
Left Locks wheels.

Middle Wheels completely free.
Right Locked front swivel.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
To engage in full lock (brake):

• Press the left side of the pedal.
To release the brake:

• Press the left or right side of the pedal to return it to the middle
position.
To engage front swivel lock:

• Press the right side of the pedal.
To release front swivel lock:

• Press the left side of the pedal to return it to the middle position.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
6ZLWFKLQJ2Q2II
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit’s power setup consists
of:
• An On/Off button on the top left corner of the control panel.
• A Circuit Breaker on the lower rear of the unit, wired in series with
the mains power input.
• A Mains Power Cord attached to the lower rear panel of the unit.
6ZLWFKLQJ2QWKH8QLW
1. Insert the plug into the mains power socket.
ON Position 2. Set the circuit breaker to ON. The On/Off switch text label and
green LED light are lit.
On/Off 3. Hold down the On/Off button on the control panel for a few
seconds. The On/Off switch text label will switch off, (the green
LED remains lit) and a click will be heard.
,QLWLDOL]DWLRQ
When the On/Off button is pressed on the control panel, the unit
undergoes an initialization sequence, which includes the following
steps:
• Loading of the operating system.
• Quick diagnostics of the unit.
• Detection of the connected probes.
• If the last used probe is connected, the unit enters 2D-Mode and
the probe and application that were last used before the unit
was shut down is active.
• If a probe is connected, even if it differs from the last used
probe, the unit will enter 2D-Mode.
• If no probe is connected, the Select Probe and Application
screen is displayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
6ZLWFKLQJ2IIWKH8QLW
When the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit is switched off,
the system performs an automatic shutdown sequence. The unit can be
switched off into two states:
• Standby Mode, described below, which reduces the bootup time
when the unit is restarted.
• Full Shutdown, described on page 2-18.
6WDQGE\0RGH
In Standby Mode, most of the system is powered down, but a certain
portion of the unit remains energized. Standby Mode is indicated by the
blinking On/Off button text. When the Plug&Scan (UPS) option is
installed on a unit, it is possible to disconnect the mains power cord and
have the computer remain in Standby Mode for approximately one hour.
For details, refer the the Plug&Scan section, page 2-19.
Important: Standby Mode ensures that the next time the system is switched on,
it will be ready for scanning in less than 30 seconds. In order for the system to
remain in Standby Mode, it MUST remain connected to the electrical outlet at
all times. If the unit is disconnected from the electrical outlet, it will undergo
complete shutdown and require regular bootup time, unless the Plug&Scan
(UPS) option is installed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
To initialize Standby Mode:

On/Off 1. Hold down the On/Off button on the control panel for three
seconds. The system enters Standby Mode, indicated by the
On/Off button text blinking,
OR
Ctrl Simultaneously press <Ctrl> on the alphanumeric keyboard and

hold down the On/Off button on the control panel until the Shut
Down screen is displayed.
+
On/Off
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to Standby and press Select. The system enters

Standby Mode, indicated by the On/Off button text blinking.
Note: To abort the Standby procedure, TRACKBALL to Cancel and press

Select Select.
Note: When the mains power cord is removed from the electricity supply:
• If the unit has the Plug&Scan (UPS) option installed, the system
will remain in Standby Mode for approximately one hour.
• If the unit does not have the Plug&Scan (UPS) option installed,
the system will automatically initialize a Full Shutdown,
described in the following section.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
)XOO6KXWGRZQ
When the system is shut down completely, a Full Shutdown sequence
is performed. While the unit is connected to the electrical outlet in Full
Shutdown Mode, the On/Off button text is backlit.
Important: From Full Shutdown, the system requires approximately two

minutes to bootup, after which it is ready for scanning.
To initialize Full Shutdown:

Ctrl 1. Simultaneously press <Ctrl> on the alphanumeric keyboard and
hold down the On/Off button on the control panel for three seconds.
The Shut Down screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-4.
+
On/Off
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to Full Shutdown and press Select. The system

performs a complete shutdown.
Note: To abort the Full Shutdown procedure, TRACKBALL to Cancel and

press Select.
Select
(PHUJHQF\6KXWGRZQ
If the regular shutdown procedure cannot be completed, an emergency
shutdown can be performed.
Note: Always contact the nearest GE Ultrasound Service Center if a problem

occurs during the shutdown procedure.
To perform an emergency shutdown:

On/Off • Hold down the On/Off button on the control panel for eight seconds.
The system initializes a Full Shutdown.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
3OXJ 6FDQ 836 2SWLRQ

If the Plug&Scan option is installed, the unit can be disconnected from
the electrical outlet while in Standby Mode for approximately one hour
without the system initializing a Full Shutdown.
This option enables the user to transport the system, and be assured
that when the unit is next switched on, it will be ready for scanning in
less that 30 seconds.
Note: While powered by the Plug&Scan option in Standby Mode, the On/Off
button text will blink.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
7UDQVSRUWDWLRQDQG3RVLWLRQLQJ
To avoid damaging the unit and to ensure maximum safety while
transporting or moving the unit, ensure that the precautions described
in this section are taken.
Note: If the Plug&Scan option is installed, the procedures for moving the unit
short distances, temporarily, differ from those for preparing the unit for long
distance transportation and storage.
0RYLQJ3UHFDXWLRQV
Before moving the unit, prepare it as described below. Ensure that all
necessary precautions are taken before and during the move to prevent
injury.
To prepare the unit to be moved temporarily (Plug&Scan installed):
1. Eject any MO disks to prevent damage to the archive.
2. Initialize Standby Mode, as described on page 2-17. The On/Off

button text will blink for approximately one hour, during which the
unit’s battery is energized.
3. Remove the plug from the mains power socket.
4. Disconnect all cables linking the unit to any off-board peripheral

devices, such as a computer network. Note the marks on each
cable to reconnect them later.
5. Secure and loop the power cord counterclockwise around the hook
on the unit’s rear panel.
Warning: DO NOT tuck the power cord under the area where it is attached
to the console. This could loosen the connection.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
6. Place all probes in the probe holders and ensure that the probe
cables do not protrude from the unit or interfere with the wheels.
Store all other probes in their original cases, soft cloth or foam, to
prevent damage.
Important: Before moving to a new site, remove all the probes and pack
them in their original cases, soft cloth or foam, to prevent damage.
7. Ensure that no loose items are left on the unit. All loose items, such
as gel and optical disks, should be stored in the unit pockets.
8. Unlock the brakes by pressing down on the pedal to return it to its

middle position.
To prepare the unit to be moved (Plug&Scan not installed) or to

prepare the unit for long term storage or long distance
transportation:
1. Eject any MO disks to prevent damage to the archive.
2. Initialize a Full Shutdown, as described in the Full Shutdown

section, page 2-18.
FF Position
3. Set the circuit breaker to OFF.
4. Remove the plug from the mains power socket.
5. Follow steps 4 through 8 of the previous procedure.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
To ensure safety while moving the unit on foot:

• Proceed cautiously when crossing door or elevator thresholds.
• Grasp the front handle grips or the back handle bar and push or
pull. DO NOT attempt to move the unit using cables or probe
connectors. Take extra care while moving the unit long distances
and on inclines.
• Ensure that the unit does not strike walls or door frames.
• Ensure that the pathway is clear.
• Move the unit slowly and carefully.
• Know where the foot brake is located and learn how to use it. Set
the foot brake whenever you stop.
• One adult can usually move the unit along a level surface for short
distances. Use two or more persons to move the unit on inclines or
over long distances.
Caution: Avoid inclines that are steeper than 10 degrees, or bumps higher
than 2.5 cm (1 in), to prevent the unit from tipping over. When the destination is
reached, lock the front wheel brakes.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
7UDQVSRUWLQJWKH8QLW
Take extra care when transporting the unit by vehicle. In addition to the
moving precautions listed in the Moving Precautions section,
page 2-20, ensure that the following precautions are taken:
Important: If you will be moving the unit to other sites, save and reuse the
original packaging. GE service representatives or their assignees should
perform the move. A specially designed van should also be used.
To ensure safety while transporting the unit by vehicle:

1. Disconnect all probes and secure them in their boxes.
2. Use the control panel release handle, situated under the center
front of the control panel, to lower the control panel to its minimum
height.
3. Ensure that all peripherals are secured.
4. Ensure that the transporting vehicle is appropriate for the unit’s

weight. The recommended load capacity is a minimum of
160 - 168 kg (353 - 370 lbs). The vehicle should have good shock
absorbers and a door large enough for the unit with its monitor and
any peripherals to clear.
5. Park the vehicle on a level surface for loading and unloading.
6. Secure the unit while it is on the lift, to prevent rolling. Do not

attempt to hold it in place by hand. Cushion the unit and strap the
lower part so that it does not break loose.
Warning: Ensure that the lift can handle a minimum of 360 kg (794 lb),
although a capacity of 400 kg (882 lb) is preferable. DO NOT remain on the
lift with the unit.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
7. Load the unit into the van very carefully, ensuring that it remains
over its center of gravity.
8. Ensure that the unit is secured inside the vehicle, keeping it still and
upright yet not damaging the control panel. Secure it with straps to
prevent movement while in transit.
Warning: DO NOT attempt to hold the unit in place by hand.
9. Drive cautiously to prevent vibration damage. Avoid unpaved roads,

excessive speeds, and erratic stops and starts.
5HLQVWDOOLQJDWD1HZ/RFDWLRQ
Lock the wheel brakes when the unit is installed at a new location.
Follow the installation procedures described on page 2-10.
8QLW$FFOLPDWLRQ7LPH
Following transport, the unit may be very cold or hot. Allow the unit to
acclimate before being switched on. Acclimation will take one hour for
each 2.5oC increment when the unit’s temperature is below 10oC or
above 35oC.
o 0 2.5 5 7.5 10 35 40 42.5 45 47.5 50 52.5 55 57.5 60

C
o 32 36.5 41 45.5 50 95 104 108.5 113 117.5 122 126.5 131 135.5 140
F
Hours 4 3 2 1 0 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
&RQQHFWLQJDQG'LVFRQQHFWLQJ3UREHV
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit operates with various
types of flat phased, convex and linear electronic array probes used for
scanning patients. Once connected, the probes can be selected for
different applications.
• The Vivid 3 Pro ultrasound unit contains two active probe ports,
one park probe port and one pencil probe port.
• The Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit contains three active probe

ports and one pencil probe port.
Probes can be connected or changed at any time while the unit is on or
off.
To connect probes:
1. Inspect the probe socket to verify that it is free from debris.
2. Hold the rectangular probe connector vertically so that the probe’s

cable points upwards.
3. Set the lock to the OPEN (horizontal) position.
4. Gently insert the connector into one of the matching sockets on the
lower control panel of the unit. Push the connector in as far as
possible.
5. Rotate the locking latch 90 degrees clockwise to lock the connector

into place.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
To display the Select Probe and Application screen:

Probe
• Press Probe on the control panel,
OR
Press <Preset> on the alphanumeric keyboard.
The Select Probe and Application screen is displayed. Up to four

probes (Expert), or three probes (Pro), with their associated
applications, are displayed on this screen. When a new probe is
connected, the operating system updates the Select Probe and
Application screen. Refer to Chapter 13, Probes, for further
information.
To disconnect probes:
1. Rotate the lock 90 degrees counterclockwise, releasing it from its
lock position.
2. Remove the connector from the probe socket.
Caution: Handle the probes gently while connecting and disconnecting them.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
$GMXVWLQJWKH'LVSOD\0RQLWRU
The display monitor’s Contrast and Brightness controls may need
periodic adjustment due to changes in ambient light.
Note: When the unit is first switched on, the image may appear to be too dark
or to have too much contrast. The display monitor takes between ten and fifteen
minutes to warm up before it shows its final contrast, brightness and color hues.
Perform screen calibration only after the display monitor has warmed up.
9LYLG3UR0RQLWRU$GMXVWPHQW
The Contrast and Brightness buttons on the front part of the display
monitor can be used to perform screen calibration. Adjusting the
contrast changes the black level in the display, while adjusting the
brightness changes the white level in the display.
To adjust the contrast or brightness of the display monitor:
1. With the display monitor menu turned off, press the button (to
adjust contrast) or the button (to adjust brightness) on the front

of the monitor.
2. Press the + or – buttons on the front of the monitor to decrease or

increase the selection value.
3. Press the Exit button twice to close the on-screen menu.
Important: All the display monitor controls, other than the contrast and
brightness controls, are factory adjusted for optimum settings and usually do
not require further adjustment. Upon installation, the service representative
adjusts the display monitor to the user’s preference. To adjust controls
independently, see the information in the booklet supplied with the display
monitor.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
9LYLG([SHUW0RQLWRU$GMXVWPHQW
The JAGTM control dial located on the front part of the display monitor
can be used to adjust contrast and brightness settings and perform
screen calibration. Adjusting the contrast changes the black level in the
display, while adjusting the brightness changes the white level in the
display.
To adjust the contrast or brightness of the display monitor:
1. Press the JAG control dial found in the bottom-center of the lower
monitor frame casing. The Main menu is displayed.
2. Rotate the JAG control dial to highlight either the Contrast
icon or the Brightness icon.
3. Press the JAG control dial to select and activate the required
function. A control screen is displayed.
4. Rotate the JAG control dial to adjust the settings as required, then
press the JAG control dial to exit the control screen. The Main
menu is redisplayed.
5. Rotate the JAG control dial to highlight Exit, then press the JAG
control dial to exit the main menu. The scanning screen is
redisplayed.
Important: All the display monitor controls, other than the contrast and
brightness controls, are factory adjusted for optimal settings and do not usually
require further adjustment. Upon installation, the service representative will
adjust the display monitor to the user’s preferences. To adjust the controls
independently, refer to the information booklet supplied with the display
monitor.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
&KDSWHU *HWWLQJ6WDUWHGP
2SHUDWRU&RQWUROV
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit is operated through a
control panel consisting of a set of fixed buttons, rotary knobs, a
TRACKBALL, an alphanumeric keyboard and soft keys. The buttons and
controls are grouped in areas on the control panel according to their
functions.
The operator controls are used to perform several types of actions:
• Enter patient details.
• Perform an examination and apply different modes.
• Store static images or sequences (cineloops) for later analysis.
• Store reports containing patient information.
• Adjust image quality parameters.
• Control the VCR and other peripherals.
• Perform measurements on the images (M&A).
• Add text, arrows and bodymark annotations.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
&RQWURO3DQHO
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert control panel consists of several sets of
buttons:
• On/Off button that powers the unit on or off.
• Pre-examination buttons, such as Patient ID and Probe, that
enable essential details to be entered and tools to be selected.
• Buttons that enable toggling between different modes, performing
different functions within a mode, and various other scan related
functions such as reporting, VCR recording, printing, and so on.
• A TRACKBALL, together with supplementary buttons that enable
navigation around the screen. For further information, refer to the
Trackball Operation section, page 2-41.
• Rotary knobs that are used to adjust variable parameters.
• Soft keys, whose functions vary according to the current scan
mode.The soft keys are grey and are located at the top of the
control panel, near the screen. They are not labelled. An identical
set of corresponding soft keys is displayed on the screen. A label is
displayed to indicate the soft key’s function in a particular mode and
the function of the corresponding soft keys on the control panel. For
further information, refer to the Soft Keys section, page 2-43.
• Standard alphanumeric keyboard with designated function keys.
The alphanumeric keyboard is used for entering patient information,
and/or text annotations, on the screen. For further information, refer
to the Alphanumeric Keyboard section, page 2-46.
%XWWRQ,OOXPLQDWLRQ
The flat buttons on the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert control panel are
labeled. The labels are illuminated according to their availability. Only
the buttons that are available for use in the current mode and/or
application are illuminated.
• Active selections that are toggled on have the green light on the
button lit.
• Enabled selections have the button label illumination lit.
• Disabled selections have the button label illumination turned off.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
&RQWURO3DQHO/D\RXW
Figure 2-5: Control Panel Layout

2300163-100 Rev. 0
The following picture illustrates the layout of the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3
Expert ultrasound unit’s control panel. The buttons and controls are
grouped together by function for ease of use. A detailed description of
the buttons is provided on the following pages.
Measurement
VCR Control
and Print
Buttons
Buttons
Buttons
Display
Format
Basic Mode
Adjustment
Parameter
Rotaries
Buttons
Freeze
Scan Mode
Selection
Buttons
Operation
Trackball
Soft Keys
TGC Gain
Sliders
Alphanumeric Keyboard
Archiving &
Reporting
Buttons
On/Off
Button
Function Keys
Pre-examination
Buttons
Playback
VCR
Figure 2-6: Control Panel Layout Diagram

2300163-100 Rev. 0
3UHH[DPLQDWLRQ%XWWRQV
The following buttons are used to turn on the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3
Expert ultrasound unit, enter the patient’s details and select the
appropriate probe and application for performing the examination.
Button Description
On/Off Turns the unit on and off.

For more information about switching the unit off,
refer to page 2-15.
Button Description
Patient ID Displays the Patient Details screen that enables

the user to enter patient details, such as ID
number, name and age. For information about
entering patient details, refer to page 2-56.
Displays the Select Probe and Application

Probe screen that enables the users to select the
appropriate probe and application preset for the
current examination. For information about
selecting probes, refer to page 2-62.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6FDQ0RGH6HOHFWLRQ%XWWRQV
The following buttons are used to select the required scan mode, and to
select additional tools that enhance the application’s capabilities. For
detailed information about scanning, refer to Chapter 3, Modes.
Button Description
Displays the default examination screen, and

2D
enables 2D imaging. Used to display a
two-dimensional, full-sized greyscale image. For
further information, refer to the 2D-Mode
Imaging section, page 3-6.
Displays the examination screen in Color Flow

CFM Mapping Mode. Used to display color-coded
blood flow information superimposed on the
2D-Mode or M-Mode displays. For further
information, refer to the CFM-Mode Imaging
section, page 3-19.
Displays the examination screen in Continuous

CW Wave Doppler mode. Allows examination of
blood flow data all along the Doppler CW mode
cursor. For further information, refer to the
Doppler Mode Imaging section, page 3-52.
Displays the examination screen in Pulsed Wave

PW Doppler mode. Used for displaying the Doppler
spectrum of blood flow at a selected part of the
anatomy. For further information, refer to the
Displays the M-Mode examination screen and

M enables M-Mode functions. Used for viewing
motion patterns.For further information, refer to
the M-Mode Imaging section, page 3-31.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Button Description
Reserved for future use.

Mode 1
Displays Angio color processing on vascular

Mode 2
applications only.
Toggles the cursor display on/off. Enables

Cursor
selection between a single line cursor and a gate
cursor, according to the mode in which the user
is working.
Note: The scan mode buttons are enabled and disabled according to the probe
or application in use.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
)UHH]H%XWWRQV
The freeze buttons are used to freeze images and cineloops, and to
activate or freeze 2D-Mode.
Button Description
Used to freeze images and cineloops in all

Freeze modes for on-line analysis and for storing for
future use. When a scan is frozen, the TRACKBALL
can be used to scroll through the cineloop.
Activates or freezes 2D-Mode while in

simultaneous mode of operation. For example,
2D Freeze
when scanning simultaneously in Triplex Mode,
pressing 2D Freeze deactivates the 2D image,
leaving the Doppler Spectrum active.
Activates or freezes 2D-Mode, when 2D-Mode is

displayed on the screen at the same time as
another scrolling mode. For example, if both 2D
2D Update and PW modes are displayed on the screen and
the PW mode is active, pressing 2D Update
activates 2D-Mode and freezes PW mode. If 2D
Update is pressed a second time, 2D-Mode is
frozen and PW mode is re-activated.
This button is also used with the Triplex Doppler
Mode.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
'LVSOD\)RUPDW%XWWRQV
The following buttons provide the user with different view formats to
best suit the user’s requirements, such as viewing two or four images
simultaneously.
Button Description
Toggles the image size when working in

combined modes. For example, when scanning
with 2D-Mode in one segment of the screen and
Image Size Doppler Mode in the other, pressing Image Size
increases the size of the smaller image and
decreases the size of the larger one. The
scrolling image can be scaled to full size, 2:1 or
3:1 by repeatedly pressing Image Size.
When using two (side-by-side) or four (quad)
display, this button toggles between the regular
multiple window display and a multiple window
display utilizing the full screen. For details, refer
to the Working in Split Screen Mode section,
page 3-13.
Enables multiple image display windows, in

which two or four images can be viewed
1/2/4
simultaneously. Modes can differ between
windows and different parameters can be set for
each window.
When scanning in combined modes, pressing

Active Mode
Active Mode will switch the default soft key
menu to other applicable soft key menus
associated with the different modes currently
used.
A button used to toggle between the windows in

Window Select
multiple imaging mode and to select the active
image.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0HDVXUHPHQW%XWWRQV
The following buttons are used to take measurements and perform
calculations on the obtained values.
Button Description
Activates the Measure and Assign method of

Caliper measurements and calculations. For further
information, refer to the Measure and Assign
section, page 6-3.
Activates the Assign and Measure method of

Measure measurements and calculations. For further
information, refer to the Assign and Measure
section, page 6-43.
([LW%XWWRQ
Button Description
Exit
Used to exit from any of the applications.
When this button is pressed, the most recent
frozen image is displayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$UFKLYLQJ 5HSRUWLQJ%XWWRQV
The following buttons are used to save images for archiving purposes,
future viewing and analysis, as well as for printing selected images.
Button Description
Used to store images and cineloops. The images

Store and cineloops are stored in the archive database,
and are placed in the clipboard so that images
can be viewed at any time. For further
information about storing cineloops, refer to the
Storing a Cineloop section, page 10-18.
Opens the optional Archive function, where

Archive patient folders can be accessed and managed.
Patient information includes reports containing
previous data accumulated on the patient, and
related images. For further information about
using the Archive function, refer to the Archiving
Package section, page 10-2.
Report
Displays a patient report. The user can select
different report templates from the
report-template collection, in order to generate
reports in various formats. For further information
about using reports, refer to Chapter 9,
Reporting.
Worksheet Displays a table of values so that calculations

can be made based on the measurements taken
during the examination. For further information
about using the worksheet, refer to the
Worksheet section, page 6-48.
Protocol Enters Stress Echo Mode. For further information

about the Stress Echo Mode, refer to Chapter 5,
Stress Echo.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
3K\VLR%XWWRQ
Button Description
Physio Controls the ECG parameters. Activates the soft

key menu dedicated to control ECG and Phono
settings. For details, refer to Chapter 4,
Physiological Traces.
9&5&RQWURO%XWWRQV
The following buttons are used to control the VCR attached to the Vivid
3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit. For further information about
using the VCR, refer to Chapter 12, Peripherals.
Button Description
Toggles VCR to RECORD or PAUSE while

VCR Record recording the current examination. A graphic icon
and a counter on the screen inform the user in
real-time of the VCR status and counter content.
Activates a dedicated soft key menu designated

VCR PlayB to control the VCR Playback functions. A graphic
icon on screen informs the user of the VCR
status in real-time. The on-screen counter is
turned off to allow the user to read the recorded
counter.
3ULQW%XWWRQV
The following buttons are used to print images and reports to a color
and/or black & white printer.
Button Description
Print A Prints a copy of the displayed image on the

printer assigned to the Print A port.
Print B Prints a copy of the displayed image on the

printer assigned to the Print B port.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
7UDFNEDOO2SHUDWLRQ
The TRACKBALL and its related buttons are used to navigate, point to
and select objects on the screen, as well as to select options from
on-screen menus that are unique to each one of the scan modes. It
allows the user to position cursors and calipers while performing
measurements, and to scroll through cineloops when the image is
frozen.
Button Description
TRACKBALL Used for navigation, in conjunction with the three

following buttons, to move, select or activate
objects on the screen. For example, to operate a
soft key on the screen, the user should
TRACKBALL to it and press Select. The
TRACKBALL is also used for taking
measurements, scrolling through cineloops and
navigating.
Trackball Toggles the TRACKBALL assignment between

mode-specific options. By pressing Trackball,
the TRACKBALL changes its function within the
mode. For example, when using Zoom, pressing
Trackball changes the TRACKBALL’s function
from controlling the zoom or pan position to
scrolling through a cineloop.
Select Activates selections in conjunction with other

buttons. Mostly used with the TRACKBALL to
select objects on the screen. TRACKBALL to an
object and press Select. This button is also used
as a shortcut, in parallel with the 2D Update
button.
Menu Displays a function-specific menu, when a

selection is required. For example, when pressed
while entering text annotation, it displays a menu
with common text annotation words.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
%DVLF0RGH3DUDPHWHU$GMXVWPHQW5RWDULHV
The following controls are used to modify and adjust the unit’s display
to best suit the user’s requirements, such as color, gain, zoom and
image depth, according to the mode being operated by the user.
Control Description
2D Gain A rotary that controls the total gain of greyscale

images in 2D-Mode. Intensity is increased when
rotated clockwise and decreased when rotated
counterclockwise.
Active Gain A rotary that controls the gain of other activated

modes, such as Color, PW, CW or M-Mode.
TGC Gain Sliders Sliding keys that compensate for depth-related

attenuation in an image. Amplifies returning
signals to correct for the attenuation caused by
tissue at increasing depths.
Depth A rotary that controls the displayed depth, which

may be changed according to the anatomical
size or the region of interest.
A rocker used to alter the angle of the Doppler

Steer
ultrasound beam with respect to the Linear Array
transducer. The steering angle to the left and
right is variable.
Zoom A rotary controlling image magnification. Rotate

clockwise to increase zoom factor, or
counterclockwise to decrease zoom. Press the
rotary to enter or exit Zoom.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6RIW.H\V
The soft keys are located at the top of the control panel (B, below) and
are not labeled. An identical set of corresponding soft key icons (A,
below) is displayed on the screen for each mode. A label above and/or
below each soft key on the screen indicates its function (when pressed
and/or rotated) and that of the soft key on the control panel in that
particular mode. The functions of the soft keys vary according to the
mode and/or module in which the user is working.
Soft keys on the screen
Soft keys on the control panel
Figure 2-7: Soft Keys Diagrams

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Key Description
Soft Menu A four-way rocker used to access mode-specific

Rocker menus, select a menu option and adjust
option-related values. The vertical arrows are
used to select the menu options and the
horizontal arrows are used to adjust the values,
for example, color persistence in a specific
mode. For further information about the Soft
Menu rocker, refer to the Soft Menu Rocker
Functions section, page 3-87.
Soft Key Four rotary knobs that correspond to soft key

rotaries displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Their function varies according to the scan mode
and position.
Each rotary knob can have two positions
(rotation in both normal and/or pressed position).
These rotaries can be operated by using the
corresponding soft key rotaries on the control
panel.
The mode specific function of each position per
mode is described in Chapter 3, Modes.
Four soft keys that correspond to soft keys

LED Soft Key
displayed at the bottom of the screen. Their
function varies according to the scan mode.
The functions can be selected from the control
panel, or the user can TRACKBALL to the soft key
on the screen and press Select.
In some cases, a simulated light indicator is
displayed on the soft key icon to indicate that its
function is active.
The mode specific function of each position per
mode is described in Chapter 3, Modes.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
)XQFWLRQ%XWWRQV
Button Description
Function 1 This button activates the bodymark annotation

capability. For further information about this
function, refer to the Inserting Bodymark
Annotations section, page 2-74.
Function 2-4 These buttons are not currently enabled.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$OSKDQXPHULF.H\ERDUG
The following keys on the alphanumeric keyboard enable the user to
activate various functions that are not directly related to scanning, such
as creating scanning applications (presets) according to the user’s
preferences.
Key Description
Help Displays this User Manual for reference.
Preset Displays the Select Probe and Application

screen, containing the different application
presets for the various probes.
CTRL> + Preset
Displays a dialog box that enables presets to be
created, modified or restored to factory settings
by the user. Presets are sets of parameters
defined for optimal use in particular
examinations. For further information, refer to
the Application Presets section, page 14-1.
Config Displays the configuration dialog box. This

allows the user to configure various settings on
the unit. Certain parts of the configuration setup
are accessible only to service technicians.
Text Enables textual annotations to be inserted on an

image. The annotations can be typed or selected
from a menu. Press Menu and select an
annotation from the displayed list of terms
specific to the current scan mode.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Key Description
Page Erase Erases all annotations typed on the screen.
Line Erase Erases annotations typed on the screen, one line

at a time, starting with the most recently typed
line.
Arrow Displays an arrow that can be used to point to

specific objects in the image. For example, when
inserting annotations, the arrow could be used to
mark the object to which the annotation refers.
Delete Meas
Deletes all measurements on the screen.
Delete
Deletes measurements or text annotations.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
)RRWVZLWFK2SHUDWLRQ
The triple footswitch enables alphanumeric keyboard functions to be
performed using the user’s feet. Each pedal on the footswitch can be
configured to control the operation of any of the On/Off buttons in the
control panel, for example, Freeze, Store and 2D Update. For further
information, refer to Chapter 14, Presets and System Setup.
Figure 2-8: Footswitch
Note: To connect the footswitch, refer to Figure 2-1. The footswitch is

connected in the patient trace I/O panel, located in the front left area of the
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
&KDSWHU
%HJLQQLQJDQ([DPLQDWLRQ
*HWWLQJ6WDUWHG
Beginning an examination consists of four steps, as follows:

• Logging on to the System, below.
• Entering Patient Details, page 2-56.
• Selecting a Probe and Application, page 2-62.
• Beginning a Scan, page 2-65.
/RJJLQJ2QWRWKH6\VWHP &RQILJXUDEOH
Before performing an examination, the user has the option to log on to
the system as part of a defined user group. Logging on as part of a user
group enables user-specific and user-defined settings and presets to
be used.
Note: The option of multiple user groups only exists on systems that have the
Archive option installed. In systems that do not have the Archive option
installed, all users are members of the Default user group, the main group of
users.
The system can be configured to be password protected. If so, the User

Log On dialog box is displayed automatically when the system is
started up. If the user does not enter the correct password, as
described below, the system will not allow archived data to be
accessed.
If the system is not password protected, the User Log On dialog box is
not displayed when the system is started up, and the settings and
presets of the last activated user group are loaded. If the user wishes to
activate a different set of presets, the logon screen can be manually
displayed, as described in the User Log On section, page 2-53.
Note: Refer to the Users section, page 14-72, for details on configuring the
system and users, as well as a detailed explanation of user groups.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
8VHU/RJ2Q 3DVVZRUG3URWHFWHG6\VWHP
In the User Log On dialog box, the user enters the system password to
operate the system and access the patient archive.
To log on to a password protected system:
On/Off 1. Press On/Off on the control panel to switch on the system. The
User Log On dialog box is displayed, as shown below:
Figure 2-9: User Log On Dialog Box
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the appropriate user name in the Select your name
dropdown list and press Select. The corresponding user group is
displayed in the Group field.
Select 3. TRACKBALL to the required dataflow in the Dataflow dropdown list

and press Select. The dataflow defines how patient information and
images are managed and stored.
Note: Refer to Chapter 11, Connectivity, for a detailed description of the

different dataflow options available.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the Enter Password field and use the alphanumeric
keyboard to enter the system password.
Keyboard Note: The password is system specific, rather than user specific.
7
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. If the correct password was
entered, the 2D default scanning screen is displayed, enabling the
user to begin an examination, as described on page 2-56. If an
incorrect password was entered, a dialog box is displayed
requesting that the password be re-entered.
Select
Note: At any stage during operation, simultaneously press <Ctrl> + on
the alphanumeric keyboard to redisplay the User Log On dialog box, in
which you can log on as a different user and/or change the currently active
dataflow.
&KDQJLQJWKH6\VWHP3DVVZRUG
The system password can be changed as required.
Important: When the password is changed, if affects all the system users.
To change the system password:

On/Off 1. Press On/Off on the control panel to switch on the system,
OR
If the system is running, simultaneously press <Ctrl> + on the

alphanumeric keyboard.
+
The User Log On dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-9.


2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the Enter Password field and use the alphanumeric
Keyboard
7
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to the Change Password field and press Select. The
Change Password dialog box is displayed, as shown below:
Select
Figure 2-10: Change Password Dialog Box
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the New Password field and use the alphanumeric
keyboard to enter a new password.
Keyboard 5. TRACKBALL to the Confirm New Password field and use the
7 alphanumeric keyboard to re-enter the new password.
TRACKBALL 6. TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. The password will be changed

for all system users.
Note: If the system password has been forgotten, contact your GE Service
Staff for a temporary password. The temporary password, valid for 24
Select hours, enables the system to be accessed and the password to be
changed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
3DVVZRUG8QNQRZQ 3DVVZRUG3URWHFWHG
6\VWHP
A password protected system can be used for scanning by users who
do not have access to the system password. The user will be able to
scan, but will not be able to store or recall data from the archive.
To log on to a password protected system without a password:
On/Off 1. Press On/Off on the control panel to switch on the system. The
User Log On dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-9.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the No Password (No Archive) on-screen button

and press Select. A 2D default scanning screen is displayed,
enabling the user to begin scanning. The Archive button on the
control panel and the <Config> key on the alphanumeric keyboard
are disabled.
Select
Notes:
• If the password is found at any stage during operation, simultaneously

press <Ctrl> + on the alphanumeric keyboard to redisplay the
User Log On dialog box, in which you can enter the system password
and log on to the system.
• If the system password has been forgotten, contact your GE Service
Staff for a temporary password. The temporary password, valid for 24
hours, enables the system to be accessed and the password to be
changed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
8VHU/RJ2Q 8QSURWHFWHG6\VWHP
Logging on as part of a group enables user-specific and user-defined
settings and presets to be used.
Note: The option of multiple user groups only exists on systems that have the
Archive option installed. In systems that do not have the Archive option
installed, all users are members of the Default user group, the main group of
users.
To log on to an unprotected system:

On/Off 1. Press On/Off on the control panel to switch on the system. A 2D
default scanning screen in displayed.
Note: The User Log On dialog box is not displayed automatically.
2. Simultaneously press <Ctrl> + on the alphanumeric keyboard.

The User Log On dialog box is displayed, as shown below:
+

Figure 2-11: User Log On Dialog Box (Unprotected System)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
dropdown list and press Select. The corresponding user group is
displayed in the Group field.
Select
4. TRACKBALL to the required dataflow in the Dataflow dropdown list
and press Select. The dataflow defines how patient information and
images are managed and stored.
Note: Refer to Chapter 11, Connectivity, for a detailed description of the

available dataflow options.
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. The 2D default scanning

screen is redisplayed, enabling the user to begin an examination,
as described in the Entering Patient Details section, page 2-56.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
(QWHULQJ3DWLHQW'HWDLOV
When the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit is switched on,
one of the following screens is displayed:
• If no probe is connected, the Select Probe and Application screen is
displayed, as described on page 2-62.
• If a probe is connected, a 2D scanning screen is displayed, showing
the details of the last scanned patient, including the last selected
probe and application.
• If a probe is connected, and no patient has been scanned with the
unit, a 2D screen is displayed, showing Default as the patient name,
as shown below:
Figure 2-12: 2D Default Scanning Screen
An examination begins by entering the patient’s details.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
Patient information can be stored in the database, and retrieved when

the patient comes in for subsequent examinations. Patient information
can be entered either by defining a new patient, as described on page
2-58, or by retrieving the details of an existing patient from the
database.
If a patient has previously been examined or entered into the database,
the Archive function must be activated in order to retrieve their data.
For further information about retrieving patient information, refer to the
Retrieving and Editing Archived Information section, page 10-22.
Note: The screens shown in this section may differ slightly from the user’s
screen, depending on how the system has been configured. For details, refer to
the Archive Tab section, page 14-34.
To access patient information:

Patient ID • Press Patient ID on the control panel. The Select screen is
displayed, as shown below:
Figure 2-13: Select Screen
Important: The layout of this screen is dependent on the screen layout

template selected during system configuration. For details, refer to the Archive
Tab section, page 14-34.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
'HILQLQJD1HZ3DWLHQW
New patient details, such as name, birth date and sex are defined the
first time the patient is examined using the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit. These details are stored in the database and can be
retrieved for future visits. Additional patient details, such as weight or
blood pressure, have to be re-entered each time an exam is performed.
To define a new patient:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to Start New Patient in the Select screen and press
Select. The Main Details screen is displayed, as shown below:
Select
Figure 2-14: Main Details Screen
Important: Either an ID number or Last Name is mandatory. All other patient

details are optional.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the Patient ID or Last Name field and press Select.
Select
Keyboard 3. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter the patient’s ID number or

7 last name.
4. Enter additional patient details in the remaining fields, using the

<Tab> or <Enter> keys on the alphanumeric keyboard to navigate
to each field,
OR
TRACKBALL TRACKBALL to the required field and press Select, or use the Select
Field soft key rotary to navigate through the fields.
Select
Select 5. Use the Select Page soft key rotary to navigate through the data
Page
entry pages. Refer to page 10-5, for screen captures of these
additional patient/exam data pages. These pages will automatically
contain the patient’s personal details entered in the Main Details
screen. Add patient details as required.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
Begin Exam 6. Press the Begin Exam soft key,
OR
Freeze Press Freeze,
OR
Patient ID Press Patient ID on the control panel.

The scanning screen is displayed, as shown on page 2-65. The
patient information that was entered is displayed at the top of the
screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
&KDQJLQJ3DWLHQW,QIRUPDWLRQ
During an exam, the user can access the current patient’s information
and change it, as required.
If a patient has been previously examined, or to check whether the
patient exists in the database, activate the Archive function. For details,
refer to the Adding or Locating Patient Records section, page 10-5.
To edit the current patient’s data:
Patient ID 1. Press Patient ID on the control panel. The Select screen is
displayed, as shown in Figure 2-13.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to Edit Current Patient in the Select screen and press
Select. The Main Details screen in displayed, showing information
previously entered for the patient.
Select
3. Use the <Tab> or <Enter> keys on the alphanumeric keyboard, or

the TRACKBALL and Select button to navigate to the field in which
information is to be edited.
TRACKBALL
Select
Keyboard 4. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to change the information as

7 required.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
6HOHFWLQJD3UREHDQG$SSOLFDWLRQ
Probes and their related application presets are selected from the
Select Probe and Application screen, described below.
Notes:
• The Select Probe and Application screen on the Vivid 3 Pro ultrasound
unit will display three possible probe connections, two active probes and
one pencil probe.
• The Select Probe and Application screen on the Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound
unit will display four possible probe connections, three active probes and
one pencil probe.
To select a probe and an application:

Probe 1. Press Probe on the control panel. The Select Probe and
Application screen is displayed, as shown below. The system will
automatically activate the probe and preset that was used last or
before the system was turned off.
Figure 2-15: Select Probe and Application Screen (Pro)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
Figure 2-16: Select Probe and Application Screen (Expert)
• The currently connected probes are displayed, in the same

order that they are connected to the unit. For example, the
left-most probe on the screen is the left-most probe connected
to the unit.
• The preset last used on the probes will be highlighted.
• The applications available for each probe are displayed beneath
the picture of the probe. Applications are presets that have been
predefined for specific examinations.
• The presets are arranged in a hierarchal format, listing the primary
applications. When a primary application is selected, a list of
secondary applications is displayed and can be selected. When a
secondary application is selected, the system enters scanning
mode.
• Below each list of probe application data on the screen, a
Previous button is displayed. Clicking the Previous button
activates the previous settings of the selected probe. This enables
a previously defined probe setting to be reused.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the required application preset in the frame of the

appropriate probe and press Select. The probe and application are
selected and 2D-Mode is displayed. The name of the currently
selected probe and application are displayed in the information bar
at the top of the screen. The examination can now begin,
Select
OR
TRACKBALL TRACKBALL to the probe icon/picture, and press Select to activate

that probe and operate it with the same user-entered parameters
and settings that were last set by the user on the probe.
Select
Note: Under normal circumstances, when the user does not wish to switch
presets and re-enter parameter settings, it is recommended to make a habit of
selecting the probe by clicking the probe icon/picture. This will ensure that each
probe is used according to the most recently user-entered preferences.
To illustrate:
Probe type A with Preset X is being used, and during the exam the user
changes some of the parameters to optimize for the specific patient.
The user now selects Probe type B with Preset Y, and again optimizes
a few parameters.
If Probe type A is selected again by clicking the probe’s icon/picture, the
probe will be reactivated with Preset X together with all of the
optimization parameters done previously.
Similarly, if the user activates Probe type B by clicking the probe icon/
picture, Preset Y will be reactivated with all previously entered
optimization parameters.
Note: For further information about probes, refer to Chapter 13, Probes. For
further information on defining presets, refer to Chapter 14, Presets and System
Setup.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
%HJLQQLQJD6FDQ
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit’s default scan mode is
2D-Mode. This mode is always activated when a new scan begins. For
further information on scanning modes, refer to Chapter 3, Modes.
6FDQQLQJ6FUHHQ/D\RXW
The scanning screen is divided into several areas, as follows:
Figure 2-17: Scanning Screen Layout
• Patient Information displays the information that uniquely

identifies the patient, such as patient name, identification number
and date of birth. This information is entered in the Main Details
screen, as described on page 2-56. The ID number is required for
storing the data obtained during the examination.
• Application and Probe displays the currently selected application
and probe to the right of the patient information.
• Date/Time displays the current date and time or, for a retrieved
image, the date and time at which the image was stored in the
archive.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
• Clipboard displays various images or data, depending on the

function being performed, as follows:
• Thumbnails of stored images and cineloops during an
examination, or when retrieving an archived patient file.
• M&A parameters or studies during measurement examinations.
• A list of protocols from which a selection must be made, for
stress echo studies.
• The stress level matrix during stress echo studies.
• Template names when a template must be selected, for
example, in order to generate a report.
• Soft keys are mode and module-specific function keys. The soft
keys on the screen correspond to the soft keys on the control panel.
Each key is labeled on the screen according to its function in the
currently used mode and can be operated by pressing or rotating
the corresponding soft key on the control panel Alternatively, the
user can TRACKBALL to the soft key and select it on the screen.
• Grey/Color Scale Maps are used to adjust contrast and
brightness, or to indicate the color coding and scale.
• Prompt/Status Bar displays system messages or actions that are
to be performed, for example, "Measure left ventricle area".
• Parameters Area displays the parameters of the scan mode, such
as the current scan frequency. When modified, the parameters are
highlighted, enabling the user to view the changes.
• VCR Status displays the VCR counter as it changes in real-time,
and the status icon, which indicates the current operating status of
the VCR. In addition, the name or label of the cassette, as it was
entered in the Main Details screen, is displayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
%DVLF6FDQQLQJ2SHUDWLRQV
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit enables the user to
perform various supplementary operations to improve both the
examination process and quality of the data archived for future use.
Use the buttons on the control panel, as described on page 2-31, to
select the required mode for scanning. For comprehensive information
about scanning mode functions, refer to Chapter 3, Modes.
6WRULQJ,PDJHVDQG&LQHORRSV
Images and cineloops can be stored at any time during the scanning
session. For further information, refer to Chapter 10, Patient
Management.
6WRULQJ,PDJHVRQ9&5
Images can be recorded on a video tape. Press VCR Record to start
recording. For detailed information about how to use the VCR recorder,
refer to Chapter 12, Peripherals.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
,QVHUWLQJ7H[W$QQRWDWLRQV
Text annotations may be inserted anywhere on the screen. When text
annotations are added, they are automatically displayed using the
primary font settings, as defined in the Annotations Settings Tab.
Note: For information on defining the primary and secondary font settings, as
well as for modifying, adding, removing or restoring annotation vocabulary
terms, refer to the Annotation Settings Tab section, page 14-49.
Figure 2-18: Typical Annotations Display with Mode-Specific Annotation

Menu

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
Adding Text Annotations

Text annotations can be entered manually by the user, or selected from
a preconfigured list of commonly used annotations, as described below.
To insert a text annotation:
1. Press the <Text> key on the alphanumeric keyboard. A text cursor
(I) is displayed in the upper-left corner of the display screen, or in
the user-defined home position.
Note: For details on setting the home position, refer to the Annotation
Settings Tab section, page 14-49.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL the text cursor to the position at which text is to be

inserted.
Important: DO NOT press Select, as this will disable the Text function,
indicated by the cursor being redisplayed as an arrow.
Keyboard 3. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to type the required text. To add
7 additional annotations, go to step 5,
OR
Menu Press Menu on the control panel. A list of mode-specific

abbreviations is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-18.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the required text and press Select. The selected text
is displayed at the insertion point on the screen.
Select
5. To add an additional annotation, repeat steps 2 through 4.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
To insert a text annotation in a secondary font:

(I) is displayed in the upper-left corner of the display screen, or in
the user-defined home position.
Note: For details on settings the home position, refer to the Annotation
Settings Tab section, page 14-49.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL the text cursor to the position at which text is to be

inserted.
Menu 3. Press Menu on the control panel. A list of mode-specific

TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to Secondary Font at the bottom of the menu list, and
press Select. A checkmark is displayed alongside this function.
Select
Keyboard 5. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to type the required text,

7
OR
Menu Press Menu on the control panel. A list of mode-specific

abbreviations is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-18. TRACKBALL to
the required text and press Select.
TRACKBALL
The selected text is displayed at the insertion point on the screen,

using the secondary font settings defined in the Annotation
Settings Tab, as described on page 14-49.
Select Note: The secondary font will be used for all annotations until this function
is deselected in the menu shown in Figure 2-18.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
Deleting Text Annotations

Individual annotations can be removed, as required. The user can also
delete all the annotations currently displayed in a single procedure.
To delete a specific text annotation from the screen:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the specific annotation to be deleted and press
Select. The selected annotation is highlighted.
Select
2. Press the <Line Erase> key on the alphanumeric keyboard. The

selected annotation is erased.
Notes:
• If the <Line Erase> key is pressed without pointing to a specific

annotation, the most recent annotation is erased.
• If the user used <Enter> when writing the annotation, creating a
multi-lined annotation, the system will consider it to be a single
annotation. When the <Line Erase> key is pressed, the entire
annotation is erased.
To erase all the annotations from the screen:

• Press the <Page Erase> key on the alphanumeric keyboard.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
Modifying Text Annotations

Once placed on the screen, annotations can be moved to another
location, and their content can be edited.
To move a text annotation:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the text to be moved.
Select 2. Press Select, and simultaneously use the TRACKBALL to move the
text to the desired location.
TRACKBALL
To correct or add to a text annotation:

TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the specific text to be changed, and press Select. The
selected text is highlighted blue.
Select
Keyboard 2. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to add or correct the text as

7 required.The blue highlighted text is automatically replaced with the
newly entered text.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
Adjusting the Text Cursor Home Location

The default location of the text cursor, meaning the position on the
screen at which it appears when the <Text> key is pressed on the
alphanumeric keyboard, can be changed using the the image display.
The home location can also be changed in the Annotation Settings
Tab, described on page 14-49.
To adjust the text cursor home location:
(I) is displayed in the currently defined home location.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL the text cursor to the position you want to set as the
home location.
Select
Menu 3. Press Menu on the control panel. A list of mode-specific

Menu 4. TRACKBALL to Set Home Position at the bottom of the menu list,
and press Select. The present text cursor position is configured as
the new home location, and updated in the Annotation Settings
Tab, described on page 14-49.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
,QVHUWLQJ%RG\PDUN$QQRWDWLRQV
Bodymark annotations are small graphic images that represent the
anatomy being examined. Using bodymarks, the user can indicate the
position that the probe was in during the examination.
Adding Bodymark Annotations

The user positions an indicator on the bodymark annotation, showing
the transducer location relative to the examined anatomy. A bodymark
annotation and transducer position indicator can be added or modified
at any time.
To insert a bodymark annotation:
Function 1 1. Press Function 1 on the control panel. A large chart of various
bodymark annotations is displayed, as shown below. The cursor
changes to a blue transducer position indicator.
Figure 2-19: Bodymark Annotations Chart

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL the transducer position indicator to the appropriate

bodymark annotation.
Rotate 3. Turn the Rotate soft key rotary to change the direction of the blue
transducer position indicator, and reflect the position of the
transducer relative to the examined body part.
Select 4. Press Select. The bodymark annotation and transducer position

indicator are displayed in the bottom-left corner of the scanning
screen.
Note: The bodymark annotation and transducer position indicator will

remain on the image when archived.
Modifying Bodymark Annotations

A bodymark annotation and transducer position indicator can be
modified as required.
To modify a bodymark annotation:
• Select a bodymark annotation as described in steps 1 through 4 of
the previous procedure for inserting a bodymark annotation. The
bodymark annotation displayed in the bottom-left corner of the
scanning screen is replaced with the new annotation.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
Deleting Bodymark Annotations

A bodymark annotation and probe position indicator can be removed as
required.
To modify a bodymark annotation:
Function 1 1. Press Function 1 on the control panel. A large chart of various
bodymark annotations and a blue probe position indicator is
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL the probe position indicator to No Marker and press

Select,
Select OR
Press the <Page Erase> key on the alphanumeric keyboard.
The bodymark annotation is removed from the scanning screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started
'HSWK$GMXVWPHQW
Adjusting the depth of an image while scanning enables the probe to
perform a deeper scan to compensate for density variance in body
tissue. The image is then displayed on a different scale. The maximal
and minimal image depth differ according to the transducer that is being
used. The range is between 2 cm (0.79 in) and 30 cm (11.8 in).
To adjust the image depth:
Depth • Rotate the Depth rotary on the control panel.
=RRP
Zooming an image magnifies the display in both frozen and live 2D,
M-Mode and combined mode images.
To zoom an image:
Zoom 1. Rotate the Zoom rotary on the control panel in order to magnify the
image.
2. Press the rotary to toggle between the actual-sized image and the
magnified image.
3HUIRUPLQJ0HDVXUHPHQWV
To perform measurements:
Caliper • Press the Caliper or Measure buttons. See Chapter 6, Cardiac
Measurement and Analysis and Chapter 7, Vascular Measurement
and Analysis, for further details.
Measure

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Getting Started

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
&KDSWHU
0RGHV
,QWURGXFWLRQ
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit provides several basic
scanning modes and several options for combining the use of these
modes. This chapter provides an in-depth description of the scanning
modes, and includes the following sections:
• Mode Management, page 3-3, describes features and controls
common to the various modes.
• 2D-Mode Imaging, page 3-6, describes the features and controls of
2D-Mode (the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert unit’s default mode),
which displays 2D grey scale images of tissue.
• CFM-Mode Imaging, page 3-19, describes the features and
controls of Color Flow Mapping Mode (CFM-Mode), which is used
to display the flow of blood through the heart and blood vessels.
• M-Mode Imaging, page 3-31, describes the features and controls
of M-Mode, which is used to examine the motion of tissue.
• Color M-Mode Imaging, page 3-39, describes the features and
controls of Color M-Mode, which is used to interrogate blood flow
intensity and direction.
• Anatomical M-Mode Imaging, page 3-43, describes the features
and functions of Anatomical M-Mode, which is used to generate
synthetic M-Mode displays from stored images.
• Curved Anatomical M-Mode Imaging, page 3-49, describes the
features and functions of Curved Anatomical M-Mode, which is
used to generate synthetic M-Mode displays from stored images.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
• Doppler Mode Imaging, page 3-52, describes the features and

controls of Doppler Mode, which is used to display the blood flow as
a spectrum graph.
• AngioTM Mode Imaging, page 3-69, describes the features and
controls that are used to display the intensity of color Doppler
signals.
• Soft Key and Soft Menu Functions, page 3-76, provides a
glossary of the soft keys and soft menu functions.
Note: Refer to Chapter 8, Shared Services, for details on the Automatic Tissue
Optimization (ATO) and FlexiView options.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
0RGH0DQDJHPHQW
Each of the following sections describes a different scanning mode. For
each mode, a soft key map is displayed, together with tables that
indicate the function of each soft key and rotary for that mode. In
addition, details are provided about the pop-up menus that are
displayed when the Soft Menu rocker is pressed when working in that
mode.
At the end of the chapter, descriptions are provided about the function
of each soft key (page 3-76) and soft menu option (page 3-87).
Some mode functions are operated similarly in all the modes, as
described in the following topics:
• Acoustic Output Control, below.
• Using the Soft Keys, below.
$FRXVWLF2XWSXW&RQWURO
Where possible, controls and system features should be used to
optimize the image before increasing the acoustic output level. Follow
the principle of As Low As Reasonably Achievable (ALARA) in all
patient exams. Acoustic output should only be increased when there is
obvious benefit for TI or MI levels above 1.0.
Caution: Increasing the acoustic output causes a corresponding increase in
Thermal Index (TI) or Mechanical Index (MI). Always observe the ultrasound
image and the output display when adjusting the acoustic output level. Output
should only be increased when it results in an improved image performance.
8VLQJWKH6RIW.H\V
The function of the soft keys and rotaries vary according to the mode in
which the user is working.
• The soft key map provided in each of the modes sections describes
the function of each soft key in that particular mode.
• The map illustrates the soft keys on the screen.
• The tables that follow each soft key map define each key’s specific
function.
Note: For a detailed description of each of the soft key functions, refer to the
Soft Key and Soft Menu Functions section, on page 3-76.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
When working in color or combined modes, there are always soft key
options which are active by default. The Active Mode soft key displays
mode-related menus for the other modes, enabling the user to toggle
between the menus.
The table that follows the soft key map lists the functions of each soft
key when the relevant mode is active and when it is frozen. If no
function is indicated next to a soft key number in the table, the soft key
has no function assigned to it in that mode.
Note: For a detailed description of soft key operation, refer to Chapter 2,

Getting Started.
6RIW0HQX5RFNHU
The Soft Menu rocker enables the user to access mode-specific
pop-up menus that provide further adjustment options.
To display the pop-up menu:
• Press any of the arrows on the Soft Menu rocker to display the
pop-up menu on the screen.
The pop-up menu will disappear after a user-defined timeout
period.
Note: For further information on configuring the timeout period, refer to

Chapter 14, Presets and System Setup.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
To select menu options:

• Use the vertical arrows on the Soft Menu rocker to select
(highlight) menu options.
To adjust values:
• Use the horizontal arrows on the Soft Menu rocker to adjust the
displayed values for the selected parameter, as shown in the
following example:
Press the up or
down arrows on the
rocker to highlight
the required
parameter.
Press the
left or right arrows on the rocker to
increase or decrease a
parameter’s value.
Figure 3-1: Adjusting Values in Soft Menus

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
'0RGH ,PDJLQJ
2D-Mode is the default scanning mode for all imaging modes. 2D-Mode
displays a two-dimensional grey scale image of the tissue in the probe’s
field of view. The image can be evaluated, and measurements and
calculations can be performed. In addition, the 2D image can be used
for an initial patient survey prior to entering other modes.
2D-Mode can be combined with the following other modes:
• M-Mode
• Doppler Mode
• CFM-Mode
• CFM-Mode + Doppler Mode
On the control panel, illuminated button labels indicate that a function is
available for use with the mode.
Note: For further information about the function of each button, refer to the
Control Panel section, on page 2-30.
$FFHVVLQJ'0RGH
2D-Mode is the system’s default mode. When switched on, the system
automatically displays the 2D-Mode screen, and the LED on the 2D
button on the control panel is lit.
To access 2D-Mode from any other scan mode:
2D • Press the 2D button on the control panel.
$GMXVWLQJWKH*DLQLQD',PDJH
2D Gain The 2D Gain rotary enables the overall gain to be adjusted on both live
and frozen images, as well as on images retrieved from the image
archive.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
8VLQJ=RRPLQ'0RGH
Zoom When rotated, the Zoom rotary displays a small reference image in the
upper right corner of the image. The reference image displays a Region
of Interest border (ROI) which can be moved anywhere on the
reference image by using the TRACKBALL. The image displayed in the
main part of the screen is an enlargement of the area marked by the
ROI border.
Figure 3-2: Zoom Reference Image
To enlarge the zoom factor:

• Rotate the Zoom rotary clockwise. The ROI border reduces in
size, producing a greater enlargement (zoom factor) of the
reduced area.
To reduce the zoom factor:
• Rotate the Zoom rotary counterclockwise. The ROI border
increases in size, producing a smaller enlargement (zoom
factor) of the larger area. Continued counterclockwise rotation
reaches a point at which the zoom is automatically switched off
and the reference image is no longer displayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
To exit the zoom function:

• Press the Zoom rotary once after the ROI has been sized and
positioned as required.
To display the zoom ROI using saved settings:
• Press the Zoom rotary a second time.
Important: When operated on a split screen, the Zoom function will only
operate on the active half or quad window, and no small reference image is
displayed.
:RUNLQJZLWK&LQHORRSV
When performing an examination using any of the modes, or when
retrieving loops from archiving, cineloops can be reviewed, manipulated
and stored.
When scanning is frozen, the system automatically displays markers at
the last (End Marker) and the next-to-last (First Marker) detected QRS
peaks.
• A different heartbeat can be manually selected using the soft key
rotaries.
• The TRACKBALL can be used to scroll left or right in order to view
frames that are in the cineloop memory.
• The Run Cine soft key rotary can be used for continuous replay of
the present cineloop.
To manually select a heartbeat:
Freeze 1. While in any scanning mode, press Freeze. The scan mode freezes
and the First Marker and End Marker are displayed on either side of
the last detected heartbeat on the ECG trace.
Cine Scroll 2. Press the Cine Scroll soft key rotary to start the cineloop playback.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
Previous/ 3. Use the Previous/Next soft key rotary to select the heart cycle to
Next be played back.
First/End 4. Use the First Marker and/or End Marker soft key rotaries to trim or
Marker
expand the cineloop boundaries.
To adjust the frame rate:

Cine Speed • While the cineloop is playing, rotate the Cine Speed soft key
rotary to adjust the frame-rate of the cineloop.
The default is Nominal speed.
To view a cineloop frame by frame:

Stop Cine 1. Press the Stop Cine soft key rotary.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL along the beat to view the cineloop frame by frame at
the required speed,
OR
Use the arrow keys on the alphanumeric keyboard,
OR
Cine Scroll
Use the Cine Scroll soft key rotary.
Note: For details on storing images and cineloops, refer to Chapter 10, Patient
Management and Archiving. For details on recording examinations on VCR,
refer to Chapter 12, Peripherals.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
&LQH&RQWURO6RIW.H\0DS
Normal 1 5 7 11
3 9
Pressed 2 4 6 8 10 12
The following soft keys and rotaries are available when playing back
cineloops:
Soft Key Function
1 Previous/Next*/Cine Scroll**
2 Stop Cine*/Run Cine**
3 Simultaneous (when in multiple

view)
5 First Marker
6 2D maps (or Doppler, or CFM

maps, depending on the current
mode)
7 End Marker
10
11 Cine Speed
12
*Active when cineloop is running.

**Active when cineloop is stopped.
Note: Refer to Chapter 2, Getting Started for further information on using the
soft keys.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
The soft key functions when working with cineloops are as follows:
Cine Scroll
Enables manual scrolling of the cineloop, in any of the modes, as an
alternative to scrolling with the TRACKBALL.
A small vertical bar moves over the ECG trace to illustrate the timing of
the cineloop in the displayed frame. It can be moved left or right
manually, to display the required frames. Active when cineloop is
stopped.
Run Cine
When pressed, activates an endless playback of a cineloop. The time
frame of the played back cineloop is defined by the colored markers
displayed on the ECG trace (see First Marker and End Marker, below).
The system automatically positions the First Marker at the beginning of
a systolic cycle and the End Marker at the beginning of the next systolic
cycle. Active when cineloop is stopped.
Stop Cine
When pressed, stops the continuous playback of a cineloop. Active
when cineloop is running.
Previous/Next
Enables the user to manually move to the next or previous heart cycle.
Active when cineloop is running.
First Marker
Moves the green vertical line, which is displayed over the ECG trace to
indicate the beginning of a cineloop, left or right, in order to define the
section of the cineloop that is to be displayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
End Marker
Moves the red vertical line, which is displayed over the ECG trace to
indicate the end of a cineloop, left or right, in order to define the section
of the cineloop that is to be displayed.
Simultaneous
When working in multiple view (split screen or quad screen, as
described on page 3-13), synchronizes all the cineloops to run
simultaneously on the screen. When turned off, only the image in the
active segment of the screen will run.
Cine Speed
Controls the cineloop playback speed. When Nominal is displayed on
the rotary on the screen, the loop is running at its original speed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
:RUNLQJLQ6SOLW6FUHHQ0RGH
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit enables the user to split
the screen into two or four windows, so that images and cineloops can
be compared.
Note: The OR Package provides additional functionality when working in Split

Screen Mode. Refer to Chapter 8, Shared Services, for details.
To split the screen:

1/2/4 • Press 1/2/4 on the control panel once to split the screen into two
windows, as shown in the example below:
Figure 3-3: Split Screen - Two Windows

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
1/2/4 • Press the button twice to split the screen into four windows, as
shown in the example below:
Figure 3-4: Quad Screen - Four Windows

1/2/4 • Press the button a third time to revert to a single image display.
To toggle between windows:

Window • Press Window Select on the control panel. The active window
Select
is marked with a solid light-blue circle near the top of the image
and a yellow frame. Non-active windows are marked with a
hollow circle near the top of the image and no frame.
The image controls apply only to the active window. When the system
is in Freeze Mode, the user can toggle between windows, and modify
the selected window without affecting the settings of the non-active
windows.
Note: It is possible to configure the 1/2/4 button to avoid displaying quad

screens (that is, to toggle between only full and split screens). Refer to the
Archive Tab section on page page 14-34.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
To place images in the screen segments:

1. Activate screening.
1/2/4 2. Press 1/2/4 on the control panel so that the screen is divided into
two windows. The image is displayed in the active screen window.
Window 3. Press Window Select. The next screen window becomes active.
Select
4. Perform a scan. The image is displayed in the active screen

segment.
'XSOLFDWLQJDQ,PDJH
A single 2D image can be duplicated into two (half) screens, to enable
the image to be viewed on a split screen.
To view the cineloop in a split screen:
1/2/4 Press 1/2/4 on the control panel. Two identical cineloops are displayed
next to each other on the screen.
The user can now perform different operations on each sector, for
example, different sections of the cineloop can be frozen for
comparison purposes.
Note: After a cineloop has been split, the manual cine control can be used to
select a different frame in each of the windows, in order to display different
frames of the same loop. For example, a diastolic image can be displayed in
one half of a split screen and a systolic image in the other.
(QODUJLQJWKHVSOLWVFUHHQGLVSOD\DUHD
While in split or quad display mode, the user can eliminate the
parameter display column on the right side of the screen in order to
enlarge the display area.
To enlarge the display area:
1. Press Image Size on the control panel. The images will increase in
size, and the parameter display column will not be displayed.
Note: Press Image Size again to return to normal display.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
$XWRPDWLF7LVVXH2SWLPL]DWLRQ $72
The ATO feature eliminates the need for the user to manually adjust
acquisition and display parameters, such as TGC and image
compression, in order to optimize 2D images.
When this feature is activated, the system sets acquisition and display
parameters by applying image-specific optimized compression,
dynamic range, axial and lateral TGC settings. While activated, the
ATO feature continuously adapts and corrects itself to maintain optimal
image quality under changing scanning conditions.
Notes:
• ATO is enabled in 2D or 2D and CFM modes only.
• ATO is currently accessible with the 3S probe only.
• While the ATO feature is active, the user can manually adjust all the
imaging controls, except for TGC and dynamic range. The TGC sliders are
disabled.
• ATO can be set and stored as part of a preset. This will automatically
activate the ATO feature when the preset is selected.
To activate the ATO function:

2D 1. Press 2D on the control panel and begin a scan in 2D-Mode.
ATO 2. Press the ATO soft key to highlight the corresponding soft key icon
on the screen. The system activates ATO and automatically
optimizes the image on the screen.
To disable or exit the ATO function:

ATO • Press the ATO soft key a second time to dim the corresponding soft
key icon on the screen. The system disables ATO and redisplays
the original image on the screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
'0RGH6RIW.H\0DS
Normal 1 3 5 7 9 11
Pressed 2 4 6 8 10 12
The following soft keys and rotaries are available in 2D-Mode:
Note: For a detailed description of each function, see the Soft Key and Soft
Menu Functions section on page 3-76.
Soft Function
Key
2D Live 2D Freeze 2D Freeze +
Caliper
1 Angle (Sector Cine scroll Cine scroll
width)
2 Tilt Run Cine (press) Run Cine (press)
3 Left/Right invert Left/Right invert 2D Caliper
4 Up/Down invert Up/Down invert 2D area
5 Frame rate
6 2D maps 2D maps
7 Frequency (2D)
8 Focus
9 Colorize Colorize 2D volume (MOD)
10 (ATO*) HR
11 Compression 2D Compression 2D Resize results
12 Reject 2D Reject 2D Scroll results
* ATO: This soft key is displayed, available and enabled only with selected
probes and selected applications.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
'0RGH6RIW0HQX
In 2D-Mode, the Soft Menu rocker enables the following menu options:
3RSXS6RIW0HQXV
2D Live 2D Freeze
Dynamic range (2D)
Power
Frame averaging
Contour 2D
Difficult
Note: For a detailed description of each function, see the Soft Menu Rocker

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
&)00RGH,PDJLQJ
Color Flow Mapping (CFM) Mode uses Doppler methods to add
color-coded qualitative information regarding relative velocity and
direction of flow motion in the 2D-Mode image. All the functions
available in 2D-Mode are available in CFM-Mode, although the soft
menus differ.
Note: For a detailed description of each Doppler functionality, refer to the

$FFHVVLQJ&)00RGH
CFM-Mode is accessed from 2D-Mode, and adds color-coded
qualitative information directly to the 2D image.
To perform a CFM-Mode scan:
CFM 1. Press CFM on the control panel. A region of interest (ROI) border is
displayed on the scan, which is used to frame the area to be
examined in CFM-Mode. The area inside the border is color
mapped.
Figure 3-5: Color Flow Mode

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
2. Adjust the ROI as required:

TRACKBALL • Move the TRACKBALL left or right to adjust the position of the
ROI.
ROI Size • To change the size of the ROI, press the ROI Size soft key,
OR
Select
Press Select.
The ROI border changes to a dotted line, which can be resized

by moving the TRACKBALL to the left and right.
TRACKBALL • Move the TRACKBALL up and down to lengthen or shorten the

ROI.
$GMXVWLQJWKH&)00RGH,PDJH
The controls described in the 2D-Mode Imaging section on page 3-6
also apply to CFM-Mode operations, although the soft key menus differ.
If the 2D image must be adjusted, and the necessary soft key control is
not displayed, press Active Mode on the control panel to toggle
between the different soft key menus. The name of the currently
selected soft key menu mode is displayed on the status bar at the
bottom of the viewing screen.
&RORU*DLQ
While in color, the Active Gain rotary on the control panel controls the
color gain, while the 2D Gain rotary on the control panel remains active
to control the gain of the 2D portion of the image.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
8VLQJ=RRPLQ&)00RGH
The zoom function is performed in the same way as that for 2D-Mode,
as described on page 3-7, however the TRACKBALL controls the color
ROI position together with zoom panning.
([LWLQJ&)00RGH
When the user exits CFM-Mode, the system reverts to 2D-Mode.
To exit CFM-Mode:
CFM • Press CFM on the control panel. The ROI disappears from the
scan and a regular 2D image is displayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
&)00RGH6RIW.H\0DS
Normal 1 3 5 7 9 11
Pressed 2 4 6 8 10 12
The following tables display the function of the soft keys in the following
combinations:
• CFM Live, page 3-23

• CFM Freeze, page 3-23
• CFM Freeze + Caliper, page 3-23
• CFM Freeze/PW Live, page 3-24
• CFM Live/PW Freeze, page 3-24
• CFM Freeze/PW Freeze, page 3-25
• CFM Freeze/PW Freeze + Caliper, page 3-25
• CFM Freeze/CW Live, page 3-26
• CFM Live/CW Freeze, page 3-26
• CFM Freeze/CW Freeze, page 3-27
• CFM Freeze/CW Freeze + Caliper, page 3-27

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
&)00RGH6RIW.H\&RPELQDWLRQV
Soft Function
Key
CFM Live CFM Freeze CFM Freeze +
Caliper
1 Angle (Sector Cine scroll Cine scroll
width)
2 Tilt Run cine (press) Run cine (press)
3 Variance (on/off) Variance (on/off) 2D Caliper
4 Invert (color) Invert (color) 2D area
5 Velocity scale
6 Color maps Color maps
7 Baseline Baseline
8
9 ROI size 2D volume
10
11 Low vel. reject Low vel. reject Resize results
12 Scroll results

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
Soft Key Function

CFM Freeze/ CFM Live/
PW Live PW Freeze
1 Horizontal sweep Angle
2 Audio volume Tilt
3 Auto update (on/off) Variance (on/off)
4 Invert (Doppler Invert (Doppler
color and spectrum) color and spectrum)
5 Velocity scale Velocity scale
(Doppler) (color)
6 Doppler maps Color maps
7 Baseline Baseline (color)
8 Sample vol. Sample vol.
9 Low PRF ROI size
10 Layout Layout
11 Low vel. reject. Low vel. reject
12 Doppler angle Doppler angle

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
Soft Key Function

CFM Freeze/ CFM Freeze/PW
PW Freeze Freeze + Caliper
1 Horizontal sweep Cine scroll
2 Run cine Run cine
3 Velocity
4 Invert D Caliper
5
6 Doppler maps Envelope
adjustment
7 Baseline
8 Reject
9 CO
10 Layout Manual trace/Auto
trace
11 Resize results
12 Doppler angle Scroll results

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
Soft Key Function

CFM Freeze/ CFM Live/
CW Live CW Freeze
1 Horizontal sweep Angle
2 Audio volume Tilt
3 Auto update (on/off) Variance (on/off)
(Doppler) (color)
7 Baseline Baseline (color)
8
9 ROI size
10 Layout Layout
11 Low vel. reject Low vel. reject
(color)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
Soft Key Function

CFM Freeze/CW CFM Freeze/CW
Freeze Freeze + Caliper
2 Run cine Run cine
3 Velocity
4 Invert D Caliper
5 Velocity scale
6 Doppler maps Envelope
adjustment
7 Baseline
8
9 CO
trace
11 Resize results

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
&)00RGH6RIW0HQX
In CFM-Mode, the Soft Menu rocker enables the following menu
options:
3RSXS6RIW0HQXV
CFM Live CFM Freeze

Frequency B/C
Power Color priority
Frame rate
Sample vel.
B/C
Persistence
Color priority
Lateral smooth
Axial smooth

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
CFM Freeze/PW Live CFM Live/PW Freeze

Frequency Frequency (color)
Power Power
Doppler DR Frame rate
Doppler post Sample vel.
processing
Audio HPF reject B/C
Triplex enable Color priority
Envelope adjustment Lateral smooth
Axial Smooth
CFM Freeze/
PW Freeze
B/C
Doppler DR
Doppler post
processing
Envelope adjustment

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
CFM Freeze/CW Live CFM Live/CW Freeze

Frequency Frequency (color)
Power Power
Doppler post Tissue priority (color)
processing
Sensitivity Persistence
Reject Color priority
Envelope adjustment Lateral smooth
Axial smooth
CFM Freeze/CW
Freeze
Tissue priority B/C
Doppler DR
Doppler post
processing
Reject
Envelope adjustment

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
00RGH,PDJLQJ
M-Mode is used to examine the motion of tissue, such as the heart
valves. It can also be used to measure time between events, depth or
velocity of moving tissue. M-Mode operates in conjunction with
2D-Mode. An M-Mode display can be shown side by side with a 2D
image, or one image can be displayed above the other, as shown
below:
Figure 3-6: M-Mode Display
Note: M-Mode can be combined with CFM-Mode in order to show color data
superimposed over the M-Mode image, as described in the Color M-Mode
Imaging section, page 3-39.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
$FFHVVLQJ00RGH
M-Mode is accessed from 2D-Mode, and shows the motion of a
selected portion of the 2D image while the scan is in progress.
Important: An M-Mode image can only be generated while scanning in

2D-Mode. In order to generate M-Mode displays from frozen or retrieved
images, refer to the Anatomical M-Mode Imaging section, page 3-43.
To perform an M-Mode scan:

1. Begin a scan in 2D-Mode.
M
2. Press M on the control panel,
OR
Cursor Press Cursor on the control panel.
The M Cursor is displayed as a dotted line on the image, as shown

below:
Figure 3-7: M Cursor

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
TRACKBALL 3. Use the TRACKBALL to position the M Cursor over the required
anatomy.
M 4. Press M on the control panel to start the M-Mode sweep.
To reposition the M Cursor:

TRACKBALL • Use the TRACKBALL to move the M Cursor across the image,
until it is positioned over the required area.
Note: The M Cursor is always parallel with the transmitted beam, starting
at the apex of the scan.
$GMXVWLQJWKH7RWDO*DLQLQDQ00RGH,PDJH
The Active Gain rotary enables the overall gain of the M-Mode portion
of the image to be adjusted, without affecting the overall gain of the 2D
portion of the image.
The 2D rotary enables the overall gain of both the M-Mode image and
the 2D-Mode image to be adjusted simultaneously.
These controls can be used when an image is active or frozen, or on an
image that has been retrieved from the image archive.
$GMXVWLQJWKH',PDJHLQ00RGH
If the 2D image must be adjusted, and the necessary soft key control is
not displayed, pressing Active Mode on the control panel will toggle
between the different soft key menus. The name of the currently
selected soft key menu mode is displayed on the status bar at the
bottom of the viewing screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
8VLQJ=RRPLQ00RGH
The zoom function in M-Mode is performed as described on page 3-34.
The M scroll portion of the display will expand by the same zoom factor
to correspond with the 2D image. When the zoom ROI border is panned
with the TRACKBALL, the effect on the M scroll is equal to that on the 2D
image.
Note: Unlike in 2D-Mode, no zoom reference image appears in this mode.
5HVL]LQJ5HSRVLWLRQLQJWKH00RGH'LVSOD\
The display size and position of the M-Mode and 2D-Mode portions of
the screen can be adjusted. The adjustments can be made on an active
image, a frozen image, a running cineloop or an image retrieved from
the image archive.
To resize and/or reposition the image display:
Image Size 1. Press the Image Size soft key to toggle between the M scroll sizes:
either half, two thirds or full display.
Layout 2. Press Layout on the control panel to toggle between a top/bottom

or side-by-side split screen display.
(QODUJLQJWKH',PDJH
The M-Mode display can be temporarily hidden, enabling the user to
view a full-sized 2D image for image assessment and 2D
measurements.
To display a full-sized 2D image:
Freeze 1. In M-Mode, press Freeze. The M-Mode display is frozen.
M 2. Press M on the control panel. The M scroll will temporarily

disappear, displaying a full-sized 2D image.
M 3. Press M on the control panel again to redisplay the original

M-Mode layout.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
8VLQJ'XDORU4XDG00RGH'LVSOD\
The M-Mode display can be split into two or four windows, as described
on page 3-35.
Window • Use the Window Select and 1/2/4 buttons on the control panel to
Select
perform the M-Mode scan on two or four window sections of the
display.
1/2/4
Note: It is possible to configure the 1/2/4 button to avoid displaying quad
screens (that is, to toggle between only full and split screens). Refer to
the Archive Tab section on page 14-34.
([LWLQJ00RGH
When the user exits M-Mode, the system reverts back to 2D-Mode.
To exit M-Mode:
M 1. Press M on the control panel. The image reverts to 2D-Mode. The
M Cursor remains on the image and pressing M again will re-enter
M-Mode.
Cursor
2. Press Cursor on the control panel. The M Cursor is no longer
displayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
00RGH6RIW.H\0DS
Normal 1 3 5 7 9 11
Pressed 2 4 6 8 10 12
00RGH6RIW.H\&RPELQDWLRQV
The following table displays the function of the soft keys in two
combinations:
• 2D Live/M Live
• 2D Freeze/M Live
Soft Key Function

2D Live/M Live 2D Freeze/M Live
1 Horizontal sweep Horizontal sweep
2
3
4
5 Contour (M) Contour (M)
6 M maps M maps
7 Frequency (2D) Frequency (2D)
8 Focus Focus
9 Colorize Colorize
10 Layout Layout
11 Compression M Compression M
12 Reject M Reject M

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
00RGH6RIW.H\&RPELQDWLRQV
combinations:
• 2D Freeze/M Freeze
• 2D Freeze/M Freeze + Caliper
Soft Key Function

2D Freeze/ 2D Freeze/
M Freeze M Freeze + Caliper
2 Run cine Run cine
3 M Caliper
4 M height
5
6 M maps
7
8
9 Colorize LV
10 Layout HR
11 Compression M Resize results
12 Reject M Scroll results

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
00RGH6RIW0HQX
In M-Mode, the Soft Menu rocker enables the following options:
3RS8S6RIW0HQXV
2D Live/M Live 2D Freeze/ 2D Freeze/

M Live M Freeze
Dynamic range Dynamic range
(2D) (2D)
Power Power
Frame average
Contour 2D
Diff

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
&RORU00RGH,PDJLQJ
Color M-Mode uses the standard M-Mode display and overlays color
flow information on the M scroll. This enables the user to interrogate an
area along the M-Mode cursor and to study the blood flow intensity and
direction, as a function of depth and time. Color M-Mode images can be
manipulated in the same way as regular M-Mode images.
$FFHVVLQJ&RORU00RGH
Color M-Mode is accessed from CFM-Mode, and enables the user to
study blood flow intensity and direction, as a function of depth and time.
To access Color M-Mode:
1. Perform a scan in CFM-Mode, as described on page 3-19.
M 2. Press M on the control panel,
OR
The M Cursor is displayed on the image, as shown below:
Figure 3-8: Color M Cursor

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
TRACKBALL 3. Use the TRACKBALL to position the cursor over the appropriate
anatomy.
M 4. Press M on the control panel to start the M-Mode sweep.
To reposition the M Cursor in Color M-Mode:

TRACKBALL • Use the TRACKBALL to move the M Cursor across the image,
until it is positioned over the required area.
Note: The M Cursor is always parallel with the transmitted beam, starting
at the apex of the scan.
0DQDJLQJ&RORU00RGH,PDJHV
Color M-Mode images are managed in the same way as regular
M-Mode images, as described on pages 3-31 and 3-35.
([LWLQJ&RORU00RGH
When the user exits Color M-Mode, the system reverts back to
CFM-Mode.
To exit Color M-Mode:
M 1. Press M on the control panel. The image reverts to CFM-Mode. The
M Cursor remains on the image and pressing M again will re-enter
M-Mode.
Cursor
2. Press Cursor on the control panel. The M Cursor is no longer
displayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
&RORU00RGH6RIW.H\0DS
Normal 1 3 5 7 9 11
Pressed 2 4 6 8 10 12
&RORU00RGH6RIW.H\&RPELQDWLRQV
Soft Function
Key
2D Live/ 2D Freeze 2D Freeze/CFM+M
CFM+M Live /CFM+M Freeze Freeze + Caliper
1 Horizontal sweep Horizontal sweep Cine scroll
2 Run cine Run cine
3 Variance (on/off) Variance (on/off) M Caliper
4 Invert (color) Invert (color) M Height
5 Velocity scale
(color)
7
8 ROI length
9 LV
10 Layout Layout HR
11 Low vel. reject Resize results
12 Scroll results

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
2D Live/CFM+M Live 2D Freeze/CFM+M

Freeze
Frequency (color) B/C
Power
Tissue priority
Persistence
MC Smooth

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
$QDWRPLFDO00RGH,PDJLQJ
In Anatomical M-Mode, M-Mode displays can be generated from frozen
or archived 2D images. In addition to regular M-Mode functionality, the
M Cursor in Anatomical M-Mode can be positioned in any direction, and
can be moved from left to right, or rotated 360 degrees.
This feature enables the user to generate an M-Mode image during
post-processing of 2D raw data, which is especially important if an
M-Mode image was not generated during the exam. For example, when
the user performs a stress review, an M-Mode display can be
generated to qualify segmental motion, based on a cineloop captured
during the stress exam.
The 2D image from which the M-Mode display is generated appears in
the upper portion of the screen, and the system generated M-Mode
image appears below it.
The M-Mode images are based on a straight line, the M Cursor, which
the user positions as required on the frozen or retrieved 2D image. In
addition to regular M-Mode functionality, the M Cursor in Anatomical
M-Mode can be positioned in any direction, and can be moved from left
to right, or rotated 360 degrees.
When the cursor is moved over the M-Mode image, a marker on the
M-Mode is displayed simultaneously with a + marker on the 2D
image, indicating the corresponding point on the M-Mode sweep and
the original 2D image. When the cursor is moved right or left, the 2D
frame is changing according to the cursor’s location on the sweep.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
$FFHVVLQJ$QDWRPLFDO00RGH
Anatomical M-Mode is accessed from 2D-Mode or from CFM-Mode,
when the scan is frozen, or when working with archived images
retrieved from the database.
Important: This feature is only available for frozen or retrieved 2D images.
To access Anatomical M-Mode:

Freeze 1. Perform a 2D-Mode scan and press Freeze,
OR
Freeze Perform a CFM-Mode scan and press Freeze,
OR
Retrieve an image from the database.
M 2. Press M on the control panel to generate the Anatomical M-Mode

sweep.
3. Position the M Cursor over the appropriate anatomy, as described

on page 3-45.
4. Use the TRACKBALL if required, to move the marker for better

orientation.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
3RVLWLRQLQJWKH0&XUVRU
The M Cursor can be placed at any position and at any angle on the 2D
image. The Line Move soft key rotary enables the user to position the
M Cursor across the 2D image, and the Line Rotate soft key rotary
enables the user to rotate the angle of M Cursor.
To position the M Cursor:
Line Move 1. Rotate the Line Move soft key rotary clockwise to move the
M Cursor to the right,
OR
Rotate the Line move soft key rotary counterclockwise to move the
M Cursor to the left.
Rotate 2. Rotate the Line Rotate soft key rotary clockwise to rotate the
M Cursor to the right,
OR
Turn the Line Rotate soft key counterclockwise to rotate the

M Cursor to the left.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
$GMXVWLQJWKH$QDWRPLFDO00RGH,PDJH
The controls described in the M-Mode Imaging and CFM-Mode imaging
sections of this chapter, page 3-31 and page 3-19 respectively, also
apply to Anatomical M-Mode, although the soft key menus differ.
([LWLQJ$QDWRPLFDO00RGH
When the user exits Anatomical M-Mode, the system reverts back to
2D-Mode or CFM-Mode.
To exit Anatomical M-Mode:
M 1. Press M on the control panel. The image reverts back to 2D-Mode
or CFM-Mode. The M Cursor remains on the image, and if M is
pressed again, the system re-enters Anatomical M-Mode.
Cursor 2. Press Cursor on the control panel. The M Cursor is no longer

displayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
$QDWRPLFDO00RGH6RIW.H\0DS
Normal 1 3 5 7 9 11
Pressed 2 4 6 8 10 12
The following soft keys and rotaries are available in Anatomical

M-Mode:
Soft Key Function

AMM AMM + OFM
1 Horizontal sweep Horizontal sweep
2 Run cine Run cine
3 Curve Curve
4
5 Line move Line move
6 M maps M maps
7 Line rotate Line rotate
8 ECG position ECG position
9 Colorize Colorize
10 Layout Layout
11 Compression MN Compression MN
12 Reset M Reset M
For a detailed description of each function, see the Soft Key and Soft
Menu Functions section, page 3-76.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
$QDWRPLFDO00RGH6RIW0HQX
In Anatomical M-Mode, the Soft Menu rocker enables the following
menu options:
3RSXS6RIW0HQXV
For a detailed description of each function, see the Soft Menu Rocker

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
&XUYHG$QDWRPLFDO00RGH,PDJLQJ
In Curved Anatomical M-Mode (CAM-Mode), M-Mode displays can be
generated from frozen or archived 2D images.
This feature enables the user to generate an M-Mode image during
post-processing of 2D raw data, which is especially important if an
M-Mode image was not generated during the exam.
The 2D image from which the M-Mode display is generated appears in
the upper portion of the screen, and the system generated M-Mode
image appears below it.
Note: To change the display to side-by-side display, toggle the Layout soft key.
The M-Mode images are based on a curved line, the M Cursor, which
the user positions as required on the frozen or retrieved 2D image.
Numbers on the Curved M Cursor correspond to the numbers on the
Y-Axis of the M-Mode image.
When the cursor is moved over the M-Mode image, an X indicates the
corresponding point on the original 2D image.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
$FFHVVLQJ&$00RGH
CAM-Mode is accessed from Anatomical M-Mode.
To access Curved Anatomical M-Mode:
1. Access Anatomical M-Mode, as described on page 3-44.
Curve 2. Press the Curve soft key. A cursor is displayed on the 2D image,
enabling the user to draw the Curved M Cursor.
TRACKBALL 3. Use the TRACKBALL to position the cursor over the point on the
original image where the Curved M Cursor is to begin.
Select 4. Press Select to anchor the cursor.
TRACKBALL 5. Use the TRACKBALL to draw the curve, then press Select to anchor
the end-point of the curve.
Note: The numbers on the curve correspond to the number on the Y-Axis
of the M-Mode image.
Select
To set an additional Curved M Cursor:

New Curve • Press the New Curve soft key. A new cursor is displayed on the
2D image, enabling the user to draw a new Curved M Cursor.
$GMXVWLQJWKH&XUYHG$QDWRPLFDO00RGH,PDJH
The controls described in the M-Mode Imaging and CFM-Mode imaging
sections of this chapter, page 3-31 and page 3-19 respectively, also
apply to Curved Anatomical M-Mode, although the soft key menus
differ.
([LWLQJ$QDWRPLFDO00RGH
When the user exits Curved Anatomical M-Mode, the system reverts
back to 2D-Mode or CFM-Mode.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
To exit Anatomical M-Mode:

M 1. Press M on the control panel. The image reverts back to 2D-Mode
or CFM-Mode. The M Cursor remains on the image, and if M is
pressed again, the system re-enters Anatomical M-Mode.
Cursor 2. Press Cursor on the control panel. The M Cursor is no longer

displayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
'RSSOHU 0RGH,PDJLQJ
Doppler Mode imaging assists in the examination of blood flow and
tissue movement, and generates a Doppler spectrum that displays the
change in velocity data and components over time. Two forms of
Doppler imaging are available:
• Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW Doppler): Displays the velocity,
direction and spectral content of blood flow in the area defined by
the Doppler gate.
• Continuous Wave Doppler (CW Doppler): Examines the blood
flow along the complete length of the Doppler Mode cursor. In
addition, it displays the velocity, direction and spectral content of
blood flow along the complete length of the CW Doppler cursor.
When CW Doppler imaging is performed, a single gate is displayed
on the cursor.
Doppler Mode scans can be performed in one of three display modes:
• Regular Doppler Display, page 3-53.
• Duplex Doppler Display, page 3-56.
• Triplex Doppler Display, page 3-58.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
5HJXODU'RSSOHU'LVSOD\
In the Regular Doppler display, a Doppler spectrum is generated and
displayed alongside a 2D image. The Doppler spectrum can be
displayed side-by-side with or below the 2D image.
By default, the 2D image is frozen and the Doppler spectrum is active,
indicated by a blue circle in the upper part of the window.
$FFHVVLQJ3:'RSSOHU0RGHRU&:'RSSOHU
0RGH
PW Doppler Mode and CW Doppler Mode are accessed from
2D-Mode or CFM-Mode, and generate a Doppler spectrum based on
the 2D image.
To access PW Doppler Mode or CW Doppler Mode (Regular
Doppler Display):
1. Perform a 2D-Mode scan.
PW/CW 2. Press either PW or CW on the control panel,
OR
The Doppler cursor (and Doppler gate, when in PW Doppler Mode),

is displayed on the image.
TRACKBALL 3. Use the TRACKBALL to position the Doppler cursor (and Doppler
gate, when using PW-Mode) over the appropriate anatomy.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
PW/CW 4. When the cursor is properly positioned, press PW or CW to run the

PW or CW spectrum.
Figure 3-9: CW and 2D-Mode

TRACKBALL 5. While the spectrum is scrolling, use the TRACKBALL to reposition the
Doppler cursor and/or gate position.
Select 6. Press Select or 2D Update on the control panel to freeze the

Doppler spectrum, and update the 2D image.
2D Update

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
To change from PW Doppler Mode to CW Doppler Mode:

CW • While in PW Doppler Mode (indicated by the green PW LED),
without moving the cursor, press CW on the control panel. The
scanning mode changes to CW Doppler Mode.
Note: The green PW LED is now off and the CW LED is on.
To change from CW Doppler Mode to PW Doppler Mode:

PW
• While in CW-Mode (indicated by the green CW LED), without
moving the cursor, press PW on the control panel. The scanning
mode changes to PW Doppler Mode.
Note: The green CW LED is now off and the PW LED is on.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
'XSOH['RSSOHU'LVSOD\
In the Duplex Doppler display, a Doppler spectrum is generated and
displayed alongside a 2D image. The Doppler spectrum can be
displayed side-by-side with or below the 2D image.
By default, both the 2D image and the Doppler spectrum are active.
However, only the soft keys and soft menus for the Doppler spectrum
are active. The user can toggle between the soft key menus by
pressing Active Mode on the control panel.
The Duplex Doppler display option can be configured as part of a
preset. When the user enters PW Doppler Mode or CW Doppler Mode,
the duplex screen is automatically displayed with both the 2D image
and the Doppler spectrum active.
0RGH
2D-Mode and generate a Doppler spectrum based on the 2D image.
To access PW Doppler Mode or CW Doppler Mode (Duplex Doppler
display):
OR
The Doppler cursor (and the Doppler gate, when in PW Doppler

Mode) is displayed on the image.
gate when in PW-Mode) over the appropriate anatomy.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes

PW or CW spectrum. A regular Doppler display is activated.
5. Press one of the arrows on the Soft Menu Rocker. A pop-up menu
is displayed on the screen.
6. Use the vertical arrows to highlight the Enable Triplex option from
the soft menu.
7. Use the left or right arrows to change the status to 1 (enabled). The
display changes to Duplex Doppler, and both the 2D image and
Doppler Spectrum are active.
9. Press Active Image to toggle between the active soft key menus.
Select 10. Press Select or 2D on the control panel to freeze the Doppler
spectrum, then press 2D Update to update the 2D image.
2D
11. Press 2D Freeze to freeze the 2D display, if required.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
7ULSOH['RSSOHU'LVSOD\
In the Triplex Doppler display, a Doppler spectrum is generated and
displayed alongside a colorized 2D image. The Doppler spectrum can
be displayed side-by-side with or below the 2D image.
By default, both the 2D image and the Doppler spectrum are active.
However, only the soft keys and soft menus for the Doppler spectrum
are active. The user can toggle between the soft key menus for the
Doppler spectrum, 2D image or CFM-mode image by pressing Active
Mode on the control panel.
The Triplex Doppler display option can be configured as part of a
preset. When the user enters PW Doppler Mode or CW Doppler Mode,
the triplex screen is automatically displayed with both the 2D image and
the Doppler spectrum active.
0RGH
2D-Mode and generate a Doppler spectrum based on the 2D image.
To access PW Doppler Mode or CW Doppler Mode (Triplex Doppler
display):
OR
The Doppler cursor (and the Doppler gate, when in PW Doppler

Mode) is displayed on the image.
gate when in PW-Mode) over the appropriate anatomy.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes

PW or CW spectrum. A regular Doppler display is activated.
5. Press one of the arrows on the Soft Menu Rocker. A pop-up menu
is displayed on the screen.
6. Use the vertical arrows to highlight the Enable Triplex option from
the soft menu.
7. Use the left or right arrows to change the status to 1 (enabled). The
display changes to Duplex Doppler, and both the 2D image and
Doppler Spectrum are active.
9. Press Active Image to toggle between the active soft key menus.
Select 10. Press Select or 2D on the control panel to freeze the Doppler
spectrum, then press 2D Update to update the 2D image.
2D
11. Press 2D Freeze to freeze the 2D display, if required.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
$GMXVWLQJWKH*DLQLQ'RSSOHU0RGH
In both CW Doppler and PW Doppler Modes, the Active Gain rotary
enables the overall spectral gain to be adjusted in either active or
freeze modes and on images retrieved from the image archive.
The 2D Gain rotary enables the overall gain of the 2D image to be
adjusted, without affecting the Doppler spectrum.
8VLQJ=RRPLQ'RSSOHU0RGH
The zoom function is used as described on page 3-60. The 2D portion
around the Doppler cursor will be enlarged.
(QODUJLQJWKH',PDJH
The Doppler display can be temporarily hidden, enabling the user to
view a full-sized 2D image for image assessment and 2D
measurements.
To display a full-sized 2D image:
PW/CW 1. While in PW/CW Doppler Mode with the image frozen, press
PW/CW on the control panel. The Doppler spectrum will temporarily
disappear, enabling the display of a full-sized 2D image.
PW/CW 2. Press PW/CW again to re-display the original Doppler Mode layout.
6WHHULQJRQ9DVFXODU$SSOLFDWLRQV
On linear probes, used in vascular applications, while doing Doppler,
the Doppler beam may be steered at a variable angle left or right, or
held perpendicular to the probe surface.
To steer the Doppler interrogation beam:
1. Press PW on the control panel.
2. Use the Steer rocker key to steer the Doppler interrogation beam to
the right, left or perpendicular to the probe surface.
3. Use the Doppler Angle soft key rotary to align the Doppler angle
cursor with the measured vessel.
Note: The angle of interrogation or the Doppler correction angle (between the
Doppler beam and the angle cursor) is displayed in the last line of the PW
parameter box on the right side of the screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
6PDUW'RSSOHU
The Smart Doppler option, when selected (indicated by a checkmark
in the Misc tab of the System Configuration window, as described on
page 14-71, permits both the angle correct cursor and the Doppler
interrogation beam marker to be rotated at the same time by the
Doppler Angle soft key rotary. For any vessel angle within a given
range, the interrogation angle will be retain a constant 60 degrees for
optimal accuracy.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
([LWLQJ'RSSOHU0RGH
When the user exits Doppler Mode, the system reverts back to the
mode from which Doppler Mode was accessed, either 2D-Mode or
CFM-Mode.
To exit PW Doppler Mode or CW Doppler Mode:
PW 1. If the system is in PW-Mode, indicated by the green PW LED, press
PW on the control panel to exit. Full 2D-Mode or CFM-Mode will be
displayed,
OR
CW
If the system is in CW-Mode, indicated by the green CW LED, press
CW on the control panel to exit. Full 2D-Mode or CFM-Mode will be
displayed.
Cursor 2. Press Cursor on the control panel to hide the Doppler cursor.
Note: Pressing 2D on the control panel will cause the system to automatically
revert to 2D-Mode and hide the Doppler cursor.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
6RIW.H\&RPELQDWLRQVLQ3:'RSSOHU0RGH
Normal 1 3 5 7 9 11
Pressed 2 4 6 8 10 12
combinations:
• 2D Freeze/PW Live
• 2D Live/PW Freeze
3:'RSSOHU0RGH6RIW.H\&RPELQDWLRQV
Soft Key Function

2D Freeze/PW Live 2D Live/PW Freeze
1 Horizontal sweep Angle (sector width)
2 Audio volume Tilt
3 Auto update (on/off) Left/Right invert
4 Invert (Doppler) Up/Down invert
5 Velocity scale Frame rate
(Doppler)
6 Doppler maps 2D maps
7 Baseline Frequency (2D)
9 Low PRF (Doppler)
10 Layout Layout
11 Low vel. reject Compress 2D

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
combinations:
• 2D Freeze/PW Freeze
• 2D Freeze/PW Freeze + Caliper
3:'RSSOHU0RGH6RIW.H\&RPELQDWLRQV
Soft Key Function

2D Freeze/PW Freeze 2D Freeze/PW Freeze
+ Caliper
2 Run cine Run cine
3 Velocity
4 Invert D Caliper
5
6 Doppler maps Envelope adjustment
7 Baseline
8
9 CO
trace
11 Compress 2D Resize+ results

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
3:'RSSOHU0RGH6RIW0HQX
In PW Doppler Mode, the Soft Menu rocker enables the following
options:
3RSXS6RIW0HQX
2D Freeze/PW Live 2D Live/PW Freeze

Frequency (Doppler) Dynamic range (2D)
Power Power
Doppler DR Frame averaging
Doppler post Contour (Edge
processing enhance 2D)
Reject
Triplex enable
Envelope adjustment
2D Freeze/PW 2D Freeze/PW
Freeze Freeze + Caliper
Doppler DR
Doppler post
processing
Reject
Envelope adjustment

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
6RIW.H\&RPELQDWLRQVLQ&:'RSSOHU0RGH
combinations:
• 2D Freeze/CW Live
• 2D Live/CW Freeze
&:'RSSOHU0RGH6RIW.H\&RPELQDWLRQV
Soft Key Function

2D Freeze/CW Live 2D Live/CW Freeze
1 Horizontal sweep Angle (sector width)
2 Audio Volume Tilt
3 Auto update (on/off) Left/Right invert
4 Invert (Doppler) Up/Down invert
5 Velocity scale
(Doppler)
6 Doppler maps 2D maps
7 Baseline Frequency 2D
8 Focus
9
10 Layout Layout
11 Low vel. reject Compress 2D

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
combinations:
• 2D Freeze/CW Freeze
• 2D Freeze/CW Freeze + Caliper
&:'RSSOHU0RGH6RIW.H\&RPELQDWLRQV
Soft Key Function

2D Freeze/CW Freeze 2D Freeze/CW Freeze
+ Caliper
2 Run cine Run cine
3 Velocity
4 Invert D Caliper *
5 Velocity scale
7 Baseline
8
9 CO
trace
11 Compress 2D Resize results
* This option is only available when working with the

Assign & Measure convention.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
&:'RSSOHU0RGH6RIW0HQX
In CW Doppler Mode, the Soft Menu rocker enables the following
options:
3RSXS6RIW0HQX
2D Freeze/ 2D Live/ 2D Freeze/

CW Live Options CW Freeze Options CW Freeze Options
Frequency Dynamic range (2D) Doppler DR
(Doppler)
Power Power Doppler post
processing
Doppler DR Frame averaging Reject
Doppler post Contour 2D Envelope adjustment
processing
Sensitivity
Reject
Envelope
adjustment

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
$QJLR700RGH,PDJLQJ
Ultrasound AngioTM Mode uses an amplitude map to display the
intensity of returning signals from color Doppler. This mode enables
optimized filtering to provide unparalleled color flow imaging sensitivity,
and visualization of flow continuity. In addition, it eliminates angle
dependence and aliasing.
$FFHVVLQJ$QJLR700RGH
This mode is only used in vascular applications. AngioTM Mode is
application dependent. The button label is only lit when this mode is
available.
Note: Angio Mode is only available on selected probes and applications.
Mode 2 To activate AngioTM Mode:

• Press Mode 2 on the control panel.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
6RIW.H\&RPELQDWLRQVLQ$QJLR700RGH
Normal 1 3 5 7 9 11
Pressed 2 4 6 8 10 12

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
$QJLR700RGH6RIW.H\&RPELQDWLRQV
Soft Key Function

AngioTM Live AngioTM Freeze AngioTM Freeze +
Caliper
1 Angle (width*) Cine scroll Cine scroll
2 Tilt** Run cine (press) Run cine (press)
3 2D Caliper
4 % DR
5 Velocity scale
7
8
9 ROI size % AR
10 2D area
11 Resize results
12 Low vel. reject Low vel. reject Scroll results
* Linear probe only.

** Curved probe only.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
Soft Key Function

AngioTM Freeze/ AngioTM Live/
PW Live PW Freeze
1 Horizontal sweep Angle (width*)
2 Audio volume Tilt**
3
(Doppler)
8
9 Low PRF ROI size
10 Layout Layout
12 Low vel. reject Low vel. reject
(color)

** Curved probe only.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
Soft Key Function

AngioTM Freeze/ AngioTM Freeze/
PW Freeze PW Freeze + Caliper
2 Run cine Run cine
3 Velocity
4 Invert PS + ED
5
7
8 Baseline
9 VF
trace
11 Doppler angle Resize results
12 Scroll results

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
$QJLR700RGH6RIW0HQX
In AngioTM Mode, the Soft Menu rocker enables the following options:
3RSXS6RIW0HQXV
AngioTM Live AngioTM Freeze

Frequency
Power
Frame rate
Sample vol.
2D Reject (color)
Persistence
Color priority
Lateral smooth
Axial smooth

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
AngioTM Freeze/ AngioTM Live/

PW Live PW Freeze
Frequency (Doppler) Frequency (color)
Power Power
Doppler post Sample vol.
processing
Reject Persistence
B/C
Triplex enable Color priority
Envelope adjustment Lateral priority
Tissue priority Steer angle*
Axial smooth
AngioTM Freeze/PW
Freeze
B/C
Doppler DR
Doppler post
processing
Envelope adjustment

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
6RIW.H\DQG6RIW0HQX)XQFWLRQV
The soft keys are unlabeled grey buttons and rotaries located at the top
of the control panel. A set of corresponding soft key icons is displayed
at the bottom of the screen. The functions of the soft keys vary
according to the mode in which the user is working.
In each mode, a label above and/or below each soft key icon on the
screen indicates the function of the corresponding soft key on the
control panel, when pressed and/or turned. The lit (yellow) label
indicates the currently active function.
When a control panel rotary that corresponds to an active soft key is
turned, it activates that function. To activate an inactive soft key
function, press the corresponding rotary on the control panel. The
inactive label is lit, indicating the function that is now active. When a
soft key rotary is turned, the modification value is displayed for a few
seconds on its icon on the screen.
When the system is used in a combined mode, the soft key and soft
rocker functions relate to the Doppler Mode by default. If a function is
required that is located in a different soft menu, the menu can be
changed by pressing the Active Mode button. Repeated pressing of
this button enables toggling through all the currently available soft
menus. The name of the mode with which the menu is associated is
displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the viewing screen.
The following is an alphabetized list of the soft keys functions:
'5
% Diameter Reduction tool that measures two diameters of one blood
vessel (minimum and maximum).
$5
% Area Reduction tool that measures two areas of one blood vessel
(minimum and maximum).
'0DSV
Displays a 2D map menu. The menu enables an option from a list of
non-linear grey-curves or different 2D-colorized curves to be selected.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
'&DOLSHU
Tool that measures distance on the 2D image.
'$UHD
Tool that measures area on the 2D image.
$QJOH
Controls the size or angular width of the 2D image sector (in degrees).
A smaller angle generally produces a scan with a higher frame rate.
When a linear array probe is used, Angle is changed to Image-width
and controls the horizontal width of the image.
$72
Eliminates the need for the user to manually adjust acquisition and
display parameters, such as TGC and image compression, in order to
optimize 2D images. Available and enabled only with select probes and
select applications.
$XGLR9ROXPH
Enables the adjustment of the volume level in Doppler Mode.
$XWR8SGDWH
When the system generates a rolling Doppler spectrum, the 2D image
is frozen. Auto Update activates the 2D image for a short time
whenever the gate is moved, allowing it to refresh for a short distance
before the Doppler processing is continued. When Auto Update is off,
the 2D image remains frozen when the gate is moved.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
%DVHOLQH FRORU
Modifies the color distribution map and changes the color contents of
the image accordingly.
The default distribution of the color map is symmetrical for positive and
negative frequencies and the Nyquist limits for positive and negative
flows are equal. When the color baseline is modified, the map becomes
non-symmetric. The Nyquist limits for positive and negative velocities
change, depending on the direction and extent of the baseline change.
%DVHOLQH 'RSSOHU
Enables the Doppler spectrum to be shifted up and down.
The default Doppler baseline is set at the center and the Nyquist limits
for positive and negative flows are equal. This rotary moves the
Doppler baseline up or down, to enable viewing of the Doppler
spectrum portions that may have been "wrapped around" due to the
Nyquist limits. The Nyquist limits of positive and negative velocities
remain unchanged, regardless of the extent of the baseline change and
its direction.
&LQH6FUROO
Enables manual scrolling of the cineloop, in any of the modes, as an
alternative to scrolling with the TRACKBALL.
A small vertical bar moves over the EGC trace to illustrate the timing of
the cineloop in the displayed frame. It can be moved left or right
manually, to display the required frames. Refer to page 3-8 for further
details about working with cineloops. Active when cineloop is stopped.
&LQH6SHHG
Controls the cineloop playback speed. When Nominal is displayed on
the rotary on the screen, the loop is running at its original speed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
&2
Cardiac Output tool that acquires two measurements - one on the
Doppler trace and one on the 2D valve diameter.
&RORU0DSV
Displays a menu of color map options. Rotate the rotary to select a
color map. Each color map produces different effects on the color-flow
image by assigning unique color hues to different velocities.
&RORUL]H
Enables the user to colorize black and white images. With the use of
the 2D Maps soft key, the user selects the color map required.
&RPSUHVVLRQ'
When rotated clockwise, increases compression, resulting in reduced
contrast of the 2D image. An index number is displayed on the rotary
icon on the screen to indicate the relative level of compression.
&RPSUHVVLRQ0
When rotated clockwise, increases the compression level and reduces
the M-Mode image contrast, to soften the image. When rotated
counter-clockwise, increases the M image contrast. An index number is
displayed on the rotary icon on the screen to indicate the relative
compression level.
&RQWRXU
Controls image processing related to the extent of edge enhancement
applied to an image.This function is available in 2D-Mode, but is more
important in M-Mode, where it helps to sharpen the edges of an image.
&XUYH
Activates Curved Anatomical M-Mode, enabling the user to generate a
synthetic M-Mode display from a curved line drawn on a 2D image.
'&DOLSHU
Doppler Caliper tool that measures maximum velocity, time and slope
on the spectral Doppler.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
'RSSOHU$QJOH
Enables the user to correct the Doppler velocity scale by defining the
angle between the Doppler beam and the interrogated blood vessel (in
degrees). The Angle Correction Cursor calibrates the velocity scale of
the Doppler spectrum. When the Doppler angle is greater than 68
degrees, the system automatically displays a frequency scale instead
of a velocity scale, due to increased measurement error. The Angle
Correction Cursor turns light blue when the angle value is between
55-65 degrees, to indicate the recommended angle setting for vascular
applications.
The Smart Doppler (refer to page 3-62) permits both the Angle
Correction Cursor and the Doppler interrogation beam marker to be
rotated at the same time by the Doppler Angle soft key rotary. For any
vessel angle within a given range, the interrogation angle will be
retained at a constant 60 degrees.
'RSSOHU0DSV
When rotated, displays a dropdown menu of different Doppler
colorization maps. Select the required non-linear grey curves or
"colorized Doppler" curves.
(QG0DUNHU
Moves the red vertical line that is displayed over the ECG trace to
indicate the end of a cineloop, left or right, in order to define the section
of the cineloop that is to be displayed.
(QYHORSH$GMXVWPHQW
Corrects and adjusts the envelope for the Doppler spectrum image auto
trace, assuring better accuracy.
)LUVW0DUNHU
Moves the green vertical line that is displayed over the ECG trace to
indicate the beginning of a cineloop, left or right, in order to define the
section of the cineloop that is to be displayed.
)RFXV
Changes the location of the focal zone marker by displaying a triangular
focus marker that indicates the depth of the optimized focal point. In
Color Mode, the focus location tracks the ROI position.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
)UDPH5DWH
Adjusts the frame rate (in Hz). Rotate the rotary clockwise to increase
frame rate. An index number displayed on the rotary on the screen
indicates the relative setting of the frame rate.
)UHTXHQF\'
Enables adjustment of the transmit and receive operating frequency (in
MHz). Rotate the rotary clockwise to increase the frequency.
On some low frequencies, the system switches automatically to
second-harmonic mode. The selected frequency is displayed on the
screen. The letter H, next to the frequency, indicates that harmonics
has been activated.
+RUL]RQWDO6ZHHS
Enables the modification of the horizontal sweep speed (in m/sec). In
PW-Mode, the focus tracks the Doppler gate position. In CW-Mode, the
focus tracks the small horizontal marker located on the Doppler cursor.
+5
Heart Rate tool that measures heart rate.
,QYHUW
• Left/Right Invert: Enables a mirror image of the 2D image to be
created. The left/right reference markers move to the other side of
the image.
• Up/Down Invert: Enables the 2D image to be flipped
180 degrees.
• Invert Color: Enables the color scheme assigned to positive and
negative velocities to be inverted.
For example, the color map assigned to positive velocities is
assigned to negative velocities after the inversion.
• Invert (Doppler): Enables the spectrum to be flipped 180 degrees,
so that negative velocities are displayed above the baseline and
positive velocities below the baseline.
If the Doppler Mode is combined with Color Mode, the color map
will also be inverted.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
/D\RXW
Enables toggling between side-by-side and top-bottom layouts when
viewing two modes in parallel. For example, when viewing 2D-Mode
and Doppler Mode side-by-side, pressing the Layout soft key will
display them one above the other.
/LQH0RYH
Enables the M Cursor that is displayed over 2D images in Anatomical
M-Mode to be moved from left to right across the scanning screen.
/LQH5RWDWH
Enables the M Cursor that is displayed over 2D images in Anatomical
M-mode to be rotated 360 degrees.
/RZ35)
Enables toggling between High and Low Pulse Repetition Frequency
(PRF) functions, in PW-Mode only.
In PW-Mode, when the Doppler PRF is raised beyond a certain limit,
more than one Doppler gate is displayed on the screen. This situation is
called High PRF Mode, as opposed to Low PRF Mode, which contains
only one Doppler gate.
/RZ9HO5HMHFW &RORU
Enables the extent of low velocity removal to be adjusted (in cm/s).
Color data produced by very low flow can cause interference.
/RZ9HO5HMHFW 'RSSOHU
Enables the low velocity portions of the spectrum to be filtered
(in cm/s), since the Doppler spectrum and audio can contain strong,
undesirable wall-motion signals.
/9
Left Ventricle tool that measures left ventricle parameters (IVS, LVID,
LVPW).
0DQXDO7UDFH$XWR7UDFH
Enables Doppler signal envelope tracing. It can be performed manually
by the user (using the TRACKBALL) or automatically by the scanner.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
0&DOLSHU
Motion caliper tool that measures distance, time and slope on the
M-Mode display.
0+HLJKW
Motion Height tool that measures distance on the M-Mode display.
3UHYLRXV1H[W
Enables the user to manually move to the next or previous heart cycle.
Active when cineloop is running.
36('
Peak Systolic and End Diastolic Velocities tool that measures two
velocity points on the spectral Doppler window.
5HMHFW'
Enables 2D (grey) reject in CFM-Mode. Setting is differential to the
value set in 2D only. Returning to 2D-Mode disables Reject 2D.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
5HMHFW0
When rotated clockwise, rejects the low-level echoes in the
M-Mode image, producing a clearer image.
Too much reject can eliminate some valuable soft tissue information
from the image. Turn the rotary counterclockwise to decrease the
low-level echo rejection. An index number on the rotary icon on the
screen indicates the relative rejection level.
5HVL]H5HVXOWV
Default soft key rotary that enables shortening and/or enlarging of the
measurement result list shown in the window on the display screen.
52,6L]H
When pressed, enables the TRACKBALL to control the dimensions of the
color ROI (Region of Interest).
To control the width of the ROI, TRACKBALL right or left.
To control the height of the ROI, TRACKBALL up or down.
52,/HQJWK
Enables the color ROI length to be modified. When combining color and
M-Modes, the size of the color region is one-dimensional and is
referred to as length.
581&LQH
When pressed, activates an endless playback of a cineloop. The time
frame of the played back cineloop is defined by the colored markers
displayed on the ECG trace. The system automatically positions the
First Marker at the beginning of a systolic cycle and the End Marker at
the beginning of the next systolic cycle. In 2D-Mode, displays a
scrolling image. In Doppler Mode, displays a scrolling ECG pointer.
Active when cineloop is stopped.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
6DPSOH9ROXPH
In PW-Mode, enables the TRACKBALL to be assigned to control the size
of the sample volume gate (in mm). The TRACKBALL can then be used to
increase or decrease the gate size.
When the gate size has been adjusted, press Sample Volume again to
reassign the TRACKBALL to control the sample volume gate position.
In Color Mode, a large sample volume size makes the pixels appear
larger, but the color is more sensitive. A small sample value size
decreases the color pixel size and reduces color sensitivity.
6FUROO5HVXOWV
Soft key rotary that enables scrolling within the list of measurements
taken and displayed in the measurement result list window on the
display screen.
6LPXOWDQHRXV
When working in multiple view (split screen or quad screen, as
described on page 3-13), synchronizes all the cineloops to run
simultaneously on the screen. When turned off, only the image in the
active segment of the screen will run.
When running cineloops in split screen mode, enables cineloops to be
run in only one window or in all windows.
6WRS&LQH
When pressed, stops the continuous playback of a cineloop. Active
when cineloop is running.
7LOW
Enables the sector of the 2D image to be tilted to the left or right. By
default, the axis of symmetry of a 2D image is vertical.
9DULDQFH
Enables the velocity variance calculation and display velocity variable
as an indication of the amount of turbulent flow. A special
two-dimensional color map replaces the usual color map.
9HORFLW\
Tool that measures one velocity point on the Doppler window.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
9HORFLW\6FDOH
Controls the PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) values. It enables
maximal detected velocity to be modified. In CFM, it also controls the
distribution of shades in the color map over the different velocity values
in the flow.
9)
Volume Flow tool that measures velocity time integral (VTI) and heart
rate (HR) on the spectral Doppler window, and blood vessel diameter
on the 2D window.
:LGWK
Controls the sector width in the case of a linear probe, and angular
width for all other probes. For a linear probe, the range depends upon
the probe.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
6RIW0HQX5RFNHU)XQFWLRQV
The Soft Menu rocker enables access to mode-specific pop-up menus
that provide display adjustment options.
The options are as follows:
$XGLR+3)
Controls the audio filter in Doppler Mode. It affects audio only, not the
display. When operating, it removes low frequency audio noise.
&RPSUHVVLRQ 'RSSOHU
Enables control over the contrast of the Doppler spectrum. When
compression is raised, the spectrum becomes soft or has less contrast
and some low level background noise can appear.
&RQWRXU
In 2D or M-Mode, enables the sharpness of images to be increased in
the radial direction.
'LII 'LIILFXOW
Often certain reverberation artifacts can occur on thin patients. This
function is designed to reduce these artifacts, however frame rate will
be reduced as a result.
When set to 0 (zero), this function is active, that is, reverberation
artifacts are reduced. The factory default for this function is 1 (one),
meaning that this function is not active and reflection artifacts can
occur.
'RSSOHU'5
Doppler Dynamic Range adjusts the range of color scale used to
represent the span of received signal strength from the blood. It makes
the spectrum softer or harder.
'RSSOHU3RVW3URFHVVLQJ
Controls the amount of contrast of the Doppler display.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
'\QDPLF5DQJH
Enables control of the dynamic range or contrast of an image in 2D and
Doppler Modes (in dB). When dynamic range is set to a large value, the
image is softer and more low-level data is visible.
)ODVK* )ODVK*DLQ
Enables an algorithm that removes undesired color flashes due to
probe motion or strong tissue motion. (Note: High values can cause a
reduction of color sensitivity.)
)UDPH$YHUDJLQJ
Enables adjustment of the frame refresh rate. Lower frame averaging
produces a more distinct picture, because it does not retain information
from previous frames. Frame averaging is also known as temporal
filtering.
)UDPH5DWH
Enables the frame rate (in Hz) to be increased when examining fast
moving tissue. When examining non-moving tissue, it is recommended
that the frame rate be decreased, in order to increase resolution.
)UHTXHQF\
Enables the transmission frequency in Doppler and Color Modes
(in MHz) to be modified, to control sensitivity or level of penetration.
3HUVLVWHQFH
Enables adjustment of color images, so that the current frame retains
some color information from previous frames, in order to avoid noise.
3RZHU
Controls the amount of acoustic power applied in all modes (in dB).
When power is set to maximum, it is equal or less than the maximum
acoustic power permitted by the FDA.
When power is reduced, it reduces the signal-to-noise ratio, so that the
image, spectrum or color scan can become noisier.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes
5HMHFW'
Enables 2D (grey) reject in CFM-Mode. Setting is differential to the
value set in 2D only. Returning to 2D-Mode disables Reject 2D.
5HMHFW 'RSSOHU
Enables undesirable background noise to be removed from the Doppler
spectrum. Applying Doppler Reject removes some of the noise and
darkens the background.
6DPSOH9ROXPH
Controls the size of the CFM sample volume. This is the actual physical
size from which color information is obtained for each color pixel.
6WHHU$QJOH
Controls the angular direction of the ultrasound beam. In non-steering
modes (the most common modes), the ultrasound beam is always
perpendicular to the probe surface. When steering is on, the ultrasound
beam creates an angle (up to 30 degrees) relative to the perpendicular
beam.
6PRRWKLQJ
Enables radial and lateral smoothing of the color pixels. Smoothing
occurs symmetrically in both directions. Increased smoothing causes
the color display to look more continuous and less pixelated.
7LVVXH3ULRULW\
Enables the tissue priority level to be raised when color data hides
some 2D tissue details, and enables visibility of grey-level tissue to be
improved. The higher the Tissue Priority value, the more
2D tissue is visible.
When Tissue Priority is being set, a small line moves up and down the
grey scale map on the right side of the screen. All grey levels above the
set level will have priority over the color data.
9DULDQFH*DLQ
Controls the amount of variance data added to a color display. When
this function is activated, the final color display is a combination of flow
velocity data and variance data.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Modes

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Physiological Traces
&KDSWHU
3K\VLRORJLFDO7UDFHV
,QWURGXFWLRQ
The Physiological module enables the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit to display ECG & Phono traces. The ECG trace is
derived from the internal ECG, or from an analog input capable of
handling external ECG signals from other diagnostic ECG devices. The
Phono trace is derived from a special microphone.
This chapter describes the procedures for working with the
Physiological module, and includes the following sections:
• ECG & Phono Display, page 4-2, describes the way the ECG &
Phono traces are displayed on the screen.
• Connecting the Electrodes, page 4-3, describes how to connect
the internal ECG.
• Adjusting the ECG & Phono Display, page 4-5, describes how to
adjust the position, gain and sweep rate of the ECG traces.
• ECG & Phono Soft Key Functions, page 4-10, describes the
functions of the ECG & Phono soft keys.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
(&* 3KRQR'LVSOD\
The heart rate is displayed below the ECG trace on the left side of the
screen.
ECG Trace
Heart Rate
Figure 4-1: Physiological Traces On Scanned Image
The scanned image is synchronized with the ECG & Phono traces. In
M-Mode or Doppler Mode, the traces are synchronized with that
particular mode’s sweep.
The user can control the gain, position and sweep rate of the traces
using the soft keys.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
&RQQHFWLQJWKH(OHFWURGHV
The internal ECG is connected to a rectangular-shaped socket on the
patient trace (I/O) panel, located in the front left area of the Vivid 3 Pro/
Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit. Each socket is clearly labelled and
color-coded, as shown below.
Refer to the ECG Electrode Placement Table on page 4-4 for details
about ECG cable placement.
1 3
2 4
Figure 4-2: Connection Sockets for ECG Cables
1. Footswitch (black)
2. Phono (blue)
3. Internal ECG (yellow)
4. ECG (green)
(&*&DEOH
The ECG cable is a modular cable consisting of four different cable
parts. The main part (trunk) is a single cable which connects to the
system at one end, and provides a cable splitter device at the other
end. The splitter contains five receptacles, three of which are used on
the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit.
Three color-coded electrode cables are inserted into the appropriately
colored splitter receptacles. Each cable hooks up to an appropriate
stick-on electrode by a clip type connector. The color coding follows
one of two standards that are common in different parts of the world.
The cable splitter has a drawing defining the color codes, names and
body location of the three cables.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
(*&(OHFWURGH3ODFHPHQW7DEOH
Refer to the following table for information on the two standard color
codes as well as replacement part number for the different cables.
AHA (USA) IEC (Europe, Asia, ROW)
Black (LA) p/n 412680-104 Yellow (L) p/n 412680-106
White (RA) p/n 412680-102 Red (R) p/n 412680-108
Green (RL) p/n 412680-103 Black (N) p/n 412680-107
LL Unassigned F Unassigned
V Unassigned C Unassigned
p/n 412931-001 p/n 412931-002

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$GMXVWLQJWKH(&* 3KRQR'LVSOD\
The position, gain and sweep rate of the ECG & Phono traces can be
adjusted using the soft keys. The user can also use the soft keys to
display or hide these traces.
Figure 4-3: ECG & Phono Soft Keys
Note: In a two or four-window split screen, each screen will display its own
ECG & Phono traces.
&KDQJLQJWKH7UDFH6ZHHS6SHHGLQ'0RGH
The Horiz. Speed rotary enables the user to adjust the speed of the
trace sweep. This only controls sweep speed in 2D-Mode or in Color
Mode. The sweep speed of the physio traces in M-Mode or in Doppler
Mode are identical to the sweep speed of the M-scroll or the
Doppler-scroll, as adjusted by the user.
To change the trace sweep speed in 2D-Mode:
Physio 1. Press Physio on the control panel to display the ECG & Phono soft
key menu.
Horiz. Sweep 2. Turn the Horiz. Sweep rotary to change the sweep speed. The
present speed (in mm/sec) will appear on the rotary as it is being
modified.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
&KDQJLQJWKH(&*7UDFH$PSOLWXGH
The Gain ECG rotary enables the user to adjust the amplitude of the
ECG trace.
The ECG signal’s amplitude may vary between patients due to different
skin moisture and other physiological parameters. The system will
synchronize well on any amplitude of ECG trace as long as it is above a
certain limit and not saturated (not containing square or flat parts in the
trace).
To change the ECG trace amplitude:
key menu.
Gain ECG 2. Turn the Gain ECG rotary to adjust the amplitude of the ECG trace.
&KDQJLQJWKH(&*7UDFH3RVLWLRQ
The ECG position rotary enables the user to adjust the position of the
ECG trace. The trace can be moved up or down until the most suitable
position is found.
Note: The ECG trace position is adjusted independently for 2D-Mode, M-Mode
and Doppler Mode.
To change the ECG trace position:

key menu.
CG Position 2. Turn the ECG position rotary to move the ECG trace up or down as
required.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6HOHFWLQJDQ([WHUQDO(&',QSXW
The ECG Internal/External soft key enables the user to switch
between an external ECG source and the internal ECG unit.
To select external ECG signal input:
key menu.
ECG 2. Press the ECG Internal/External soft key so that External is lit on
Internal/
screen. Press the ECG Internal/External soft key again so that
External
Internal is lit on screen to return to the internal ECG unit.
+LGLQJWKH(&*6LJQDO7UDFH
The ECG soft key enables the user to hide or display the ECG signal
trace.
To hide the ECG signal trace:
key menu.
ECG 2. Press the ECG soft key to hide the ECG signal trace. The
on-screen LED will dim. Press the ECG soft key again to display the
ECG signal trace. The on-screen LED will be lit.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
8VLQJWKH+HDUW6RXQG0LFURSKRQH'HYLFH
In order for a Phono trace to be displayed, the user must connect a
heart sound microphone to the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound
unit, and then activate the function using the Phono soft key.
Note: The phono signal is used for display only, not for synchronization.
To use the heart sound microphone device:

1. Connect a microphone cable (catalog no. H45001JA) to the
appropriate socket.
key menu.
Phono 3. Press the Phono soft key to display the Phono trace. The
on-screen LED is lit. Press the Phono soft key again to hide the
Phono trace. The on-screen LED will dim.
&KDQJLQJWKH3KRQR7UDFH$PSOLWXGH
The Gain Phono rotary enables the user to adjust the amplitude of the
Phono trace signal displayed on the screen.
To change the Phono trace amplitude:
key menu.
Gain ECG 2. Press the Gain ECG / Gain Phono soft key rotary to activate the
Gain Phono function.
3. Turn the Gain Phono soft key rotary to adjust the amplitude of the
Phono signal displayed on the screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
&KDQJLQJWKH3KRQR7UDFH3RVLWLRQ
The Phono position rotary enables the user to adjust the position of
the Phono trace signal. The trace can be moved up or down until the
most suitable position is found.
To change the Phono trace position:
key menu.
Phono 2. Press the ECG position / Phono Position soft key rotary to
Position
activate the Phono position function.
3. Turn the Phono position soft key rotary to move the Phono trace
up or down as required.
6HOHFWLQJD3KRQR)LOWHU
The Phono_Filter soft key rotary enables the user to select a phono
filter option.
To select the Phono filter:
key menu.
Horiz. Sweep 2. Press the Horiz. Sweep / Phono_Filter soft key rotary to activate
the Phono Filter function.
3. Turn the Phono_Filter soft key rotary to select the appropriate

phono filter.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
(&* 3KRQR6RIW.H\)XQFWLRQV
3KRQR2Q2II
Turns the phono signal trace on and off.
3KRQRB)LOWHU
Enables the user to select a different phono filter, by rotating the soft
key rotary.
(&**DLQ
Enables the user to change the amplitude of the ECG trace on the
screen.
(&*3RVLWLRQ
Enables the user to move the ECG trace up or down and place it in the
most suitable position.
3KRQR*DLQ
Enables the user to change the amplitude of the Phono signal display
on the screen.
3KRQR3RVLWLRQ
Enables the user to reposition the Phono signal display, as required.
(&*2Q2II
Turns the ECG trace on and off.
([WHUQDO,QWHUQDO(&*
Enables the user to select an external ECG source instead of the
default internal ECG unit.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
&KDSWHU
6WUHVV(FKR
,QWURGXFWLRQ
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit provides an (optional)
integrated Stress Echo Package. This package enables the user to
perform image acquisition, review, manipulations, wall-segment scoring
and reporting for a complete and efficient stress echo protocol, as
described in the following sections:
• Stress Echo Mode and Protocols, page 5-2, describes the
procedures for selecting protocol templates provided by the Stress
Echo Package for exercise, as well as pharmacological and bicycle
stress examinations, with different numbers of levels and
projections.
• Viewing Completed Calculations and Scoring, page 5-23,
describes the procedures for viewing stored calculations and
generating printed reports.
• Editing and/or Creating Stress Templates, page 5-24, describes
the procedures for modifying existing stress templates, or creating
original templates.
In addition to preset factory protocol templates, numerous templates
can be created or modified to suit individual user needs. The user can
create a template with up to six projections organized in any order, and
up to ten stress levels.
Users can define various quad-image review groups, in any order or
combination, that suit their normal review protocol.
When reviewing stress examination images, the images are viewed at
their original image quality, and different post-processing and zoom
factors may be applied to the images under review for best depiction of
quality.
When an Archiving option is installed on the system, users may review
stress examinations of any patient in the database at any time.
Stress exercise protocol allows the user to capture up to two minutes of
full quality continuous capture, for subsequent analysis.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
6WUHVV(FKR0RGHDQG3URWRFROV
Stress echo projections are acquired according to a selected protocol
and template, as described below.
To access Stress Echo Mode and select a stress protocol:
Protocol 1. Press Protocol on the control panel to enter the Stress Echo Mode,
shown below:
Figure 5-1: Selecting a Stress Echo Mode Template
A list of available stress protocol templates is displayed on the

clipboard. Each label defines a different protocol template. The
default template is highlighted and is displayed on the screen.
Note: Stress protocol templates can be edited or created, as described in

the Editing and/or Creating Stress Templates section, page 5-24.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
Select 2. Use the Select Template soft key rotary to scroll through the list of
Template
templates to highlight the required one. The different protocols are
displayed on the screen as the scrolling occurs,
OR,
TRACKBALL TRACKBALL to the required template and press Select.
Select
Freeze 3. After selecting the required protocol, press Freeze to exit Freeze
Mode and begin acquisition.
The name of the selected template is displayed at the top of the

clipboard and the template projection matrix appears beneath it.
The first cell in the matrix is highlighted.
Note: Refer to the Stress Tab section, page 14-38, for detailed procedures
for controlling the contents of the templates list.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
$FTXLVLWLRQ
Projections are acquired in a predefined order (protocol), according to
the selected template. The highlighted cell of the matrix, displayed on
the clipboard in Stress Echo Mode, indicates which projection is
currently being acquired.
The names of both the projection and the level are displayed in the top
left corner of the image area, adjacent to the projection matrix.
.
Figure 5-2: Acquiring Images
This section describes the procedures for:

• Selecting an Image, page 5-5.
• Selecting a Projection/Level, page 5-7.
• Deleting or Replacing Acquired Images, page 5-8.
• Setting Timers for Projections and Levels, page 5-10.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
6HOHFWLQJDQ,PDJH
To begin acquisition:
Freeze 1. Toggle Freeze to off, in order to exit Freeze Mode and enable
scanning.
Note: The footswitch can be configured to toggle Freeze on and off. For
more information about configuring the footswitch operation, refer to the
System Tab section, page 14-11.
2. Perform a scan in 2D-Mode that conforms with the projection and

level that is highlighted in the projection matrix on the clipboard.
The first level is usually the Resting level.
Freeze 3. Press Freeze to stop and replay the last complete heart-loop. It is
now required to select the most preferable loop.
Note: If the Preview Cine Before Store option has not been selected in
the Presets and System Setup configuration, and Freeze is not pressed
prior to Store, the most recent heart cycle loop that was scanned is
automatically saved. For further information about selecting this option,
refer to the Archive Tab section, page 14-34.
Previous/ 4. Use the Previous/Next soft key rotary to scroll between heart
Next
cycles to locate the most appropriate cycle. If required, use the End
Marker or First Marker soft key rotaries to correct the loop
triggering.
Note: Each heart cycle is numbered sequentially for convenience.
Store 5. After selecting the preferred loop, press Store on the control panel
to save the loop. The relevant element in the matrix displays a
miniaturized image to indicate that a loop has been stored.
Important: After storing the loop, the system automatically highlights the
next projection/level to be acquired in the matrix on the clipboard. The
system also automatically unfreezes the system to prepare it for scanning.
6. Repeat previous steps until all required projections have been
made and completed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
To select a loop on a Quad View display:

1. Follow steps 1 through 3 of the previous procedure for acquiring an
image.
Quad View 2. Press the Quad View soft key so that the relevant on-screen icon is
selected. The four most recent loops are displayed simultaneously
on the screen. Each quadrant is numbered in the lower left hand
corner, with the highest number representing the most recent loop.
The currently selected loop is in a yellow-framed window and has a
green dot at the top of the image.
Window 3. Toggle the Window Select button on the control panel to move
Select
between and highlight the preferred quad view image windows,
OR
TRACKBALL TRACKBALL to the required quad window and press Select.
Select
4. Manually select the required image using the soft keys and soft key
rotaries.
Use the Previous/Next soft key rotary to change all four window
images to display the previous or next four loops.
Note: If necessary, use the All End Markers soft key rotary to move the
end marker in all four windows simultaneously (used for viewing the systolic
perspective of the heart cycle).

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
5. Press Store on the control panel to save the currently selected

Store loop, highlighted by a yellow frame. A small image is displayed in
the relevant highlighted icon in the clipboard’s matrix to indicate that
the projection has been acquired.
Important: After storing the loop, the system automatically highlights the
next projection/level to be acquired in the matrix on the clipboard. The
system also automatically unfreezes the system to prepare it for scanning
(or according to the configured option, as described on page 5-30).
6. Repeat the previous steps until all required projections have been
acquired and completed.
Note: After a rest level image has been acquired for the current projection
on subsequent levels, the Rest position for this projection is displayed at the
bottom of the clipboard area, for comparison purposes.
6HOHFWLQJD3URMHFWLRQ/HYHO
A fixed protocol is provided for scanning, based on the selected
template. The system automatically highlights the next projection/level
to be acquired in the matrix on the clipboard, as images are stored.
However, the order of scanning may be changed manually.
To manually select a specific projection/level:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the cell in the matrix that represents the projection that
is to be acquired, and press Select to highlight and select the
required projection option.
Select
2. Scan and save the selected loop into the selected cell, as explained
in the previous sections.
Note: The system then automatically highlights the next available

projection/level to be acquired after the manually chosen matrix position.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
'HOHWLQJRU5HSODFLQJ$FTXLUHG,PDJHV
The user may delete an acquired image or replace a new image in an
already completed projection.
To delete an acquired image:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the projection/level image cell that is to be deleted in
the clipboard’s matrix, and press Select. The system places a red
highlight around the selected projection/level in the clipboard’s
matrix.
Select
Menu 2. Press Menu on the control panel. The Delete option is displayed.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to the on-screen Delete button and press Select. A

pop-up dialog box, requesting confirmation of the deletion is
displayed.
Select 4. TRACKBALL to Yes and press Select.
Note: To delete a level, the selected level must not contain any images.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
To replace an acquired image:

TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the projection/level image cell that is to be replaced in
the clipboard’s matrix and press Select. The system places a red
highlight around the selected projection/level in the clipboard’s
matrix.
Select
Store 2. Press Store on the control panel. The question "Do you want to
delete the previous loop?" is displayed.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to YES and press Select. The newly acquired image
replaces the image previously stored in the selected projection/
image cell.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
6HWWLQJ7LPHUVIRU3URMHFWLRQVDQG/HYHOV
Two timers (T1 and T2) are displayed in the top left corner of the image
area, adjacent to the projection matrix, beneath the projection and level
names.
• T1, which is displayed at all times, displays the elapsed time from
the start of the stress examination. If the scan is frozen, T1 also
freezes to indicate the time at which the loop was frozen. Upon
unfreeze, T1 readjusts and reflects the actual time passed.
• T2 is a level timer. The user can control the T2 time to be displayed
on or removed from the image area by toggling the
on-screen T2 timer icon button, or by configuration, as described on
page 5-30. The T2 timer can be configured to start, stop, hide or
show automatically after each level, or at any specified point during
the stress exam; or, it can be started, reset or removed manually
during the exam.
T2 can be used to display the time lapse between levels when the
Dobutomine template has been selected; or the number of
seconds captured in the continuous capture buffer when an
Exercise template has been selected.
Important: When in Freeze Mode, both T1 and T2 timers seem to stop

operating on the image area. However, upon unfreeze, the timers readjust and
reflect the actual time passed.
To display the T2 timer from the image screen:

TRACKBALL • TRACKBALL to the on-screen T2 timer icon button which is located
beneath the projection matrix, and press Select to toggle the button
on. The T2 timer is displayed under the T1 timer display on the
image area.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
To remove the T2 timer display from the image screen:

TRACKBALL • TRACKBALL to the on-screen T2 timer icon button which is located
beneath the projection matrix, and press Select to toggle the button
off. The T2 timer is no longer displayed under the T1 timer display
on the image area.
Select Note: The T2 timer cannot be operated when toggled "off", since the Start/
Stop button is disabled.
To start the T2 timer:

TRACKBALL • TRACKBALL to the Start button, which is located beneath the
projection matrix next to the T2 button, and press Select. The Start
button changes to Stop. The T2 timer, displayed in the image area,
begins to operate.
Select
To stop the T2 timer:

TRACKBALL • TRACKBALL to the Stop button, which is located beneath the
projection matrix next to the T2 button and press Select. The Stop
button changes to Start. The T2 timer, displayed in the image area,
stops operating.
Select
To stop, reset and start the T2 timer:

Store • Most templates are configured to automatically reset T2 to 0.00.00
and restart operation when the user presses Store on the control
panel at the end of the level.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
$QDO\VLV
Analysis consists of viewing previously saved projections and assigning
scores to each cardiac segment, in order to quantify the function of the
muscle, as described in the following sections:
• Scoring Acquired Heart Cycles, page 5-13.
• Scoring Stress Echo Data, page 5-14.
• BullsEye Scoring Diagram, page 5-16.
When all the projections are complete, or when the user wishes to
begin analysis, the analysis stage is started by entering Freeze Mode
and displaying a quad scoring screen, which is then used to do the
scoring. Different groups of cells are displayed and scored.
The quad view is the standard display for comparing heart cycles. The
heart cycle loops in the display are synchronized to enable comparison.
Each of the loops in the quad screen may be magnified, as required, by
using the Zoom soft key rotary.
Important: Analysis can be performed on archived examinations if the

archiving option is included with the system, otherwise analysis must be done
before a new examination is begun.
Important: The Analyze soft key is only available if images have been saved
(shown by a yellow frame) and if operation is in Freeze Mode.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
6FRULQJ$FTXLUHG+HDUW&\FOHV
To analyze stress echo data:
Analyze 1. Once acquisition has been completed, press the Analyze soft key.
The system automatically displays a quad view of the first group of
images to be analyzed and scored on the screen. The current
group’s name will appear in the prompt bar.
Note: If there are no acquired projections in the first group of cells, the
system will automatically display the next assigned group of cells. If there
are no acquired projections, the system waits for cells to be manually
selected, as described on page 5-25. After the manual selection, press the
Analyze soft key again.
Both the currently selected cell and the corresponding scoring

diagram are highlighted by yellow frames, as shown below:
Figure 5-3: Stress Echo Analysis Screen
First/End 2. Use the First Marker and/or End Marker soft key rotaries to adjust
the first and end markers of each loop if necessary, to achieve
optimal synchronization.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
Notes:
• When the Simultaneous soft key is enabled and selected, the Cine
Scroll/Run Cine and Cine Speed soft keys and rotaries affect all
four displayed heart cycles, while the First/End Marker soft key
rotaries affect only the yellow-framed selected heart cycle.
• When the Simultaneous soft key is disabled, the Cine Scroll/Run,
Cine, Cine Speed and First/End Marker soft keys and rotaries
affect only the yellow-framed selected heart cycle.
• The All End Marker rotary enables the user to move the end
marker of all four images at once.
• Post processing functions, such as Gain, Colorize and Compress,
affect all four displayed heart cycles when the Simultaneous soft
key is enabled and selected. These functions only affect the active
yellow-framed selected cycle when the Simultaneous soft key is
disabled and not selected.
6FRULQJ6WUHVV(FKR'DWD
After analyzing the images, it is possible to score the segments.
To score stress echo data:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to a segment in one of the scoring diagrams and press
Menu or Select on the control panel. A pop-up menu is displayed,
as shown below:
Select
Menu
Figure 5-4: Stress Echo Scoring Menu

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
Notes:
• At the top of the menu, the name of the cardiac segment to be

scored is displayed. Below the segment name, the following
options are provided for scoring the segments of the specific
stress level: a list of scoring assessments between 0 and 7, or
Set all segments in this level to One or All Zeros.
• This menu provides the option of setting all segments of the
protocol: Set All Segments in Protocol to One or Set All
Segments in Protocol to Zero.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to a score for the highlighted selected segment in the

displayed menu and press Select. The score is transferred and
displayed in the relevant segment area on the diagram.
Note: When a segment that is displayed in more than one diagram is

Select scored, that score is displayed in every segment of the same number in
each diagram.
Menu
Next Group 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2, until all segments have been assessed and
scored. Each stress level has its own independent set of scoring
diagrams. Use the Next Group or Previous Group soft keys, as
required, to scroll between and select the next or previous group of
images for scoring.
To set all segments to 1 (one) or 0 (zero):
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to a segment in one of the scoring diagrams and press
Menu or Select. A pop-up menu is displayed, as shown in
Figure 5-4.
Select
1. TRACKBALL to Set all segments in this level to One or Set all
segments in this level to Zero and press Select on either of these
Menu
options. All segments for all views in the selected level will be set to
One or Zero.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
%XOOV(\H6FRULQJ'LDJUDP
The user may prefer to perform scoring using the BullsEye scoring
diagram. This diagram provides 16 or 18 segments by which to score
the level.
To score using the BullsEyeBullsEye diagram:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the protocol name located on the left side of the
image screen (the cursor changes to a hand) and press Select. A
pop-up menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-4.
Note: This menu provides the option of BullsEye view (16) or BullsEye
Select View (18).
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to a BullsEye View and press Select.
Note: A checkmark is displayed next to the selected BullsEye scoring

method for the specific protocol.
Select
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to the required segment in the BullsEye diagram to be

scored and press Menu on the control panel. A pop-up menu
comprising the scoring options is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-4.
Select
Menu

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to a score for the highlighted selected segment in the

displayed menu and press Select. The score is transferred and
displayed in the relevant segment area on the diagram.
Note: When a segment that is displayed in more than one diagram is

Select scored, that score is displayed in every segment of the same number in
each diagram.
Next Group 5. Repeat steps 1 and 2, until all segments have been assessed and
scored. Each stress level has its own independent set of scoring
diagrams. Use the Next Group or Previous Group soft keys, as
required, to scroll between and select the next or previous group of
images for scoring.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
([HUFLVH6WUHVV([DPLQDWLRQV
Exercise stress examinations are similar to previously described
examinations, except that image acquisition is performed continuously
for all projections of the level. The acquisition procedure for the Rest
level is the same as described earlier in the chapter.
The difference occurs after the last rest image is stored. The system
enters continuous capture mode. As this mode has a limited storage
buffer, unique Pause/Capture modes are provided, as opposed to the
normal freeze/scan modes. The Pause Mode enables live display, by
the probe and on the screen, without any capture, thereby leaving the
buffer available. This differs from Freeze Mode, during which the image
displayed on the screen is the last image or heart cycle that was
scanned.
Figure 5-5: Exercise Stress Examination Screen

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
Important: When continuous capture mode is selected, the system

automatically displays Capture Paused at the bottom of the clipboard.
Important: A buffer bar is displayed at the bottom of the clipboard area. The
percentage (%) of the buffer that is filled is displayed on the bar. The green
portion of the bar reflects the available buffer space and the red portion reflects
the filled buffer.
A yellow vertical line on the buffer bar reflects a gap of time in the capturing
process (stopping). A blue vertical line on the bar reflects the location of the
image displayed, within the buffer area.
To control the capture process:

2D Update • Use the 2D Update button on the control panel to toggle between
Pause and Capture (unpause) modes.
Freeze • Use the Freeze button on the control panel to stop capture. In this
mode, the last heart cycle captured is replayed on the screen.
Note: When these buttons are pressed, a yellow line appears on the buffer
bar.
Important: The system enters Freeze Mode automatically once the buffer is
totally full (99%).

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
6HOHFWLQJDQG6WRULQJ+HDUW&\FOHV
After the buffer is filled with continuously captured cycles, the user can
begin to review the contents of the buffer and store images to the
scoring matrix. The number of heart cycles stored in the buffer is
displayed next to the buffer display, for example, 67 HR 75 BPM. The
user must now browse through the captured buffer to select the best
cycles for storage in the scoring matrix.
The procedure options that are available for reviewing the contents of
the buffer are described below.
To review and select the buffer bar’s captures in Full View:
Previous/ • Use the Previous/Next soft key rotary to scroll through the buffer. A
Next
blue line indicates the location of the heart cycle in the buffer bar,
and the heart cycle is displayed on the screen,
OR
TRACKBALL TRACKBALL along the buffer bar to the required heart cycle and
press Select. A blue line indicates the location of the heart cycle in
the buffer bar, and the heart cycle is displayed on the screen.
Select
While the buffer is being reviewed, the T2 timer on the scanning screen
reflects the time of each frame, relative to the initial start of the T2
counter. In addition, the heart cycle number, relative to the heart cycles
stored in the buffer, is displayed in white at the bottom of the scanning
screen, to the left of the HR.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
To enter, review and select the captures in the buffer bar in quad
view:
1. Press the Quad View soft key. The first four captured heart cycles
are displayed.
Note: If the Quad View soft key is not available, press Active Mode on the
control panel. Scroll using the Active Mode button through the different soft
key menu options, while in Freeze Mode, until the Quad View soft key is
displayed.
Previous/ 2. Use the Previous/Next soft key rotary to scroll through the buffer to
Next
display the four previous or next heart cycles. A blue line indicates
the location of the first window’s heart cycle in the buffer bar,
OR,
TRACKBALL TRACKBALL along the buffer bar to the required cycle and press
Select. The heart cycle located at that point is displayed, together
with the next three cycles. A blue line indicates the location of the
first window’s heart cycle in the buffer bar.
Select
To store heart cycles selected from the buffer bar:

Store 1. Press Store on the control panel after the required cycle has been
chosen and selected (according to any of the procedures described
above). The cycle is placed in the highlighted matrix location.
2. Follow the procedures for analysis, described on pages 5-13
through 5-16.
Note: Press Exit to return to continuous capture acquire mode.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
'LVSOD\LQJ+LGLQJRU5HVHWWLQJWKH&DSWXUH
%XIIHU
The user can control the continuous capture buffer. The user can
choose to display or hide the buffer gauge, or to reset the gauge.
To display, hide or reset the capture buffer:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the template name in the left corner of the image
screen (the cursor changes to a hand), and press Select. A pop-up
menu is displayed, as shown below:
Select
Figure 5-6: Buffer Options Pop-up Menu
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the required option and press Select. The following
options are available:
• Reset Capture Buffer empties the buffer of all images,
preparing it for a renewed capture session, if required.
• Retrieve Capture Buffer recalls the buffer with its previous
Select
content, enabling resumption of the capturing process.
• Hide Capture Buffer removes the buffer from the screen and
prevents any further scanning from being captured.
• Cancel closes the menu and returns to the previous screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
9LHZLQJ&RPSOHWHG&DOFXODWLRQVDQG
6FRULQJ
Once scoring has been completed, the results are automatically
calculated and saved to the patient file. Results can be viewed in a
report.
To view completed calculations and scoring:
Report 1. Press Report on the control panel. The system displays a report,
utilizing the default Stress template.
Note: If required, a different report template may be selected.
Scroll 2. Use the Scroll soft key rotary to scroll down, in order to display the
scoring results, together with the scoring diagrams which
graphically illustrate the scoring for each segment.
Note: If no archiving option is configured for the system, press the Print soft
key to print the report. If the archiving option is installed, the user can print
the report and save it to the archive database, as described in the Printing
Reports section, page 9-9.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
(GLWLQJDQGRU&UHDWLQJ6WUHVV
7HPSODWHV
Stress templates may be created by editing the standard factory
templates. Templates may be temporary, for use only during the current
examination, or saved as new templates, for future use and reference,
as described in the following procedures:
• Selecting a Base Template, below.
• Adding/Deleting Levels, page 5-26.
• Assigning New Labels to Levels or Projections, page 5-26.
• Defining New Groups, page 5-28.
• Deleting Groups, page 5-30.
• Saving an Edited Template, page 5-31.
6HOHFWLQJD%DVH7HPSODWH
A base template is a stress template that is edited in order to create a
new stress template.
To select a base template:
Protocol 1. Press Protocol on the control panel to freeze scanning and enter
Stress Echo Mode. A list of available stress templates is displayed
on the clipboard. The default template is highlighted and is
displayed on the screen.
Select 2. Use the Select Template soft key rotary to scroll through the list of
Template
templates to highlight the one that will be used as the basis of the
new stress template. The different protocols are displayed on the
screen as the scrolling occurs,
OR
Template If already working in stress mode, press the Template soft key. The
full-sized template view of the (acquired or to be acquired) matrix is
displayed, as described in the following procedures.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
Notes:
• Determine the required number of projections needed (four, five or six) and
select the appropriate foundation template.
• Additional stress templates can be found in the factory stress library, as
described in the Stress Tab section, on page 14-38.
To view the template view screen and select cells:

Freeze 1. Press Freeze to enter Freeze Mode.
Template 2. Press the Template soft key. The full-sized template view of the
acquired matrix is displayed.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to an arrow at the start of a row or column to select the

first four cells in a horizontal or vertical line, that are to be displayed
in the stress echo scoring quad view screen for analysis,
OR
TRACKBALL TRACKBALL to a single cell and press Select to select a specific cell.
Repeat for additional single cells.
The selected cells are highlighted by a yellow frame. (For further

information about defining and assigning cells to groups for
Select analysis, refer to page 5-28.)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
$GGLQJ'HOHWLQJ/HYHOV
The number of levels in a template can be adjusted as required, as
described in the following procedure.
To add/delete levels:
Set Levels • Rotate the Set Levels soft key rotary until the required number of
levels is reached. The number of levels is adjusted accordingly and
reflected in the screen display.
$VVLJQLQJ1HZ/DEHOVWR/HYHOVRU
3URMHFWLRQV
The names assigned to levels and/or projections in a template can be
edited as required, as described in the following procedures.
To assign new labels to levels:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the label that is to be changed and press Select. The
label is highlighted.
Select
Keyboard 2. Using the alphanumeric keyboard, type in the new label name.
7

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
To assign new labels to projections:

TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the projection label that is to be changed and press
Select or Menu on the control panel. A pop-up menu is displayed
with a list of available labels.
Select
Menu
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the required projection label and press Select.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
'HILQLQJ1HZ*URXSV
New groups of image cells can be defined in a template as required,
and their properties configured as required, as described in the
following procedure. The names assigned to each group of cells can
also be modified.
To define a new group:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the required image cells and press Select. A yellow
frame is displayed around the selected image cells.
Note: To deselect an image cell, TRACKBALL to the image cell and press
Select again. The yellow frame disappears.
Select
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the required group name on the right side of the
screen. The factory default groups are already displayed in the list.
The user can reassign different image cells to those groups or
create a new group, comprising four cells.
Select
Menu 3. Press Menu on the control panel. A pop-up menu is displayed, as

shown below:
Figure 5-7: Group Editing Options
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to UPDATE and press Select.
Note: If required, the name of the newly defined group can be

changed, following the previously defined procedures.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
To assign a name to a group:

TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the group name that is to be changed in the group list,
located on the right side of the screen, and press Select. A yellow
frame is displayed on the selected group and a vertical cursor is
displayed on the group name.
Select Note:
• If cells are assigned while the group name is highlighted, the

cells associated with the group will be identified by yellow
frames.
• If the vertical cursor is not displayed in the desired location,
move the cursor with the TRACKBALL and press Select again to
reassign cursor location.
Keyboard 2. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter a new name.

7
To define cell options:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the required image cell and press Select. A yellow
frame highlights the selected cell.
2. Press Menu on the control panel. A pop-up menu is displayed, as

Select shown below:
Menu
Figure 5-8: Cell Editing Options List

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
The following cell editing options are offered in the menu:
Delete Deletes the selected cell’s loop. When

selected, a dialog box is displayed
prompting for confirmation of the
deletion.
Enter Quad on When Freeze is pressed during protocol,
Freeze the system automatically displays Quad
view.
Unfreeze after When the selected image cell is stored,
Store the system automatically unfreezes.
Timer 2 Reset Resets the T2 timer automatically and
displays it on screen following storage of
a selected image cell.
Timer 2 Off The T2 timer is not displayed following
storage of a selected image cell.
Enter Scoring Enters scoring immediately after storage
of the selected image cell.
Cancel Closes the menu and returns to the
previous screen.
'HOHWLQJ*URXSV
Groups of image cells can be deleted from a template as required, as
described in the following procedure.
To delete a group:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the name of the group that is to be deleted along the
right side of the screen and press Menu on the control panel. A
pop-up menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-7.
Select
2. TRACKBALL to Empty and press Select. The group is removed.
Cell options, such as whether or not the T2 timer is displayed, or when
scoring is entered, can be configured for each cell, as described below.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
6DYLQJDQ(GLWHG7HPSODWH
After using the previous procedures to make all the required changes,
including the number of levels, label assignment, definition of cells for
groups and group names, the changes must be saved in order to create
a template that is available for future use.
To save an edited template:
Save 1. Press the Save soft key. A dialog box is displayed.
Keyboard 2. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter a new name for the
7 template.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. All changes to the foundation

template are saved.
Select
Freeze 4. Press Freeze to exit Freeze Mode and begin the stress acquisition
procedure, as described on page 5-4.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Stress Echo
To delete a template:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the name of the template that is to be deleted, along
the left side of the screen, and press Select to activate the
template.
Select
Delete 2. Press the Delete soft key. A dialog box is displayed requesting
confirmation.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to Yes and press Select. The template is deleted.
Select
To select and display specific templates:

Refer to the Stress Tab section, page 14-38, for detailed procedures.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Cardiac Measurement and Analysis
&KDSWHU
&DUGLDF0HDVXUHPHQWDQG
$QDO\VLV
,QWURGXFWLRQ
This chapter describes the three measurement conventions for which
the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit provides functionality, in
the following sections:
• Measure, page 6-2, describes the convention in which
measurements are made on a scan without being assigned to
predefined parameters.
• Measure and Assign, page 6-3, describes the convention in which
measurements are made on a scan, and later assigned to
predefined parameters.
• Assign and Measure, page 6-43, describes the convention in
which a predefined parameter is selected and then measured. The
value of the parameter is stored in the database for review or
reporting at a later time.
Important: Only assigned measurements are stored in the database.

Measurements without labels or parameter assignments are lost when the unit
is switched off.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0HDVXUH
The basic Measure convention enables the user to measure a physical
value on the scan, without assigning it to a predefined parameter.
The measurement procedures for the basic Measure convention are
almost identical to those for the Measure and Assign convention, as
described beginning on page 6-5. However, unlike the Measure and
Assign convention, in the basic Measure convention the
measurements made are not assigned to parameters or labels.
Caliper The Caliper button on the control panel activates the basic Measure
convention, as well as the Measure and Assign convention described
on page 6-3.
Important: Only measurements assigned to a parameter or label are stored in

the database. Therefore, all measurements made using the basic Measure
convention (measurements without label or parameter assignment) are lost
when the unit is switched off.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0HDVXUHDQG$VVLJQ
The Measure and Assign convention enables the user to first measure
a physical value on the scan, and then assign the value to a predefined
parameter or label. The value of the selected parameter is stored in the
database for review or reporting at a later time.
Caliper The Caliper button on the control panel activates the Measure and
Assign convention, as well as the basic Measure convention
described on page 6-2.
Up to four measurement tools are provided for each scanning mode.

The user can use either the default tool, or use the soft keys to select
an alternative tool as follows:
Normal 1 3 5 7 9 11
Pressed 2 4 6 8 10 12
Soft Key Mode

location
2D-Mode M-Mode Doppler
Tools Tools Tools
3 (Default tool) 2D Caliper M Caliper Velocity
4 2D Area M Height D Caliper
9 2D Volume LV CO
10 HR HR Manual trace/
Auto trace
Note: The content and order of these tools in each mode can be configured by
the user, as described in the MA Options Tab section, page 14-24.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
An example of a display with measurements is shown below:
Figure 6-1: Measurements on an Image
• After a measurement has been made, it is displayed in a result table

in the upper-left corner of the image display.
• Each measurement, together with its start and end markers, is
assigned a number on the image according to the order in which the
measurement was performed. The corresponding number in the
result table, in the upper-left corner of the screen, identifies the
specific measurement for which the values are displayed.
• A maximum of eight measurements, of similar or different types,
can be displayed on the screen at once.
• Measurements are added to, and listed in, the order in which they
are made. The last measurement is highlighted.
• The soft key icons indicate the available measurement tools.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
3HUIRUPLQJ0HDVXUHPHQWV
This section describes the tools and procedures used to perform
generic measurements in the various scanning modes.
'0RGH
The following measurements can be made on 2D-Mode images:
• Length Measurements, page 6-5.
• Area Measurements, page 6-7.
• Volume Measurements, page 6-10.
• Heart Rate (HR) Measurements, page 6-13.
/HQJWK0HDVXUHPHQWV
Length measurements enable the user to measure the distance
between two defined points on the image using the 2D Caliper, as
shown in the following example:
Figure 6-2: Length Measurements

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To perform length measurements in 2D-Mode:

Freeze 1. Generate the image to be measured and press Freeze.
Caliper 2. Press Caliper on the control panel. The button is lit, indicating that it
has been selected, and a free-moving caliper is displayed on the
image.
2D Caliper 3. The 2D Caliper soft key icon on the screen is highlighted by default.
If it is not highlighted, press the corresponding soft key on the
control panel.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the start point of the measurement, and press Select
to anchor the caliper. The current values are displayed in the result
table in the upper-left corner of the screen. A second caliper is
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to the measurement end point. The distance value, in

centimeters (cm), is displayed in the result table.
Select 6. Press Select to anchor the caliper. A new free-moving caliper is

displayed on the image, ready for the next measurement, if
required.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for additional measurements.
8. Assign a label to the measurements, as described on page 6-36.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$UHD0HDVXUHPHQWV
Area measurements enable the user to measure the area of selected
anatomy, as shown in the following example:
Figure 6-3: Area Measurements

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To perform area measurements in 2D-Mode:

Caliper 2. Press Caliper. A free-moving caliper is displayed on the image.
2D Area 3. Press the 2D Area soft key to highlight the corresponding soft key
icon on the screen.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the start point of the measurement and press Select
to anchor the caliper.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL along the outline of the area. The current values are
displayed in the result table in the upper-left corner.
Note: If a mistake is made while outlining the area, the TRACKBALL or

<Backspace> key can be used to erase portions of the trace, from the
current point backwards.
OR
Press <Delete> to delete the whole trace.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Select 6. When the trace is complete, or almost complete, press Select to

close the trace. A straight line connects the start point to the end
point. The area value, in square centimeters (cm²), is displayed in
the result table. A new free-moving caliper is displayed on the
image, ready for the next measurement, if required.
8. Assign a label to the measurements, as described on page 6-36.
Note: To correct a trace after it has been closed, double-click on the marker
located on the trace. The straight line that closed the trace is removed. Use
the TRACKBALL or <Backspace> to make the correction, as described in the
note on the previous page.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
9ROXPH0HDVXUHPHQWV
Volume measurements enable the user to measure the volume of a
defined zone on the image, as shown in the following example:
Figure 6-4: Volume Measurements
This measurement tool generates results by one of two methods:

• Method of Disks (MOD), also known as Simpson’s method.
• Area/Length (AL).
In both cases the procedure is identical, as described in this section.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To perform a volume measurement:

Freeze 1. Select the image to be measured and press Freeze.
Caliper 2. Press Caliper on the control panel. A free-moving caliper is

displayed on the image.
2D Volume 3. Press the 2D Volume soft key to highlight the corresponding soft
key icon on the screen.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the starting point at which the volume is to be

measured, and press Select to anchor the caliper.
Select 5. TRACKBALL around the area to be used for the volume calculation,
and press Select to fix the end point. The system will automatically
join the end point to the start point. An axis is automatically
displayed, beginning midway between the first and end points of the
trace.
TRACKBALL 6. TRACKBALL the end point of the axis to the required location, then
press Select to complete the measurement.
• Volume by MOD formulae, volume by AL formulae, the area of
the trace and the length of the long distance of the chamber are
displayed in the result table in the upper-left corner of the
Select screen.
• A new free-moving caliper is displayed on the image, ready for
the next measurement, if required.
8. Assign labels to the measurements, as described on page 6-36.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
An example for measuring the left ventricle volume:

TRACKBALL 1. Position the caliper on one side of the mitral valve annulus.
2. Trace around the endocardial perimeter.
Select
3. Stop tracing and press Select when the other side of the mitral
valve annulus is reached.
• A straight line will close the trace.
• Another line will be displayed which connects the center point of
the mitral valve with the farthest point of the apex.
• The MOD and AL volume will be displayed in the result table.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
+HDUW5DWH +5 0HDVXUHPHQW
This tool enables the user to make an automatic heart rate
measurement directly from the ECG trace. Manual corrections can then
be made and different heart cycles can be selected.
To perform a heart rate measurement:
Freeze 1. Select an image to be measured and press Freeze.

HR 3. Press the HR soft key to highlight the corresponding soft key icon
on the screen. The heart rate value is calculated, based on the
location of the vertical markers on the ECG trace. The markers
automatically indicate the last complete single heart cycle on the
ECG trace.
TRACKBALL 4. If the ECG markers are positioned correctly over the trace, and the
heart rate value is acceptable, TRACKBALL to the and press
Select. The heart rate value is saved and the measurement
process is completed,
Select
OR
First Marker If the ECG markers are incorrectly positioned, use the First Marker
or End Marker soft rotaries to correct the position of the markers, or
use the Previous/Next soft rotary to skip to a different heart cycle
on the trace. A new heart rate value is calculated, based on the new
location of the vertical markers on the ECG trace.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
TRACKBALL 5. After positioning the markers correctly, TRACKBALL to the green

checkbox and press Select. The heart rate value is saved and the
measurement process is completed.
Select
TRACKBALL 6. To cancel the measurement, TRACKBALL to the and press

Select.
Note: If the ECG trace is unclear, position markers at the desired heart
cycle phase using the 2D image as reference.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
00RGH
The following measurements can be made on M-Mode images:
• M Caliper Measurements, page 6-15.
• Height Measurements, page 6-17.
• LV Measurements, page 6-19.
• Heart Rate (HR) Measurements, page 6-21.
0&DOLSHU0HDVXUHPHQWV
This tool enables the user to measure basic M-Mode measurements,
such as time, slope and depth, in order to access basic cardiac
functions.
Figure 6-5: M Caliper Measurements

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To perform M Caliper measurements:


M Caliper 3. Press the M Caliper soft key to highlight the corresponding soft key
icon on the screen.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to the measurement end point.The current values are

displayed in the result table in the upper-left corner of the screen.

required.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
+HLJKW0HDVXUHPHQWV
This tool enables the user to measure the height, meaning the length at
a fixed time, while in M-Mode.
Figure 6-6: Height Measurements

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To perform height measurements in M-Mode:


M Caliper 3. Press the M Height soft key to highlight the corresponding soft key
icon on the screen.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL along the time axis to the required point, and press
Select to anchor the caliper. A vertical line with a cursor on it is
displayed on top of the M-Mode scan.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to the measurement end point. The current values are
Select 6. Press Select to anchor the end point. A new free-moving caliper is
displayed on the image, ready for the next measurement.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
/90HDVXUHPHQWV
This tool enables the user to perform the standard LV study procedure
while in M-Mode.
Figure 6-7: LV Measurements

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To perform LV measurements:

M Caliper 3. Press the LV soft key. The LV(M) study is displayed on the
clipboard, along with all the relevant measurements.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the required location on the time axis, and the end
diastole septum anterior point, then press Select to anchor the
caliper.
Select
5. TRACKBALL to the septum posterior point, and Select to anchor the

caliper.
TRACKBALL 6. TRACKBALL to the PW anterior point, and press Select to anchor the
caliper.
Select 7. TRACKBALL to the PW posterior point, and press Select to anchor

the caliper.
Note: The above measurements refer to the end diastole time point.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
TRACKBALL 8. TRACKBALL to the required location on the time axis, and the end
systole septum anterior point, then press Select to anchor the
caliper.
Select
9. TRACKBALL to the septum posterior point, and press Select to

anchor the caliper.
TRACKBALL 10. TRACKBALL to the PW anterior point, press Select to anchor the
caliper.
Select 11. TRACKBALL to the PW posterior point, and press Select to anchor
the caliper.
Note: The last three measurements refer to the end systole time point.
+HDUW5DWH0HDVXUHPHQWV
This tool enables the user to make an automatic heart rate
measurement directly from the ECG trace, while in M-Mode. Manual
corrections can then be made and different heart cycles can be
selected, as described on page 6-13.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
'RSSOHU0RGH
The following measurements can be made on Doppler Mode images:
• Velocity and Pressure Measurements, page 6-22.
• Doppler Caliper Measurements, page 6-24.
• Manual Trace Measurements, page 6-26.
• Automatic Trace Measurements, page 6-29.
• Cardiac Output, page 6-32.
Maximum (peak) and mean velocities, time, acceleration, acceleration
time, maximum & mean pressure gradient, pressure half time (PHT),
and velocity time integral (VTI) can be measured on Doppler mode
spectra.
9HORFLW\DQG3UHVVXUH0HDVXUHPHQWV
This tool enables the user to measure the velocity and pressure at a
single point in the Doppler Spectrum.
Figure 6-8: Velocity and Pressure Measurements

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To perform velocity and pressure measurements:

Freeze 1. Generate the spectrum to be measured and press Freeze.

displayed on the spectrum. The velocity and pressure gradient
values in the current caliper position are displayed on the screen.
Velocity 3. Press the Velocity soft key, to highlight the corresponding soft key
icon on the screen.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the required point. The current values are updated as
the caliper is moved. Then, press Select to anchor the caliper. The
current values are displayed in the result table in the upper-left
corner of the screen. A new free-moving caliper is displayed on the
spectrum, ready for the next measurement, if required.
Select
5. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for additional measurements, if required.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
'RSSOHU&DOLSHU0HDVXUHPHQWV
To use the Doppler caliper tool:

values in the current cursor position are displayed on the screen.
D Caliper 3. Press the D Caliper soft key to highlight the corresponding soft key
icon on the screen, if not already selected.
to anchor the start point. The current values are displayed in the
result table in the upper-left corner of the screen. These values
include, as shown in the following example:
• Vmax
Select
• Peak Pressure Gradient
• Time
• Slope
• Pressure Half Time (PHT)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to the end point of the measurement, and press Select
to anchor the caliper. A new free-moving caliper is displayed on the
image, ready for the next measurement, if required.
Select
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for additional measurements, if required.
Figure 6-9: Velocity and Pressure Measurements

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0DQXDO7UDFH0HDVXUHPHQWV
This tool enables the user to manually trace a Doppler wave form, and
measure the TAP, VTI, Peak PG, and Mean PG.
Figure 6-10: Doppler Wave Trace

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To trace the Doppler wave form:


Man Trace 3. Press the Man Trace/Auto Trace soft key to activate the Man
Trace tool.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the start point of the trace, and press Select to anchor
the caliper. The current values are displayed in the result table in
the upper-left corner of the screen.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. Use the TRACKBALL to trace the Doppler envelope from left to right
to reach the required end point, outlining the envelope of the
spectrum. These values include:
• Vmax
• TAP
• VTI
• Peak PG
• Mean PG

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Select 6. Press Select. The result is displayed in the result table. A new
free-moving caliper is displayed on the spectrum, ready for the next
measurement, if required.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for additional measurements, if required.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$XWRPDWLF7UDFH0HDVXUHPHQWV
This tool enables the user to automatically trace a Doppler wave form,
and measure the TAP, VTI, Peak PG, and Mean PG.
To perform an automatic Doppler wave form trace:

Auto Trace 3. Press Man Trace/Auto Trace soft key twice to activate the Auto
Trace tool.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to any time position over the required heart cycle on the
spectrum. The envelope type (positive/negative/both) is selected
according to the position (above/below/midpoint) of the velocity
cursor relative to the baseline.
Note: The velocity cursor will change according to the position relative to
the baseline:
• When above (positive) relative to the baseline:
• When below (negative) relative to the baseline:
• When midway (both) relative to the baseline:

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Select 5. Press Select. The system will automatically:

• Draw two vertical borders that define the start and end point of
the heart cycle.
• Trace the peak envelope between the two borders.
• Place cursors on the Vps, Ved and Vmin.
The result values are displayed in the result table in the
upper-left corner of the screen.
TRACKBALL
6. To correct the measurement, any one of the two vertical borders or
the three automatically placed calipers can be repositioned, or the
entire envelope can be raised or lowered.
• To reposition the borders or calipers, TRACKBALL to any caliper
Select or border and press Select twice.
Note: Once anchored to the vertical border, the cursor becomes a

two-sided arrow, permitting repositioning of the border.
• TRACKBALL to the required position and press Select to anchor

the arrow in the new position.
Note: The cursor returns to its regular form once anchored.
Envelope • To realign the entire envelope, rotate the Envelope Adj soft key
Adj
rotary. Rotate clockwise to lower the envelope, or
counterclockwise to raise the envelope relative to the baseline.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To display constant, real time tracing of the Doppler spectrum:

Trackball 1. While scanning in Doppler, toggle the Trackball button on the
control panel to highlight "Pointer". The arrow cursor will be
Menu 2. Press Menu on the control panel. A pop-up menu is displayed.
Select 3. TRACKBALL to Show in the pop-up menu, and press Select. When
the spectrum is turned to live mode, the system will generate
automatic peak tracing in real-time.
Note: A special real-time updated results box containing the following

parameters will be displayed in the top right corner of the screen:
• HR Heart rate
• PI Pulsitility Index
• RI resistivity Index
• PS Peak systolic value
Note: The real-time result window will update every few seconds, as long as the
spectrum is running in live mode and is recognized by the system.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
&DUGLDF2XWSXW
To perform a cardiac output (CO) measurement:
Caliper 2. Press Caliper. A free-moving caliper is displayed on the spectrum.

The velocity and pressure gradient values in the current caliper
position are displayed on the screen.
CO 3. Press the CO soft key to highlight the corresponding soft key on the
screen.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the start time point of the trace, and press Select to
anchor the caliper. The current values are displayed in the result
table in the upper-left corner of the screen, including the:
• VTI
• HR
Select
TRACKBALL 5. Use the TRACKBALL to trace the Doppler envelope from left to right
on the required part of the spectrum, and press Select at the end of
the trace. A vertical bar is displayed.
Select
TRACKBALL 6. TRACKBALL to the bar to indicate the end of the heart cycle, and
press Select to anchor and complete spectral tracing procedure.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
7. In order to obtain the Cardiac Output (CO) estimation, assign result

to one of the heart valves. The result is displayed in the result table
in the upper-left corner of the screen. A new free-moving caliper is
displayed on the spectrum, ready for the next measurement.
8. The corresponding cross-sectional diameter of the valve measured

in step 7 should be measured and assigned using a corresponding
2D image.
Note: The CO will be calculated and displayed in the Worksheet.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
*HQHUDO&RQWUROV
The basic controls described in this section can be used globally during
the examination process. These controls include:
• Highlighting Measurements, page 6-34.
• Modifying Measurements, page 6-35.
• Assigning a Parameter Label after Measurement, page 6-36.
• Modifying Assigned Measurements using the Menu Button,
page 6-38.
• Deleting Assigned Measurements using the Menu Button,
page 6-39.
• Deleting Measurements Individually, page 6-40.
• Deleting all the Measurements from the Screen, page 6-41.
+LJKOLJKWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQWV
A highlighted measurement can be modified or deleted.By default, the
last measurement is always highlighted in green.
To highlight a measurement:
TRACKBALL • TRACKBALL to the required measurement marker on the image,
OR
TRACKBALL to the required measurement in the result table in the

upper-left corner of the screen. The measurement is highlighted
green and can be modified as appropriate.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0RGLI\LQJ0HDVXUHPHQWV
Measurements can be edited by selecting the actual measurement on
the image, or by selecting the measurement in the result table, as
described in the Highlighting Measurements section, page 6-34. No
matter where the measurement is selected, it is modified both on-
screen and in the result table.
To modify a measurement:
1. Highlight the required measurement, as described on page 6-34.
Select 2. Press Select twice. The selected marker becomes free-moving and
can be repositioned.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL the marker to the required position, then press Select to
anchor the marker.
Important: Trace outlining can be corrected by TRACKBALLING

backwards, or pressing <Backspace> on the alphanumeric keyboard.
The trace is erased accurately to the required position and the user can
resume marking the trace from that point.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$VVLJQLQJD3DUDPHWHU/DEHODIWHU
0HDVXUHPHQW
Each type of measurement, within each mode, is associated with a set
of predefined parameters (labels). In addition, the system also offers
the option of assigning a unique user-defined parameters or labels for
the specific exam. The use can assign any of these parameters or
labels to a highlighted measurement.
Notes:
• A measurement can be taken more than once. Only the last

measurement for a specific parameter label can be active on the
screen (highlighted green), and can be modified. All the other
measurements for the same parameter are grey.
• When a new measurement is assigned to a parameter, the
previously active measurement turns grey and cannot be modified.
• The last six measurements for a parameter can be saved in the
database and viewed in the Worksheet.
• A measurement that has not been assigned to a parameter will not
be retained in the database.
To assign a predefined parameter label to a measurement:
Menu 2. Press Menu on the control panel. A mode-specific, tool-specific and

application-specific label menu is displayed on the clipboard. The
cursor automatically changes to a pointer in the menu box in the
clipboard.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to the required label abbreviation. The entire label

name, to which the abbreviation refers, is displayed in the
Prompt/Status bar at the bottom of the screen.
Select 4. Press Select the assign the label to the highlighted measurement.
The table is displayed in the result table, to the left of the
measurement to which it has been assigned. The cursor is
redisplayed on the scan.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To assign a user-defined parameter label to a measurement:


application-specific label menu is displayed on the clipboard, with
User as one of the menu options. The cursor automatically changes
to a pointer in the menu box in the clipboard.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to User and press Select. A dialog box is displayed,

enabling the user to enter a label.
Select
Keyboard 4. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter the required label.

7
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. The user-defined label is
displayed in the result table, to the left of the measurement to which
it has been assigned. The cursor is redisplayed on the scan.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0RGLI\LQJ$VVLJQHG0HDVXUHPHQWVXVLQJWKH
0HQX%XWWRQ
Measurements that have been assigned parameter labels can be
edited by selecting the actual measurement on the image, or by
selecting the measurement in the result table, as described in the
Highlighting Measurements section, page 6-34. No matter where the
measurement is selected, it is modified both on-screen and in the result
table.
To modify assigned measurements:

Edit and Delete as menu options. The cursor automatically
changes to a pointer in the menu box in the clipboard.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to Edit and press Select. The selected measurement

marker becomes free-moving and can be repositioned.
Select
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL the marker to the required position, then press Select to
anchor the marker.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
'HOHWLQJ$VVLJQHG0HDVXUHPHQWVXVLQJWKH
0HQX%XWWRQ
Measurements that have been assigned parameter labels can be
deleted using the Menu button on the control panel, as described
below, or using the Delete button, as described on page 6-40.
To delete assigned measurements:

Edit and Delete as menu options. The cursor automatically
changes to a pointer in the menu box in the clipboard.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to Delete and press Select. The selected measurement

is deleted from the image and the database.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
'HOHWLQJ0HDVXUHPHQWV,QGLYLGXDOO\
Measurements can be deleted by selecting the actual measurement on
the image, or by selecting the measurement in the result table, as
described in the Highlighting Measurements section, page 6-34. No
matter where the measurement is selected, it is deleted both on-screen
and from the result table.
To delete a measurement:
2. Press <Delete> on the alphanumeric keyboard. The highlighted

measurement is deleted from the image and from the database,
OR
Press <Del Meas> on the alphanumeric keyboard to delete all the

measurements on the image.
3. Repeatedly pressing <Delete> will delete measurements in reverse

order, from the bottom of the result table to the top.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
'HOHWLQJDOOWKH0HDVXUHPHQWVIURPWKH
6FUHHQ
To delete all measurements from the screen:
Exit • Press Exit on the control panel,
OR
Caliper Press Caliper on the control panel.

The measurements are deleted from the image, while the image
remains,
OR
Freeze Press Freeze to unfreeze the image, in which case both the image
and the measurements are deleted from the screen.
Note: When measurements are removed using the above procedure,

measurements that have been assigned are retained in the database.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
&RQWUROOLQJWKH5HVXOW7DEOH6L]H
The size of the result table displayed in the upper-left corner of the
scanning screen can be adjusted during scanning to prevent the table
from obscuring the image.
When the result table is reduced in size, the depth of the table is
reduced and only the most recent measurements that can fit in the table
are displayed. The user can scroll through the results displayed in the
table. The viewable area of the scan is increased.
The result table can also be restored to display all the results in the
table.
In Doppler Mode and M-Mode, in order to provide the maximum view of
the scanning area, the default size of the result table displayed fewer
than the standard eight measurements displayed in other modes. If
required, the user can increase the size of the table to display all eight
measurements.
To modify the size of the result table:
1. Make a measurement in any mode, using any tool. The
measurement is displayed in the result table.
Resize 2. Rotate the Resize Results/Scroll Results soft key rotary to reduce
Results
or expand the size of the result table.
To scroll through the result table:

Scroll 1. Press the Resize Results/Scroll Results soft key rotary to enable
Results
the Scroll Results function.
2. Rotate the Resize Results/Scroll Results soft key rotary to scroll

up or down through the results displayed in the result table.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$VVLJQDQG0HDVXUH
The Assign and Measure convention enables the user to select a
predefined parameter, and then measure it. When the parameter is
selected, a default tool is automatically activated. This is a
protocol-driven measurement menu that enables parameters to be
measured in a regular sequence. The value is stored in the database
for review or reporting at a later time.
Measure The Measure button on the control panel activates this convention.
A list of studies (protocols) is displayed on the clipboard area on the left
of the screen. Each study consists of a list of measurement labels.
Measurements are taken according to the order of the listed
measurement labels for the selected study.
See the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert Reference Manual for a full list of all
available studies and parameters.
Note: The user can reconfigure the individual studies and their parameters. For
further information, refer to Chapter 14, Presets and System Setup.
To select a study (protocol) and perform a measurement:

Measure 1. Press Measure on the control panel. A list of mode-specific and
application specific studies are displayed on the clipboard. The
cursor will be displayed in the list, enabling the user to move up and
down within the listed studies.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the required study and press Select. A list of

measurement labels, relevant to the selected study and application,
is displayed. The name of the study is displayed under the clinical
application in the list displayed in the clipboard area, as shown
below. A free-moving cursor is displayed on the image. The
Select measuring tool is automatically selected according to the type of
measurement that is highlighted and being performed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
TRACKBALL 3. Perform the measurement, and press Select when the

measurement is complete.The system will automatically jump to the
next measurement to be performed, if the Autojump option is
enabled, as described on page 14-28. The system automatically
selects the measurement tool and displays a cursor on the image.
Select
4. Repeat step 3 as necessary.

To select a different study:
TRACKBALL • TRACKBALL to the required study and press Select. A list of
measurement labels, relevant to the selected study and application,
is displayed. The name of the study is displayed under the clinical
application in the list displayed in the clipboard area, as shown
below. A free-moving cursor is displayed on the image. The
Select measuring tool is automatically selected according to the type of
measurement that is highlighted and being performed,
OR
Measure Press Measure on the control panel twice to exit and then re-enter
the Assign and Measure convention and select the required study,
as described above.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$QH[DPSOHIRU3,6$D6WXG\
The procedure for selecting a study and using the Assign and
Measure convention is described using the PISA study as an example.
To access and perform a PISA study:
Freeze 1. Press Freeze, after optimizing the 2D and color flow image so that a
jet is seen in a funnel or hemispheric shape at the valve orifice.
Baseline 2. Using the Baseline soft key rotary, decrease the color flow, aliasing
velocity. (The aliasing velocity should be approximately -0.20 or
0.24.)
Measure 3. Press Measure on the control panel. A list of studies is displayed.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the AV PISA (Aortic PISA) or MV PISA (Mitral PISA)

study, then press Select. The PISAR (Aliasing Radius)
measurement relevant to the selected study is displayed. A
free-moving caliper is displayed on the image, according to the
measurement to be performed.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to the valve area and move the radius to the top of the
aliased region, then press Select. The PISA Radius, PISA Aliasing
Velocity and Flow are recorded and displayed in the result table in
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Freeze 6. To acquire the ROA (Regurgitant Oriface Area), press Freeze after
obtaining a CW spectral waveform.
TRACKBALL 7. TRACKBALL to the baseline and press Select to anchor the caliper.
8. Using the TRACKBALL to trace the regurgitant jet, then press Select
Select to anchor the end point of the baseline.The Peak, VTI, Flow, ROA
and Volume are displayed in the result table and in the Worksheet
with the Doppler measurements.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
3URPSWHG6WHSE\6WHS3URFHGXUHV
In the Assign and Measure convention, the user is prompted by the
system with mode-specific and measurement-specific procedures.
In the Prompt/Status Bar, below the image on the screen, step-by-step
instructions are displayed for the selected parameter label, such as
length, area, velocity, heart rate, and so on, as shown below:
Figure 6-11: Example of Completed Typical LV M-Mode Study
To skip to a different parameter:

Keyboard • Use the <Space bar> to move down, or the Up and Down arrow
7 keys on the alphanumeric keyboard to navigate in the parameter
list,
TRACKBALL
OR
TRACKBALL to the required parameter and press Select. After the

Select
selected measurement has been completed, the system will
proceed to the following parameter in the list.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
:RUNVKHHW
The Worksheet enables the user to view, edit, delete or print data
independently of a report. Measurements and values can be changed
or deleted. In addition, Worksheets can be printed independently of a
report.
All the measurements and calculations taken during the examination
can be viewed at any time using the Worksheet. This provides an
overview of all the measurements that have been completed, and those
that still need to be performed. The Worksheet is the only source that
retains all the measurement information.
Each Worksheet is divided into four pages, one page for each of the
following measurements:
• 2D-Mode measurements
• M-Mode measurements
• Doppler Mode measurements
• Selections
Three Worksheet formats are provided, as follows:
• Normal: Displays the parameters and calculations for which
measurements have been assigned. Up to six measurements may
be displayed for each parameter.
• Compact: Displays only the value of the measurements and
calculations, and not the measurements themselves. The values
are displayed in a double column to compact the information.
• Expanded: Displays all available parameters and calculations,
regardless of whether measurements have been assigned to them.
Up to six measurements may be displayed for each parameter.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To access a Worksheet:
Worksheet • Press Worksheet on the control panel.The Worksheet screen is
Figure 6-12: Worksheet Screen
On the left side of the screen, the list of mode-specific pages for the
Worksheet is displayed in the clipboard area. The current page is
highlighted.
The main screen area displays the parameters and their current values.
The Parameter column displays the parameters that were assigned
when measurements were performed.
The value of the measurement, calculated according to the method
type in the Method column, is displayed in the Value column. The
measurements for each parameter are displayed to the right of the
Value column. Up to six measurements can be listed for each
parameter.
On the right side of the screen, the Method column displays the
calculation method. (The calculation method can be changed, as
described later in this section.)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To scroll through the pages:

Scroll Pages • Use the Scroll Pages soft key rotary to navigate through the pages,
OR
TRACKBALL TRACKBALL to the required page and press Select.
Select
To scroll within a mode-specific page:

croll Content• Use the Scroll Content soft key rotary to navigate through the
content of a single mode-specific page.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To adjust the method by which a calculation is made:

TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the relevant cell in the Method column and press
Select. A pop-up menu is displayed in which a checkmark indicates
the currently selected method, as shown below:
Select
Figure 6-13: Calculation Method Pop-up Menu
The following options are available:

• Min: Displays the minimum measurement.
• Max: Displays the maximum measurement.
• Last: Displays the last measurement that was taken.
• Aver: Displays the average of the measurements taken.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the required option and press Select. The values are
recalculated, according to the selected method. The new method
type is displayed in the Worksheet’s Method column.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
5LJKW$WULXP3UHVVXUH 5$3 6HOHFWLRQ

In cardiac exams, an additional Worksheet page is available, enabling
the user to specify the Right Atrium Pressure (RAP) value to be used in
cardiac calculations.
To select the RAP value:
Worksheet 1. Press Worksheet on the control panel.
Normal 2. Ensure that the Normal soft key LED icon is lit on the screen,
indicating that the basic Worksheet is being displayed. If this LED is
not lit, press the Normal soft key.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to Selections in the clipboard area and press Select.

The Selections page is displayed.
Select 4. TRACKBALL to the required RAP value in the dropdown text box
(either 5 mmHG, 10 mmHG, 15 mmHG or 20 mmHG), then press
Select. The selected measurement is highlighted and used for all
necessary calculations.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
,QFOXGLQJRU([FOXGLQJ9DOXHVLQD&DOFXODWLRQ
Values can be marked for inclusion/exclusion in a calculation. This
means that when more than one measurement has been made for a
single parameter, that value will or will not be included when the
calculation (for example, when the calculation method is average) is
made.
To mark a value for inclusion or exclusion in a calculation:
TRACKBALL • TRACKBALL to the measurement that is to be included/excluded from
the calculation, and toggle the Select button to be include or
exclude the value.
Note: An excluded measurement changes color to signify that its value has
Select not been included in the calculation. The value in the Value field is adjusted
accordingly.
0DQXDOO\&KDQJLQJD9DOXH
Individual values can be manually changed using the alphanumeric
keyboard.
To manually change a value:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the value that is to be changed and press Select.
Select
Keyboard 2. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter the required value. An

7 asterisk indicates that the value has been manually altered.
Note: To restore automatic calculation, position the TRACKBALL over the

asterisk, which indicates a value in the Worksheet has been manually
changed, and press Select. The manually entered value is replaced by an
automatically calculated value.

2300163-100 Rev. 0

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Vascular Measurement
&KDSWHU
9DVFXODU0HDVXUHPHQWDQG
$QDO\VLV
,QWURGXFWLRQ
The Vascular Package enables the user to perform common vascular
examinations and to measure different vascular anatomy.
This chapter describes the measurement tools that are available when
any of the vascular applications are selected, and includes the following
sections:
• Operating the Vascular Package, page 7-2, describes the basic
functionality of the Vascular Package.
• Measurement Tools, page 7-3, describes the various vascular
measurement tools and their functions.
• Available Study Protocols, page 7-22, describes the vascular
study protocols that are available for use on the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Vascular Measurement and Analysis
2SHUDWLQJWKH9DVFXODU3DFNDJH
The general operation of the vascular package is similar to that of the
cardiac package. Refer to the functions described in Chapter 6, Cardiac
Measurement and Analysis, for detailed operating instructions. The
differences between the vascular package and the cardiac package
are:
• The measurement tools.
• Different measurement unit results are generated, for example,
cm/sec or mm.
• The anatomical parameters embedded in the database. These
parameters are suitable for examining the carotid artery, as well as
various other peripheral arteries and veins.
• A different worksheet page format is utilized.
Note: The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit enables real-time

automatic measurement and tracing functions. For details, see the
Measurement Tools section on page 7-3.
8VLQJWKH9DVFXODU0HDVXUHPHQW7RROV
The vascular measurement tools can be applied in one of the following
ways:
• Measure: Measure a physical value without assigning it to a
predefined parameter.
• Measure and Assign: Measure a physical value and later assign
the value to a predefined parameter. The value for the selected
parameter is stored in the database for review or reporting at a later
time.
• Assign and Measure: Select a predefined parameter, and then
measure it. When the parameter is selected, a default tool is
automatically activated. This is a protocol-driven measurement
menu that enables parameters to be measured in a regular
sequence. The value is stored in the database for review or
Important: The order of the tools as they appear on the soft keys is
configurable, as described in the MA Options Tab section on page 14-24. The
tool assigned to the upper-left soft key is always the default tool.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0HDVXUHPHQW7RROV
The following section provides a description of the different vascular
measurement tools and their functions, and includes the following
topics:
• 2D-Mode Tools, below.
• Doppler Mode Tools, page 7-11.
'0RGH7RROV
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit provides the following
tools for measuring 2D images:
• Distance (2D Caliper), below.
• Percentage D Reduction (%DR), page 7-5.
• Percentage A Reduction (%AR), page 7-7.
• Area (2D Area), page 7-9.
'LVWDQFH '&DOLSHU
This tool enables the user to measure the distance between two points
on a 2D image.
Figure 7-1: Distance Measurement on a 2D Image

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To take distance measurements in 2D-Mode:

Caliper 2. Press Caliper on the control panel. A free-moving cursor is

2D Caliper 3. Press the 2D Caliper soft key, if it is not highlighted by default on

the screen.
to anchor the caliper. A second caliper is displayed on the screen.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to the measurement end point. The distance value is

displayed in the result table in the upper left of the screen.
Select 6. Press Select to anchor the caliper. A new caliper is displayed on

the image, ready for the next measurement.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for additional measurements, or proceed

to the next step.
8. Assign labels to the measurements, as described in the Assigning a

Parameter Label After Measurement section, on page 6-36.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
3HUFHQWDJH'5HGXFWLRQ '5
This tool enables the user to measure the inner and outer diameter of a
vessel in two successive measurements, and then calculate the
diameter reduction as a percentage.
To take diameter percent reduction measurements in 2D-Mode:

%DR 3. Press the %DR soft key.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the start point of the outer wall diameter measurement
and press Select to anchor the caliper. A second caliper is
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL the second caliper to the opposite edge of the vessel to
define the outer wall diameter and obtain a measurement reading.
Select 6. Press Select to anchor the caliper. A third caliper is displayed on

the screen.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for the inner wall diameter.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to make additional measurements.

The following results are displayed in the result table:
• Dmax: maximum diameter
• Dmin: minimum diameter
• Calculations:
• %Diameter reduction = 100 *(1 – Dmin/Dmax)
Figure 7-2: Percentage D Reduction Measurements
Notes:
The order in which the two diameters are measured is not important. The larger
diameter will always be assigned to Dmax, and the smaller diameter to Dmin.
After measuring Dmax, before Dmin is measured, Dmin will show a value of 0
and %Dreduct=100%. This is only a temporary result and is replaced when the
Dmin measurement is completed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
3HUFHQWDJH$5HGXFWLRQ $5
This tool enables the user to measure the inner and outer area of a
vessel in two successive measurements, and then calculate the
area-reduction as a percentage.
To take area percent reduction measurements in 2D-Mode:

%AR 3. Press the %AR soft key.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the start point for the measurement of the outer
vessel area and press Select to anchor the caliper.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL around the outer perimeter of the vessel.
Select 6. When the trace is complete, close it by pressing Select. A second

caliper is displayed.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for the inner wall area.

2300163-100 Rev. 0

• Amax: maximum area
• Amin: minimum area
• Calculations:
• %Area reduction = 100 *(1 – Amin/Amax)
Figure 7-3: Percentage A Reduction Measurements
Note: The order in which the two areas are measured is not important. The
larger area will always be assigned to Amax, and the smaller area to Amin.
Note: After measuring Amax, before Amin is measured, Amin will show a value
of 0 and %Areduct=100%. This is only a temporary result and is replaced when
the Amin measurement is completed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$UHD '$UHD
This tool enables the user to manually trace and then measure an area
on a 2D image.
To take area measurements in 2D-Mode:

2D Area 3. Press the 2D Area soft key.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the start point for the measurement of the object’s
area, and press Select to anchor the caliper.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL around the object’s perimeter.

2300163-100 Rev. 0

point. The area value, in square centimeters (cm²), is displayed in
the result table.
Figure 7-4: 2D Area Measurement


2300163-100 Rev. 0
'RSSOHU0RGH7RROV
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit provides the following
tools for measuring images generated in Doppler Mode:
• Velocity, below.
• PS & ED, page 7-13.
• Automatic Trace/Manual Trace, page 7-15.
• Volume Flow (VF), page 7-20.
9HORFLW\
This tool enables the user to measure the velocity of a single point on
the Doppler spectrum.
Figure 7-5: Velocity Measurement

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To measure velocity on the Doppler spectrum:


Velocity 3. Press the Velocity soft key, if it is not highlighted by default on the
screen.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the point of measurement for the velocity on the

spectrum. The current velocity measurement value is displayed in
yellow font in the upper-right corner of the Doppler window.
Select 5. To make another measurement, press Select to anchor the caliper.

The velocity measurement value is displayed in the result table, and
a second caliper is displayed on the screen.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for any additional measurements.
7. If required, assign labels to the measurements, as described in the

Assigning a Parameter Label After Measurement section, on
page 6-36.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
36 ('
This tool enables the user to measure two velocity points on the
Doppler spectrum, and to take spectrum measurements of the
Resistivity Index (RI) and S/D Ratio, as well as calculate the
acceleration velocity and acceleration time.
To take spectrum measurements of the RI and S/D Ratio:

PS&ED 3. Press the PS&ED soft key so that PS&ED is highlighted on the
screen.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL the cursor to the peak systolic point of the spectrum and
press Select to anchor the caliper. A second caliper is displayed on
screen.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL the second caliper to the end diastolic point on the
spectrum. The resulting values are displayed in the result table in

2300163-100 Rev. 0

Note: The order in which the two velocities are measured is not important
for PS, ED, RI and S/D calculations. The larger velocity will always be
assigned to Vps and the smaller velocity to Ved. The Acc and AT will be
calculated only when the smaller velocity is to the left of the larger velocity.

• Vps: Peak systolic velocity
• Ved: End diastolic velocity
• AT: Acceleration Time
• Acc: Acceleration velocity
• Resistivity Index (RI): (Vps-Ved)/Vps (calculation)
• S/D ratio: Vps/Ved (calculation)
Figure 7-6: PS & ED Measurement

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$XWRPDWLF7UDFH
This tool enables the user to automatically trace a Doppler signal
envelope, and measure the Pulsatility Index (PI) and Resistivity Index
(RI).
To perform an automatic spectrum trace to measure the PI & RI:

Auto Trace 3. Press the Auto Trace/Man Trace soft key once so that
Auto Trace is highlighted.
the baseline:

2300163-100 Rev. 0

the heart cycle.
TRACKBALL 6. To correct the measurement, any one of the two vertical borders or
or border and double click Select.
Select

Adj
Note: If more than one trace is displayed on the spectrum, only the
active trace (highlighted in green) will be realigned by the Envelope
Adj soft key rotary.
7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to make additional measurements.


2300163-100 Rev. 0

• Vps: Peak systolic velocity. Maximum point on the envelope
trace
• Vmin: Minimum velocity. Minimum point on the envelope trace
• TAP: Time Average Peak (TAMX: Time Average Maximum
Velocity)
• PI: Pulsatility Index: (Vps-Vmin)/TAMX
• RI: Resistivity Index: (Vps-Ved)/Vps
• S/D ratio: Vps/Ved
• HR: Heart rate. 60/time of spectrum
• VTI: Velocity Time Integral = TAMX * time of spectrum

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0DQXDO7UDFH
This tool enables the user to manually trace a Doppler signal envelope,
and measure the Pulsatility Index (PI) and Resistivity Index (RI).
To take a manual spectrum trace to measure the PI & RI:

Man Trace 3. Press the Auto Trace/Man Trace soft key twice so that
Man Trace is highlighted.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the start point of the spectrum trace (usually the end
diastolic point). Start on the left and trace to the right.
Select 5. Press Select to anchor the caliper. A second caliper is displayed on

screen.
TRACKBALL 6. Use the TRACKBALL to trace the peak envelope of the spectrum. A
marker will be positioned at the maximum peak of the envelope.
Continue to the end diastolic point on the spectrum. The resulting
values are displayed in the result table in the upper left of the
screen.


2300163-100 Rev. 0

trace
Velocity)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
9ROXPH)ORZ 9)
This tool enables the user to measure the Velocity Time Integral (VTI)
and Heart Rate (HR) on spectral Doppler images, as well as the
diameter of blood vessels on 2D images, in order to calculate Volume
Flow (VF).
To measure the VTI and HR on Doppler images:

VF 3. Press the VF soft key. Note that two measurements are displayed
on the clipboard:
• VF Auto Trace.
• VF Vessel Diameter.
spectrum and press Select. The system will automatically:
the heart cycle.
Select
• Display the resulting Vmean value in the result table in the
upper left of the display screen.
TRACKBALL 5. To correct the measurement, any one of the two vertical borders
can be repositioned. Place the TRACKBALL on any border and
double click Select. Reposition and anchor the point in the new
location by pressing Select.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
TRACKBALL 6. TRACKBALL to the 2D image on the screen in order to measure the

blood vessel diameter.
Note: To improve measurement accuracy, enlarge the 2D image display by

pressing PW or CW on the control panel. The Doppler trace window is
temporarily hidden and the 2D image is enlarged and displayed as a full
screen. Press PW or CW again to redisplay the Doppler trace window.
TRACKBALL 7. TRACKBALL the caliper to the start point of the measurement and
the screen.
Select
TRACKBALL 8. TRACKBALL the second caliper to the end point of the measurement
and press Select. The diameter of the vessel and the Volume Flow
(VF) in liters/min will appear in the result box. In addition, a list of
vessels is displayed on the clipboard, ready for assignment.
Select
TRACKBALL 9. TRACKBALL the cursor arrow to the desired vessel and press Select.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$YDLODEOH6WXG\3URWRFROV
The following section describes the study protocols that are available
for use on the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit. Each of the
study protocols, when selected, displays a list of parameters. The user
can configure a study by setting the order of the parameters and
selecting only the parameters that are required. Refer to the MA
Options Tab section on page 14-24 for configuration procedures.
Note: The assignment of parameters to measurements and the different

capabilities available when operating the studies are described in Chapter 6,
Cardiac Measurement and Analysis. Refer to that chapter for further
information.
This section includes the following topics:

• Carotid Artery Evaluation, page 7-24.
• Lower Extremities Arterial Evaluation, page 7-27.
• Upper Extremities Arterial Evaluation, page 7-28.
• Aorto-Iliac Arteries Evaluation, page 7-29.
• Renal Evaluation, page 7-30.
• Transcranial Evaluation, page 7-31.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0HDVXUHPHQWV
The following measurements can be made on the artery sites listed for
the Vascular Application. The measurement results are displayed in the
upper left of the screen, and in the worksheet.
• Peak systolic velocity.
• End diastolic velocity.
• Vessel diameter/area at stenotic site.
• Vessel diameter/area at proximal non-stenotic site.
• Volume flow.
• TAMX (Time Average Maximum Velocity).
&DOFXODWLRQV
The following calculations can be made utilizing the measurements
listed above:
• Resistivity Index: The RI for all anatomical sites.
• Pulsatility Index: The PI for all anatomical sites.
• S/D ratio: The S/D ratio for all anatomical sites.
• D/S ratio: The D/S ratio for all anatomical sites.
• Diameter/area reduction: The diameter/area reduction percentage
of all anatomical sites, that contain measurements of outer and
inner diameters/areas.
• Acc: The acceleration velocity for all anatomical sites.
• AT: The acceleration time for all anatomical sites.
• HR: The heart rate.
• ICA/CCA ratio (only for Carotid application): The peak systolic
ICA/CCA ratio of both left and right sides.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
&DURWLG$UWHU\(YDOXDWLRQ
This section describes the anatomical sites from which carotid artery
function can be evaluated, and the measurements that can be taken by
the user.
%DVLF&DURWLG$UWHU\(YDOXDWLRQ
The function of the carotid artery can be evaluated by taking
measurements at the anatomical sites listed below.
Anatomical Sites
• Common Carotid Artery (CCA)
• Internal Carotid Artery (ICA)
• External Carotid Artery (ECA)
Note: Both right and left sides should be evaluated.
([WHQGHG&DURWLG$UWHU\(YDOXDWLRQ
An extended evaluation of carotid artery function can be performed by
measuring at the anatomical sites listed below.
Anatomical Sites
• Proximal CCA
• Mid CCA
• Distal CCA
• Proximal ICA
• Mid ICA
• Distal ICA
• ECA
• Bulb
• Vertebral Artery
• Subclavian Artery

2300163-100 Rev. 0
:RUNVKHHW
In addition to the display of all previously mentioned measurements, the
calculation section in the worksheet will generate ratios of
measurements taken for both the left and right sides, for example,
Lt. CCA/Rt. CCA, Lt. ICA/Rt. ICA, and so on.
Setting the ICA/CCA Ratio

The ICA/CCA ratio can be calculated using the distal, middle or
proximal velocity measurements of the ICA and CCA vessels. In the
ICA/CCA worksheet page, the user can select which measurements
are used in the ratio calculations.
To set the ICA/CCA ratio:
1. Measure the peak systolic velocity, as described on page 7-13, at
all the required points.
Worksheet 2. Press Worksheet on the control panel.
Normal 3. Ensure that the Normal soft key LED is lit on the screen, indicating
that the basic worksheet is being displayed. If this LED is not lit,
press the Normal soft key.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to ICA/CCA in the clipboard area and press Select. The
ICA/CCA page is displayed, as shown on the next page.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
All the ICA and CCA measurements that have been taken and
assigned are displayed. Dropdown text boxes adjacent to the ICA
and CCA measurement areas indicate which of those
measurements, respectively, are being used in the ratio calculation.
Figure 7-7: ICA/CCA Worksheet Page
TRACKBALL 5. To set a different ICA measurement to be used in the ratio

calculation, TRACKBALL to the required option in the dropdown text
box adjacent to the ICA measurement area, then press Select. The
selected measurement is highlighted, and the ratio calculation
changes accordingly.
Select
TRACKBALL 6. To set a different CCA measurement to be used in the ratio

calculation, TRACKBALL to the required option in the dropdown text
box adjacent to the CCA measurement area, then press Select.
The selected measurement is highlighted, and the ratio calculation
changes accordingly.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
/RZHU([WUHPLWLHV$UWHULDO(YDOXDWLRQ
This section describes the anatomical sites from which lower extremity
artery function can be evaluated, and the measurements that can be
taken by the user.
/RZHU([WUHPLWLHV$UWHULDO(YDOXDWLRQ
The function of the arteries of the lower extremities can be evaluated by
taking measurements at the anatomical sites listed below.
Anatomical Sites (Right Side and Left Side)

• Aorta
• Left/Right Common Iliac Artery (CIA)
• Left/Right External Iliac Artery (EIA)
• Left/Right Common Femoral Artery (CFA)
• Left/Right Profunda Femoral Artery (PFA)
• Left/Right Superficial Femoral Artery (SFA)
• Left/Right Popliteal Artery (POP)
• Left/Right Posterior Tibial Artery (PTA)
• Left/Right Anterior Tibial Artery (ATA)
• Left/Right Peroneal Artery (PA)
• Left/Right Dorsalis Pedis Artery (DPA)
• Left/Right Graft

2300163-100 Rev. 0
8SSHU([WUHPLWLHV$UWHULDO(YDOXDWLRQ
This section describes the anatomical sites from which the function of
the arteries of the upper extremities can be evaluated, and the
measurements that can be taken by the user.
8SSHU([WUHPLWLHV$UWHULDO(YDOXDWLRQ
The function of the arteries of the upper extremities can be evaluated
by taking measurements at the anatomical sites listed below.
Anatomical Sites
Note: With the exception of the Innominate artery, all the anatomical sites listed
below apply to both the right and the left sides.
• Innominate Artery (Innom)

• Left/Right Palmar Arch (PA)
• Left/Right Subclavian Artery (SCA)
• Left/Right Axillary Artery (Axill)
• Left/Right Brachial Artery (BrA)
• Left/Right Radial Artery (RA)
• Left/Right Ulnar Artery (UA)
• Left/Right Graft

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$RUWR,OLDF$UWHULDO(YDOXDWLRQ
the abdominal arteries and veins can be evaluated, and the
measurements that can be taken by the user.
$RUWR,OLDF$UWHULDO(YDOXDWLRQ
The function of the abdominal arteries can be evaluated by taking
Arterial Anatomical Sites

• Aorta
• Celiac Trunk Artery (CA)
• Common Hepatic Artery (CHA)
• Superior Mesenteric Artery (SMA)
• Inferior Mesenteric Artery (IMA)
• Left/Right Renal Artery (RenalA)
• Left/Right Common Iliac Artery (Lt/Rt CIA)
• Gastroduodenal Artery (GDA)
• Left Gastric Artery (LGA)
• Left/Right Lumbar Artery (Lt/Rt Lumba)
• Proper Hepatic Artery (PHA)
• Splenic Artery (SplA)
Vein Anatomical Sites

• Inferior Vena Cava (IVC)
• Left Hepatic Vein (LHV)
• Left/Right Common Iliac Vein (CIV)
• Left/Right Portal Vein (PV)
• Left/Right Renal Vein (RV)
• Middle Hepatic Vein (MHV)
• Main Portal Vein (MPV)
• Right Hepatic Vein (RHV)
• Splenic Vein (SplV)
• Transjugular Intrahepatic Portosystemic Shunt diameter (TIPS)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
5HQDO(YDOXDWLRQ
the renal arteries can be evaluated, and the measurements that can be
taken by the user.
5HQDO(YDOXDWLRQ
The function of the renal arteries can be evaluated by taking
Anatomical Sites
• Aorta
• Left/Right Renal Artery (Lt/Rt RenalA)
• Left/Right Segmental Artery (Lt/Rt SegmA)
• Left/Right Interlobar Artery (Lt/Rt Interlobar)
• Left/Right Arcuate Artery (Lt/Rt Arcuate)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
7UDQVFUDQLDO(YDOXDWLRQ
the transcranial arteries can be evaluated, and the measurements that
can be taken by the user.
7UDQVFUDQLDO(YDOXDWLRQ
The function of the transcranial arteries can be evaluated by taking
Anatomical Sites
• Left/Right Internal Carotid Artery C1 (ICA C1)
• Left/Right Middle Cerebral Artery M1 (MCA M1)
• Left/Right Middle Cerebral Artery M2 (MCA M2)
• Left/Right Anterior Cerebral Artery (ACA)
• Anterior Communicating Artery (AcomA)
• Left/Right Posterior Cerebral Artery P1 (Lt/Rt PCA P1)
• Left/Right Posterior Cerebral Artery P2 (Lt/Rt PCA P2)
• Left/Right Posterior Communicating Artery (Lt/Rt PcomA)
• Left/Right Opthalmic Artery (Lt/Rt OA)
• Left/RIght Vertebral Artery (Lt/Rt Vert)
• Basilar Artery (BA)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
5HDOWLPH6SHFWUDO7UDFLQJDQG
0HDVXUHPHQW)XQFWLRQ
When the system is scanning and the spectrum is scrolling, a real-time
automatic measurement function can be enabled. This function
measures and displays the following information in real-time:
• Peak Trace is plotted on the Doppler Spectrum.
• The following parameters are displayed in the Real-time result
window in the upper-right corner of the screen:
• Heart Rate
• Pulsatility index
• Resistivity Index
• Peak Systolic Velocity
If the automatic peak trace is erratic, the software will disable the
display of any of the numeric results. The trace will continue to be
displayed as long as the function is enabled.
To activate real-time spectral tracing:
1. Perform a scan in one of the Doppler Modes.
Trackball 2. Press Trackball, and position the TRACKBALL over the spectrum.
TRACKBALL
Menu 3. Press Menu on the control panel. The following pop-up menu
options are displayed:
• Show
• Posit. (Positive)
• Negat. (Negative)
• Both

2300163-100 Rev. 0
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to Show and press Select to activate the function. A

checkmark is displayed next to the selected option. Press Select a
second time to disable the function.
Select
5. Select Positive, Negative or Both to make a real-time trace of

either the positive or negative portions of the spectrum, or both
parts of the spectrum.
Note: If the envelope tracing is not optimal, the accuracy of the tracing may
be adjusted by using Envelope Adjustment enabled by the Soft Menu
Rocker. Press the Soft Menu Rocker to access the menu. Using the
vertical arrows select Envelope Adjustment. Utilize the horizontal arrows for
adjustment of the envelope.
Important: The same functions also can be performed on frozen Doppler

or archived images. First retrieve the required image and then follow steps
2 through 5.

2300163-100 Rev. 0

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
&KDSWHU
6KDUHG6HUYLFHV
,QWURGXFWLRQ
This chapter describes the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit’s
optional packages, and includes the following sections:
• Operating Room (OR) Package, page 8-2, describes the features
of the OR Package, including Automatic Tissue Optimization (ATO)
and FlexiView, an advanced split-screen monitoring function.
• OB Package, page 8-12, describes the features of the
OB Package, which provides measurement and analysis tools for
fetal examinations.
• GYN Package, page 8-49, describes the features of the
GYN Package, which provides measurement and analysis tools for
gynecological examinations.
• Fetal Heart Evaluation, page 8-50, describes the fetal heart study
protocol, which provides measurement and analysis tools for fetal
heart examinations.
• Abdominal Evaluation, page 8-51, describes the abdominal
Evaluation Package, which provides measurement and analysis
tools for abdominal examinations.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
2SHUDWLQJ5RRP 25 3DFNDJH
The Operating Room (OR) Package provides unique functionality that
simplifies the use of the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound machine
in the demanding OR environment. This functionality includes
Automatic Tissue Optimization (ATO) and FlexiView, which are
described on the following pages.
$XWRPDWLF7LVVXH2SWLPL]DWLRQ
The ATO feature eliminates the need for the user to manually adjust
acquisition and display parameters, such as TGC and image
compression, in order to optimize 2D images.
When this feature is activated, the system sets acquisition and display
parameters by applying image-specific optimized compression,
dynamic range, axial and lateral TGC settings. While activated, the
ATO feature continuously adapts and corrects itself to maintain optimal
image quality under changing scanning conditions.
Notes:
• ATO is enabled in 2D or 2D and CFM modes only.
• ATO is currently accessible with the 3S probe only.
• While the ATO feature is active, the user can manually adjust all the
imaging controls, except for TGC and dynamic range. The TGC sliders are
disabled.
• ATO can be set and stored as part of a preset. This will automatically
activate the ATO feature when the preset is selected.
To activate the ATO function:

2D 1. Press 2D on the control panel and begin a scan in 2D-Mode.
ATO 2. Press the ATO soft key to highlight the corresponding soft key icon
on the screen. The system activates ATO and automatically
optimizes the image on the screen.
To disable or exit the ATO function:

ATO • Press the ATO soft key a second time to dim the corresponding soft
key icon on the screen. The system disables ATO and redisplays
the original image on the screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
)OH[L9LHZ
FlexiView is a special OR monitoring function, which enables
simultaneous viewing of synchronized live scan and stored reference
cineloops, along with a predetermined time incremental cineloop
storage capability, during a surgical procedure.
Important: FlexiView is accessible only from the dedicated OR presets (from

either the main application or from up to ten sub-applications), for the 5T and
6T probes. This function is not accessible with any other applications. (For
training purposes only, FlexiView is also accessible with the 3S probe.)
FlexiView provides the following features:

• Simultaneous quad (four window) screen display, enabling viewing
and comparison of synchronized live scan and stored cineloops
before, during and after cardiac surgical procedures (in 2D-Mode or
2D and CFM modes).
• Automatic cineloop storage at user-defined time intervals to avoid
interference during critical surgical procedures. Refer to the
Predefined Automatic Time-Triggered Cineloop Storage section, on
page 8-8.
• "Time from Start" stamp on both live scan and stored cineloops.
Refer to the "Time from Start" Stamp section, on page 8-9.
• Single view utilizing the full screen (no parameters are displayed on
the right side of the screen), with full measurements functions and
use of all modes, including M-Mode and Doppler Mode.
Note: The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit’s regular text annotation
capabilities are available, including a special dictionary for OR. For details, refer
to the Inserting Annotations section, on page 2-68.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
)OH[L9LHZ4XDG6FUHHQ
The FlexiView quad screen enables the user to view and monitor four
synchronized cineloops on the screen, in 2D-Mode or 2D and
CFM modes.
• The upper-right window displays the live image being scanned
(Quad 3).
• The two left windows (Quad 1 and Quad 2) display the reference
cineloops, as determined by the user. These cineloops are labelled
Ref. 1 and Ref. 2.
• When configured by the user, automatic time-triggered storage
occurs, and the most recently stored cineloop is displayed in the
lower-right window (Quad 4), below the live image.
Ref. 1
Quad 1: Reference 1 Quad 3: Live Scan
Ref. 2
Quad 2: Reference 2 Quad 4: Last Stored Loop

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
To activate the FlexiView quad screen display:

1. Select an OR preset in the Select Probe and Application screen.
The system enters 2D-Mode, and the soft key menu includes the LV
Monitoring soft key option.
Note: Use the Active Menu button on the control panel to toggle between
this displayed soft key menu and the regular 2D-Mode soft key menu.
LV Monitoring 2. Press the LV Monitoring soft key to enable Flexiview.

• The screen automatically changes to a quad screen display.
• Both 2D-Mode and CFM-Mode are enabled.
• The upper-right window displays the live image with a "Time
from Start” timer, as described on page 8-9.
• The other three windows are empty, and a new soft key menu is
displayed with the Ref. 1 and Ref. 2 soft keys.
Note: After the user-specified, configured time interval has passed, a cineloop
will be stored in the clipboard and will automatically be displayed in the
lower-right window, below the live image.
Figure 8-1: FlexiView Quad Screen

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
5HIHUHQFH %DVHOLQH &LQHORRSV

When in quad screen display, FlexiView configuration enables the user
to view and monitor two cineloops simultaneously for reference. The
reference cineloops are displayed to the left of the live image, with the
annotation Ref. 1 or Ref. 2 appearing on them.
At any time during scanning, the user can assign a cineloop to serve as
a reference image in the Ref. 1 window (upper-left) and/or the Ref. 2
window (lower-left). These two windows will remain empty until the user
assigns images to them.
Important: The reference cineloops are synchronized with the live image. The
heart rate in all four windows is normalized to that of the selected, active (yellow
framed) cineloop, even though the HR value on each of the quadrants is
different. While reviewing in Freeze Mode, the user can move the active frame
to a different quad window, to synchronize the cineloops and normalize the
heart rate to the newly selected cineloop.
Note: The user can replace the reference cineloops with other cineloops
selected from the clipboard at any time, as described below.
To assign reference cineloops during a scanning procedure:

Monitoring soft key options.
Ref. 1 3. Press the Ref. 1 soft key at any time to copy the cineloop to the
upper-left window where it will serve as a reference cineloop. This
cineloop will also be stored in the archive with its "Time from Start"
annotation and displayed on the clipboard.
Ref. 2 4. Press the Ref. 2 soft key at any time to copy the cineloop to the
lower-left window, where it will serve as the second reference
cineloop. This cineloop will also be stored in the archive with its
"Time from Start" annotation and displayed on the clipboard.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
To assign a stored cineloop as a reference cineloop:

Freeze 1. Press Freeze. The live scan is frozen.
Trackball 2. Press Trackball on the control panel. A cursor is displayed.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to the reference window in which the stored cineloop

from the clipboard is to be placed, and press Select. The window is
highlighted with a yellow frame.
Select
4. TRACKBALL to the desired image icon on the clipboard and press

Select. The selected cineloop from the clipboard will be placed in
the highlighted quad window, replacing the previously displayed
reference cineloop.
Freeze 5. Press Freeze a second time to unfreeze the live scan. The
upper-right window containing the live scan is automatically
highlighted by a yellow frame, and the user can continue working
with FlexiView and real-time viewing and monitoring.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
3UHGHILQHG$XWRPDWLF7LPH7ULJJHUHG&LQHORRS
6WRUDJH
FlexiView enables cineloops to be automatically stored to the clipboard
during scanning according to a time schedule predefined by the user.
When the configured time interval has passed, the live image will be
automatically stored and displayed on the clipboard.
Note: Refer to the Archive Tab section, page 14-34, for detailed FlexiView
time-triggered storage configuration procedures.
When in quad screen display, the newly stored cineloop is also

automatically displayed in the lower-right window, below the live scan.
The cineloop most recently stored to the clipboard is always displayed
in the lower-right window.
The lower-right window will automatically update as each subsequent
cineloop is stored at the time interval. The cineloop from that window
will then be removed (although still displayed on the clipboard).
Important: The user can manually store a cineloop to this quad window at any
time, as described below. After an image is manually stored, the system
continues with the next automatic storage sequence according to the
predefined storage schedule.
To manually store an image during a procedure:

Store • Press Store on the control panel once if the Preview Cine Before
Store option is not configured for the system (refer to the Archive
Tab section, page 14-34, to configure this option),
OR
Store Press Store on the control panel twice if the Preview Cine Before
Store option is configured for the system.
The image is stored to the clipboard and displayed in the quad

window underneath the live scan.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
"Time from Start" Stamp

By activating FlexiView, the time that has passed since the scan began
("Time from Start") is displayed in the upper-left corner of the live
window. All cineloops stored in the archive will retain the "Time from
Start" stamp.
Figure 8-2: "Time From Start" Stamp
Notes:
• If the user freezes the scan, the displayed time value will freeze, but the
timer will continue to operate internally. Once the scan is unfrozen, the
time displayed will automatically adjust to the actual "Time from Start".
• The timer of the live scan can be reset at any time by the user, as

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
To reset the "Time from Start" timer:

TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the timer displayed in the upper-left corner of the live
image window.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to the Reset Time option in the pop-up menu and press
Select. The timer is reset to 00.00.00. The next automatically
stored loop will reflect the new "Time from Start".
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
)OH[L9LHZIRU6LQJOH6FUHHQ
A full single screen FlexiView option enables the user to view a full
screen, live scanned image in all modes and with all Vivid 3 Pro/
Vivid 3 Expert functions, including measurements. Automatic storage
of cineloops to the clipboard according to user configured, predefined
time intervals takes place, without interrupting the procedure.
To activate full single screen FlexiView:
Monitoring soft key options.

• The screen automatically changes to a quad screen display.
• Both 2D-Mode and CFM-Mode are enabled.
• The upper-right window displays the live image with a "Time
from Start" timer. (Refer to page 8-9 for further details regarding
the time stamp and automatic time-triggered storage.)
• The other three windows are empty, and a new soft key menu is
displayed, with the Ref. 1 and Ref. 2 soft keys.
Note: After the user-specified, configured time interval has passed, a

cineloop will be stored in the clipboard and will automatically be
displayed in the lower-right window, below the live image.
LV Monitoring 3. Press the LV Monitoring soft key again. The system will display the
live scan.
To re-enter quad FlexiView:
LV Monitoring • While in the single view FlexiView, press the LV Monitoring soft
key.
Note: Upon re-entry into the quad screen view, the previously assigned
reference image/s in Quad 1 and Quad 2 will be redisplayed.
To exit FlexiView:
• Select a preset other than OR in the Select Probe and Application
screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
2%3DFNDJH
This section describes OB measurement tools that are available with
the OB Measurement and Analysis Package, when any of the obstetric
or gynecological applications are selected.
Note: The OB applications are only available when the Convex C358 probe is
connected.
The following topics are included:

• Operating the OB Package, below, describes the basic
functionality of the OB Package.
• Measurement Tools, page 8-16, describes the various OB
measurement tools and their functions.
• Available Study Protocols, page 8-35, describes the OB
applications that are available for use on the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3
2SHUDWLQJWKH2%3DFNDJH
The general operation of the OB Package is similar to that of the
Cardiac Package. Refer to the functions described in Chapter 6,
Cardiac Measurement and Analysis, for detailed operating instructions.
The differences between the Cardiac Package and the OB Package are
as follows:
• The measurement tools.
• Different measurement unit results are generated.
• The anatomical parameters embedded in the database.
• A different Worksheet format is utilized.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
3DWLHQW'HWDLOV
When an OB application is selected, the Main Details page of the
Patient Details screen is modified to include information only relevant
for OB examinations and calculations. These additional fields include:
• LMP: (Estimated) Last Menstrual Period date, in mm/dd/yyyy
format or dd/mm/yyyy format, according to the option selected in
the System tab of the System Configuration window, as described
on page 14-11.
• EGA: Estimated Gestational Age, calculated according to the LMP
and displayed in ww/d format. The EGA field is left blank if the LMP
results in an EGA of more than 44 weeks.
Figure 8-3: Patient Details Screen/OB Main Details Page
Note: If the Application Type field in the Patient Details screen is not OB, due
to a different, prior procedure or application, TRACKBALL to OB in the
dropdown list and press Select.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
3HUIRUPLQJDQ2EVWHWULF(YDOXDWLRQ
The OB study protocols enable the user to measure various fetal
dimensions. Using predefined statistical charts and equations, fetal
growth parameters, Estimated Gestational Age (EGA), Estimated Fetal
Weight (EFW) and Estimated Delivery Date (EDD) are calculated.
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit calculates the EGA and
EDD according to the last menstrual period (LMP) date entered into the
Patient Details screen, as described on page 8-13, as well as according
to the average of each of the current ultrasound measurements.
To perform an obstetric evaluation:
1. Insert the Convex C358 probe into an available port.
Application screen is displayed.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to the appropriate OB application preset available for the

Convex C358 probe, and press Select. The scanning screen is
displayed.
Select
It is now possible to use either the Caliper (Measure, or Measure and

Assign methods) or Measure (Assign and Measure method) buttons to
perform measurements. All of the parameters and charts that have
been configured for the OB Package are available for both methods.
Measurements are accumulated in the database. These measurements
can be viewed and edited in a Worksheet (refer to page 8-42 for
Worksheet details); and displayed in the on-screen Mini-Report (refer to
page 8-15 for Mini-Report details).

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
8VLQJWKH2%0HDVXUHPHQW7RROV
The OB measurement tools can be applied in one of the following
ways:
• Measure: Measure a physical value without assigning it to a
predefined parameter.
• Measure and Assign: Measure a physical value and later assign
the value to a predefined parameter. The value for the selected
parameter is stored in the database for review or reporting at a later
time.
• Assign and Measure: Select a predefined parameter, and then
measure it. When the parameter is selected, a default tool is
automatically activated. This is a protocol-driven measurement
menu that enables parameters to be measured in a regular
sequence. The value is stored in the database for review or
2Q6FUHHQ2%0LQL5HSRUW
Each measurement made and assigned to a parameter using any of
the above methods will appear in a condensed on-screen Mini-Report
in the upper-right corner of the image, an example of which is shown
below:
Figure 8-4: OB Mini-Report
During scanning, this on-screen Mini-Report is not displayed.

The Mini-Report is redisplayed when the Caliper or Measure buttons
are pressed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
0HDVXUHPHQW7RROV
The following section provides a description of the different OB
measurement tools and their functions, and includes the following
topics:
• 2D Caliper, below.
• Ellipse Tool, page 8-19.
• Trace Tool, page 8-21.
• Heart Rate (HR) Measurement Tool, page 8-23.
• M Caliper Measurement Tool, page 8-25.
• PS & ED Tool, page 8-27.
• Velocity Tool, page 8-29.
• Automatic Trace Tool, page 8-30.
• Manual Trace Tool, page 8-33.
Note: The procedures below apply when the Measure and Assign
measurement protocol is being used. When using the Assign and Measure
measurement protocol, the correct measurement tool is automatically
activated.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
'&DOLSHU
This tool enables the user to measure the length of various fetal body
parameters and immediately obtain the EGA calculations for those
parameters on the screen.
Figure 8-5: Distance Measurement on a 2D Image

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
To take distance measurements in 2D-Mode:


2D Caliper 3. Press the 2D Caliper soft key, if it is not highlighted by default on

the screen.
to anchor the caliper. A second caliper is displayed on the screen.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to the measurement end point. The distance value is

Select 6. Press Select to anchor the caliper. A new caliper is displayed on

the image, ready for the next measurement.
8. Assign labels to the measurements, as described in the Assigning A

Note: Once the measurement is assigned, the parameter name and EGA will
immediately be displayed in the result table and in the on-screen OB
Mini-Report.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
(OOLSVH7RRO
This tool enables the user to measure the circumference of various fetal
body parameters and immediately obtain the EGA calculations for
those parameters on the screen.
To take circumference measurements in 2D-Mode using the Ellipse
tool:

Ellipse 3. Press the Ellipse soft key. The corresponding on-screen soft key
icon is highlighted.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the start point for the circumference measurement

and press Select to anchor the caliper. A circle is displayed, with a
second caliper located diametrically across from the anchored
caliper, along the major axis.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to adjust the major axis until an ellipse of the required
shape and size is obtained, then press Select to anchor the second
caliper. Third and fourth calipers are displayed along the minor axis,
enabling the user to further adjust the shape and size of the ellipse.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
TRACKBALL 6. To adjust the size of the ellipse, TRACKBALL to the appropriate

caliper and press Select to activate the caliper. Then TRACKBALL the
caliper to the required location and press Select to anchor the
position.
Select

Parameter Label After Measurement section, page 6-36.
Figure 8-6: Caliper Measurement
Note: Once the measurement is assigned, the parameter name and EGA will
immediately be displayed in the result table and in the on-screen OB
Mini-Report.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
7UDFH7RRO
This tool enables the user to manually trace and then measure the
circumference of various fetal body parameters and immediately obtain
the EGA calculations for those parameters on the screen.
To take circumference measurements in 2D-Mode:

Trace 3. Press the Trace soft key. The corresponding on-screen soft key
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the start point for the measurement of the object’s
area, and press Select to anchor the caliper.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL around the object’s perimeter.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services

point. The circumference, in millimeters, is displayed in the result
table.
Note: If required, TRACKBALL backwards to delete a section of the trace.

The section of the trace is deleted, enabling it to be corrected.
Figure 8-7: Trace Measurement

Note: Once the measurement is assigned, the parameter name and EGA
will immediately be displayed in the result table and in the on-screen OB
Mini-Report.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
+HDUW5DWH +5 0HDVXUHPHQW7RRO
The HR measurement tool enables the user to make a manual heart
rate measurement directly from a 2D-Mode, M-Mode or Doppler image.
To perform a heart rate measurement in 2D-Mode:
Freeze 1. Select an image to be measured and press Freeze, or retrieve a
cineloop from the archive.

HR 3. Press the HR soft key. The corresponding on-screen soft key icon is
highlighted.
Cine Scroll 4. Press the Cine Scroll/Run Cine soft key rotary, to activate and
highlight the corresponding on-screen Run Cine soft key icon.
Active Mode 5. Press Active Mode twice to display the Cine soft key menu.
First Marker 6. Use the First Marker and/or End Marker soft key rotaries to adjust
the markers and trim the running cineloop in order to view a single,
complete heart cycle loop. The heart rate is computed from the
location of the two markers and is displayed in the upper-left corner
of the screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services

checkmark next to the heart rate in the upper-left corner of the
screen, and press Select. The heart rate value is accepted, saved
and the measurement process is completed,
Select OR
To reject and cancel the measurement, TRACKBALL to the red "X"

next to the heart rate in the upper-left corner of the screen, and
press Select.
To perform a heart rate measurement in M-Mode or Doppler Mode:

Freeze 1. Select an image to be measured and press Freeze, or retrieve an
image from the archive containing an M-Mode scan or Doppler
spectrum.

HR 3. Press the HR soft key. The corresponding on-screen soft key icon is
highlighted. Two vertical bars are displayed over the M or Doppler
scroll.
First Marker 4. Use the First Marker and/or End Marker soft rotaries to position
the markers to mark a single, complete heart cycle. The heart rate
is computed from the location of the two marker bars and is
displayed in the upper-left corner of the screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services

checkmark next to the heart rate in the upper-left corner of the
screen, and press Select. The heart rate value is accepted, saved
and the measurement process is completed,
Select OR
To reject and cancel the measurement, TRACKBALL to the red "X"

next to the heart rate in the upper-left corner of the screen, and
press Select.
0&DOLSHU0HDVXUHPHQW7RRO
This tool enables the user to measure basic M-Mode measurements,
such as time, slope and depth, in order to assess basic fetal cardiac
functions.
Figure 8-8: M Caliper Measurements

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
To perform M Caliper measurements:


M Caliper 3. Press the M Caliper soft key. The corresponding on-screen soft key
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to the measurement end point. The current values are

required.


2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
36 ('7RRO
This tool enables the user to measure two velocity points on the
Doppler spectrum, and to take spectrum measurements of the
Resistivity Index (RI) and S/D Ratio.
To take spectrum measurements of the RI and S/D Ratio:

PS&ED 3. Press the PS&ED soft key. The corresponding on-screen soft key is
highlighted.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL the cursor to the peak systolic point of the spectrum and
screen.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL the second caliper to the end diastolic point on the
spectrum. The resulting values are displayed in the result table in

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services

Note: The order in which the two velocities are measured is not important
for PS, ED RI and S/D. The larger velocity will always be assigned to Vps
and the smaller velocity to Ved. The Acc and AT will be calculated only
when the smaller velocity is measured first.

• Vps - Peak systolic velocity
• Ved - End diastolic velocity
• Resistivity Index (RI) = (Vps-Ved)/Vps (calculation)
• S/D Ratio = Vps/Ved (calculation)
• AT - Acceleration Time
• Acc - Acceleration Velocity

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
9HORFLW\7RRO
This tool enables the user to measure the velocity of a single point on
the Doppler spectrum.
To measure velocity on the Doppler spectrum:

Velocity 3. Press the Velocity soft key if it is not highlighted by default on the
screen.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the point of measurement for the velocity on the

spectrum.
Select 5. To make another measurement, press Select to anchor the caliper.

The velocity measurement value is displayed in the result table, and
a second caliper is displayed on the screen.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for any additional measurements.

Parameter Label After Measurement section,on page 6-36.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
$XWRPDWLF7UDFH7RRO
This tool enables the user to automatically trace a Doppler signal
envelope, and measure the Pulsatility Index (PI) and Resistivity Index
(RI).
To perform an automatic spectrum trace to measure the PI & RI:

Auto Trace 3. Press the Auto Trace/Man Trace soft key once so that
Auto Trace is highlighted on the screen.
the baseline:

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services

the heart cycle.
TRACKBALL 6. To correct the measurement, any one of the two vertical borders or
or border and press Select twice.
Select


Adj
Note: If more than one trace is displayed on the spectrum, only the
active trace (highlighted in green) will be realigned by Envelope Adj.
7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to make additional measurements.


2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services

trace
Velocity)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
0DQXDO7UDFH7RRO
This tool enables the user to manually trace a Doppler signal envelope,
and measure the Pulsatility Index (PI) and Resistivity Index (RI).
To take a manual spectrum trace to measure the PI & RI:

Man Trace 3. Press the Auto Trace/Man Trace soft key twice so that
Man Trace is highlighted.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the start point of the spectrum trace (usually the end
diastolic point). Start on the left and trace to the right.
Select 5. Press Select to anchor the caliper. A second caliper is displayed on

screen.
TRACKBALL 6. Use the TRACKBALL to trace the peak envelope of the spectrum. A
marker will be positioned at the maximum peak of the envelope.
Continue to the end diastolic point on the spectrum. The resulting
values are displayed in the result table in the upper left of the
screen.


2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
Note: If required, TRACKBALL backwards to delete a section of the trace. The

section of the trace is deleted, enabling it to be corrected.

trace
Velocity)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
for use with the OB Package on the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit. Each of the study protocols, when selected, displays a
list of parameters. The user can configure a study by setting the order
of the parameters and selecting only the parameters required, once the
probe and the OB application type have been selected. Refer to the
MA Options Tab section, page 14-24, for details on configuring
parameters.

information.

• Early Gestation, page 8-36.
• Fetal Growth, page 8-36.
• Fetal Growth - Extended, page 8-37.
• AFI (Amniotic Fluid Index) Study, page 8-37.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
(DUO\*HVWDWLRQ
This section describes the predefined parameters that can be
measured when the Early Gestation protocol is selected.
Predefined Parameters
• Crown-Rump Length (CRL)
• Gestational Sac (GS)
• Yolk Sac (YS)
)HWDO*URZWK
measured when the Fetal Growth protocol is selected.
• Biparietal Diameter (BPD)
• Occipital Frontal Distance (OFD)
• Head Circumference (HC)
• Abdominal Circumference (AC)
• Antero-Postero Abdominal Diameter (APD)
• Transverse Abdominal Diameter (TAD)
• Femur Length (FL)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
)HWDO*URZWK([WHQGHG
measured when the Fetal Growth - Extended protocol is selected.
• Biparietal Diameter (BPD)
• Occipital Frontal Distance (OFD)
• Head Circumference (HC)
• Binocular Diameter (BD)
• Abdominal Circumference (AC)
• Anterio-posterior Abdominal Diameter (APD)
• Transverse Abdominal Diameter (TAD)
• Femur Length (FL)
• Tibia Length (TL)
• Humerus Length (HL)
• Ulna Length (UL)
• Foot Length (Ft)
• Transcerebellar Diameter (TCD)
$), $PQLRWLF)OXLG,QGH[ 6WXG\

measured when the AFI protocol is selected.
• AFI 1
• AFI 2
• AFI 3
• AFI 4

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
0HDVXUHPHQWV
The measurements that can be made in an OB study are listed in the
table below. The measurements are used by the system to calculate
the EGA of the fetus, according to preselected growth charts. The
growth charts that can be selected are displayed alongside each
measurement in the table.
When a specific parameter is measured, the result is displayed in the
results table in the upper-left corner of the scanning screen. The EGA is
calculated according to the growth chart selected for that parameter,
and is displayed below each measurement. A summary of the
measurements is displayed in the Worksheet, as discussed in the
Worksheet section, on page 8-42.
Predefined Parameter Growth Charts
Crown Rump Length (CRL) • ASUM • Osaka

• Campbell • Paris
• Hadlock • Rempen
• Hansmann • Robinson
• Jeanty • Tokyo
• Nelson • Tokyo Shinozuka
Biparietal Diameter (BPD) • ASUM • Merz

• Campbell • Osaka
• Hadlock • Paris
• Hansmann • Rempen
• Jeanty • Sostoa
• Kurtz • Tokyo
• Tokyo Shinozuka
Head Circumference (HC) • Hadlock • Jeanty

• Hansmann • Merz
• Sostoa
Occipital Frontal Diameter • Hansmann • Sostoa

(OFD)
Gestational Sac Diameter • Hansmann • Rempen

(GS) • Hellman • Tokyo
Tibia Length (TL) • Jeanty
Humerus Length (HL) • Osaka

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
Predefined Parameter Growth Charts
Ulna Length (UL) • Jeanty
Femur Length (FL) • Campbell • Merz

• Hadlock • Osaka
• Hansmann • Paris
• Hohler • Sostoa
• Jeanty • Tokyo
• Tokyo Shinozuka
Abdominal Circumference • ASUM • Jeanty

(AC) • Hadlock • Merz
• Hansmann • Sostoa
• Tokyo Shinozuka
Binocular Diameter (BD) • Berkowitz • Jeanty

• Campbell • Sostoa
Foot Length (Ft) • Mercer • Paris
Fetal Trunk Area (FTA) • Osaka

Lateral Venticular (LV) • Tokyo
Transcerebellar Diameter • Hill

(TCD)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
&DOFXODWLRQV
The following fetal parameters can be calculated based on the
measurements listed in the previous section. These calculations are
displayed in the Worksheet:
• Estimated Gestational Age (EGA)
The EGA is calculated automatically for each assigned
measurement, according to the growth chart configured for that
parameter. Two standard deviation values of fetal age are also
provided if they are available in the chart.
EGA by Ultrasound (ULS) is an average of all the EGA estimations
by the various parameters, based on growth charts. EGA (ULS) is
displayed in the Worksheet and alongside it, EDD by ULS is
displayed.
In addition, the EGA and EDD, calculated by LMP, is displayed for
comparison purposes.
• Estimated Fetal Weight (EFW)
The EFW is calculated automatically for a variety of assigned
measurements, according to formulas embedded in the system.
The formulas include:
• EFW by BPD/AC parameters by Sheppard.
• FL/AC parameters by Hadlock.
• HC/AC/FL parameters by Hadlock.
• BPD/HC/AC/FL parameters by Hadlock.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
• Amniotic Fluid Index (AFI)

The AFI is calculated as the sum of the (usually vertical) distances
of the largest amniotic fluid pocket in each quadrant of the uterus.
In order to calculate the AFI, four independent distance
measurements must be made in four different images. The distance
measurements must be assigned to the AFI 1, AFI 2, AFI 3 and
AFI 4 parameters respectively.
The following common ratio calculations, together with their normal
ranges are displayed:
• FL/AC
• FL/HC
• HC/AC
• CI
• FL/BPD

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
:RUNVKHHW
The Worksheet provides an accumulated overview of the
measurements that have been completed, and enables the user to
view, edit or delete measurements and values.
Worksheets can be printed using the hard copy printer or recorded on
VCR.
To access a Worksheet:
Worksheet • Press Worksheet on the control panel. The Worksheet screen is
Figure 8-9: OB Worksheet Screen

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
• The main area of the screen displays the Parameter(s) measured.

To the right of each parameter up to three measurements (m1, m2,
m3) are displayed.
• The Method column displays the calculation method used to
generate the measurement. For explanations and details regarding
the calculation method types, refer to the procedure on page 8-44.
• The Value unit column displays the value of the measurement,
calculated according to the method type.
• The EGA, calculated according to the specific chart chosen and
measurements taken, is displayed under EGA.
• On the right side of the Worksheet, the Chart column lists the
author of the specific OB table used to calculated the EGA. The
user can choose a different chart/author and the EGA will be
recalculated accordingly. For explanations and details regarding
the chart used to calculate the EGA, refer to the procedure on
page 8-45.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
$GMXVWLQJWKH0HWKRGE\:KLFKD&DOFXODWLRQ
LV0DGH
The user can change the method by which a specific calculation is
made, at any time.
To adjust the method by which a calculation is made:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the relevant cell in the Method column and press
Select. A pop-up menu is displayed, showing the available
calculation options. A checkmark indicates the currently selected
method, as shown below:
Select
Figure 8-10: Calculation Method Pop-Up Menu
The following options are available:

• Min: The minimum measurement.
• Max: The maximum measurement.
• Last: The last measurement that was taken.
• Aver: The average of the measurements taken.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the required option and press Select. The values are
recalculated, according to the selected method, and the new
method type is displayed in the Method column.
Select
Note: The selection of the chart will be retained by the system until manually
changed by the user.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
$GMXVWLQJWKH&KDUWE\:KLFKD&DOFXODWLRQLV
0DGH
The user can change the chart used to calculate the EGA, at any time.
To adjust the chart by which a calculation is made:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the relevant cell in the Chart column and press
Select. A pop-up menu is displayed, showing the available table/
author options. A checkmark indicates the currently selected chart,
as shown below:
Select
Figure 8-11: Chart Pop-Up Menu
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the required chart/author and press Select. The

values are recalculated, according to the selected chart, and the
new chart and author are displayed in the Chart column.
Select
Note: The selected chart will remain in the system until it is manually changed
by the user.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
,QFOXGLQJRU([FOXGLQJ9DOXHVLQD
&DOFXODWLRQ
Values can be marked for inclusion/exclusion in a calculation. This
means that when more than one measurement has been made for a
single parameter, that value either will or will not be included when a
calculation is made.
To mark a value for inclusion/exclusion in a calculation:
TRACKBALL • TRACKBALL to the measurement that is to be included/excluded from
the calculation, and press Select to toggle the value to be included
or excluded.
Select
Note: An excluded measurement changes color to signify that its value has
not been included in the calculation. The value in the Value field is adjusted
accordingly.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
0DQXDOO\&KDQJLQJD9DOXH
Individual values can be manually changed using the alphanumeric
keyboard.
To manually change a value:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the value that is to be changed and press Select.
Select
Keyboard 2. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter the required value. An

7 asterisk indicates that the value has been manually altered.
Select 3. Press Select again to continue the procedure.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
5HVWRULQJ$XWRPDWLF&DOFXODWLRQ
The automatic calculation option can be reactivated after values have
been manually changed.
To restore automatic calculation:
TRACKBALL • TRACKBALL to the asterisk, which indicates a value in the Worksheet
that has been manually changed, and press Select. The manually
entered value is replaced by an automatically calculated value.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
*<13DFNDJH
The GYN Package enable the user to measure various ovarian and
uterine dimensions. The endometrium thickness and the Resistivity
Index (RI) for the ovarian and uterine vessels can be calculated.
for use with the GYN Package on the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit. Each of the study protocols, when selected, displays a
list of parameters. The user can configure a study by setting the order
of the parameters and selecting only the parameters required, once the
probe and the GYN application type have been selected. Refer to the
MA Options Tab section, page 14-24, for details on configuring
parameters.

information.

• Ovarian Measurements, below.
• Uterine Measurements, page 8-50.
2YDULDQ0HDVXUHPHQWV
This section describes the predefined parameters and measurements
that can be evaluated when the Ovarian protocol is selected.
• Left/Right Ovary Length
• Left/Right Ovary Height
• Left/Right Ovary Width
• Left/Right Ovarian Artery Vs/Vd (Systolic/Diastolic Velocities)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
8WHULQH0HDVXUHPHQWV
This section describes the anatomical parameters that can be
measured when the Uterine protocol is selected.
• Uterus Length
• Uterus Height
• Uterus Width
• Endometrium Thickness
• Uterus Artery Vs & Vd (Systolic/Diastolic Velocities)
&DOFXODWLRQV
The following calculations can be made based on the measurements
listed in the previous sections. These calculations are displayed in the
Worksheet:
• Left Ovary RI
• Right Ovary RI
• Uterus RI
)HWDO+HDUW(YDOXDWLRQ
The Fetal Heart Package enables the user to measure and calculate
fetal heart parameters using the standard cardiac measurement and
analysis tools, measurements and working procedures.
Note: Refer to Chapter 6, Cardiac Measurement and Analysis for details.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
$EGRPLQDO(YDOXDWLRQ
The Abdominal Package enables the user to perform various
abdominal organ parameters.
for use when the Abdominal Package is installed on the Vivid 3 Pro/
Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit. Each of the study protocols, when
selected, displays a list of parameters. The user can configure a study
by setting the order of the parameters and selecting only the
parameters that are required. Refer to the MA Options section,
page 14-24, for details on configuring study parameters.

information.

• Organ Dimension Measurements, page 8-52.
• Bladder Volume Measurements, page 8-52.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Shared Services
2UJDQ'LPHQVLRQ0HDVXUHPHQWV
This section describes the abdominal sites and the organ dimensions
and measurements that can be evaluated.
All these measurements are 2D distance measurements.
• Liver Dist. 1 (Liver Dist. 1)

• Left/Right Kidney Length (Lt/Rt Kidney L)
• Left/Right Kidney Width (Lt/Rt Kidney W)
• Left/Right Kidney Anterior Posterior (Lt/Rt Kidney AP)
• Pancr. Head (Pancr. Head)
• Pancr. Tail (Pancr. Tail)
• Pancr. Body (Pancr. Body)
• Common Bill Duct 1 (CBD1)
• Common Bill Duct 2 (CBD2)
• Spleen Length (Spleen L)
• Spleen Width (Spleen W)
• Spleen Anterior Posterior (Spleen AP)
• Gall Bladder Length (GBladder L)
• Gall Bladder Width (GBladder W)
• Gall Bladder Anterior Posterior (GBladder AP)
%ODGGHU9ROXPH0HDVXUHPHQWV
This section describes the abdominal sites and measurements from
which the bladder volume can be evaluated.
Anatomical Sites
• Bladder Length (Bladder L)
• Bladder W (Bladder W)
• Bladder AP (Bladder AP)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
&KDSWHU
5HSRUWLQJ
,QWURGXFWLRQ
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert system enables the generation of
patient reports that summarize the data obtained during an
examination, as described in the following sections:
• Creating Reports, page 9-2, describes the procedures for
generating reports that can include data, images and cineloops.
• Retrieving Saved Reports and Generating New Reports,
page 9-10, describes the procedures for viewing saved reports, as
well as procedures for creating a new report based on a retrieved
report.
• Saving Reports in PDF and/or CHM Format, page 9-13,
describes the procedures for saving reports in PDF or CHM format
for export purposes.
• Soft Key Functions, page 9-15, describes the functions of the
various soft keys that are active when working with reports.
Reports can only be saved in the archive database if the Archive option
is installed. New reports can be generated from old examinations that
have been stored in the archive. Reports can be printed using the
printer attached to the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
&UHDWLQJ5HSRUWV
Reports are based on the examination performed and the analyses that
were made during the examination, and summarize data obtained in
the examination. Each report can contain data, images and cineloops.
During generation, the report can be viewed, images can be added and
the patient’s personal data can be modified, as described in the
following sections.
• Generating Reports, page 9-3.
• Editing Reports, page 9-4.
• Including Images in Reports, page 9-8.
• Printing Reports, page 9-9.
The examination data itself cannot be changed.
Note: Use the Worksheet to review and adjust data before generating a report,
as described in the Worksheet section, page 6-48.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
*HQHUDWLQJ5HSRUWV
Reports are generated using the data that is stored in the system,
according to system templates.
To generate a report:
Report • Press Report on the control panel. A report reflecting the default
template layout (or last report template selected) is automatically
generated and displayed on the screen, as shown below:
Figure 9-1: Generated Report (Example)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
(GLWLQJ5HSRUWV
The report template used for a report that has been generated, as well
as data in the report, can be modified as necessary before the report is
saved.
Important:
• Reports can only be saved if the Archive option is installed

• Saved reports are read-only. Therefore, carefully review the data before
the report is created. If modifications are required, measurements may
need to be retaken or further examinations made in order to obtain
accurate data before the report is regenerated.
To edit a report:
Report 1. Press Report on the control panel. A report reflecting the default
generated and displayed on the screen, as shown in Figure 9-1.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the report on the screen and press Menu on the
control panel. The list of alternative report templates is displayed on
the clipboard (on the left side of the screen), as shown below:
Menu
Figure 9-2: Alternate Report Templates Menu

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
Notes:
• An asterisk is displayed to the left of the presently selected and displayed
template, as shown in Figure 9-2.
• Each report template will have a prefix of either Users or Factory. User
templates may be created by GE specialists, as described in the Modifying
Factory-defined Presets section, page 14-4.
• The templates displayed in the clipboard are the templates available for
the specific combination of probe and application preset, for example,
Cardiac. The user can choose an alternative report template configured for
another application, such as Abdominal or OB, by using the TRACKBALL to
highlight the required application. When an application is selected, the
available templates are displayed to the right, as shown below:
Figure 9-3: Expanded Alternative Reports Menu
• For details about configuring the alternative report templates, refer to the
Stress Tab and Report Tab sections, page 14-38 and page 14-42
respectively.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to an alternative template, if required, and press Select
to highlight the template. The system regenerates the report and
displays the newly chosen template layout on the screen.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
4. The report headings, such as Name, ID, Birth Date, Indications

and Comments are highlighted in green. These fields are
hot-linked to the original page from which the data was taken. Use
the hot-linked report headings to edit and change data, as follows:
TRACKBALL • When the cursor points to a heading that is hot-linked, the
cursor turns into a hand. TRACKBALL to such a heading and
press Select. The original location of the data is displayed,
enabling editing, if required.
Select
• Once a heading has been selected for editing, the specific soft
keys will be displayed permitting all necessary actions.
OK • Press the OK or Cancel soft key to return to the report after

editing is complete.
5. If required, select and insert images, as described on page 9-8.
Save 6. Press the Save soft key. A pop-up dialog box is displayed, as
shown below:
Figure 9-4: Report Name Entry Dialog Box
Keyboard 7. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter a name for the new report
7 in the dialog box.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
TRACKBALL
8. TRACKBALL to OK and press Select to save the report. The saved
report remains displayed on the screen. The report is saved to the
database defined in the selected dataflow, as described in
Chapter 11, Connectivity.
Note: The newly saved report will be added to the list of Archived Reports
Select (if the Archive option is installed). This report and others saved can be
retrieved and displayed by pressing the Archived Reports soft key, as
described in the Retrieving Saved Reports and Creating New Reports
section, page 9-10.
Report 9. Press Report on the control panel to exit the report and return to
the current patient’s scanning screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
,QFOXGLQJ,PDJHVLQ5HSRUWV
For each application, there are report template layouts which permit the
inclusion of images. Among these selections are
• A four-image template layout, which provides space for four
images. Patient information, such as Patient Name, ID, Birth Date,
Blood Pressure, Age or Examination Date, is displayed in the
upper portion of the report, and the date that the report was
generated is displayed on the last line of the page.
• A six-image template layout, which provides a full page of six
images. The title of the report includes only the Patient Name
and/or ID. The date that the report was generated is displayed on
the last line of the page.
• A ten-image template layout, which combines the four and
six-image layouts. It is a two-page report, with the first page
displayed using the four-image layout, and the second page
displaying the six-image layout.
To add to or replace images in a report:
Report 1. Press Report on the control panel. A report reflecting the default
generated and displayed on the screen, as shown in Figure 9-1.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the report on the screen and press Menu on the
control panel. The list of alternative report templates is displayed on
the clipboard, as shown in Figure 9-2.
Menu
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to an alternative template layout that includes image

fields and press Select to highlight the template. The system
regenerates the report and displays the selected template layout on
the screen, with empty areas for images.
Select
4. TRACKBALL to the required image in the clipboard and press Select.

A yellow frame indicates that the image has been selected.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
Select 5. Simultaneously press Select and TRACKBALL the yellow framed

image to the required image location in the report template layout.
While dragging, the cursor will appear as . When the cursor
TRACKBALL reaches an image location in the layout, it will appear as + .
When the Select button is released, the image is placed and

displayed in the selected location.
Note: If the image location is not empty, the newly placed image will replace
the previously displayed image in that location.
Important: The user must save the report in order to be able to view the
report at a later time with the images as placed. Once a report is saved, no
data or images can be added to the same report. A new report must be
created. If the user presses Report on the control panel, thereby exiting the
Report function without saving the newly generated/edited report, the
images previously positioned in the template are not saved. If the user re-
enters the Report function by pressing Report on the control panel again,
although the report data will still appear, the images will not be displayed.
The user will have to add the images to the report a second time.
To scroll through a multi-page report:

Scroll • Use the Scroll soft key rotary to scroll through the various pages of
the report.
3ULQWLQJ5HSRUWV
The final report can be printed using any of the printers attached to the
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit. For details on the available
printers, refer to Chapter 12, Peripherals.
Note: The report is printed only to an externally connected printer.
To print a report:
PC Print • Press the PC Print soft key.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
5HWULHYLQJ6DYHG5HSRUWVDQG&UHDWLQJ
1HZ5HSRUWV
Saved reports are read-only. Therefore, carefully review the data
before the report is created. If modifications are required,
measurements may need to be retaken or further examinations made
in order to obtain accurate data and regenerate the report.
A saved report can be used as a framework from which to create a new
report. On the new report, the user can edit the data (not including the
measurements), add images, and change the report template layout.
To retrieve and view an archived report:
Archive 1. Press Archive on the control panel. The list of archived patient
records is displayed, along with the relevant soft keys for any
required actions.
Select 2. Use the Select Patient soft key rotary to scroll through the list and
Patient
highlight the required patient.
Report 3. Press Report on the control panel. By default, a new report, based
on archived data, is automatically generated, as shown in
Figure 9-1.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
Archived 4. Press the Archived Reports soft key. A list of saved report names
Reports
and examination dates for the selected patient is displayed on the
clipboard, as shown below:
Figure 9-5: Archived Reports List
Select 5. Use the Select Report soft key rotary to select the required report.
Patient
The report is displayed on the screen. Use the Scroll soft key rotary
to scroll through multi-page reports.
Report 6. Press Report on the control panel to exit and return to the scanning
screen for the current patient.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
To edit an archived report and save it as a new report:

1. Follow steps 1 through 5 in the previous procedure for viewing an
archived report.
Create New 2. Press the Create New Report soft key. A newly generated report is
Report
displayed, based on the retrieved archived report.
3. Follow the procedures found in the Creating New Reports section,

beginning on page 9-2.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
6DYLQJ5HSRUWVLQ3')DQGRU&+0
)RUPDW
The user has the option of saving a report in PDF or CHM (Compiled
HTML) format for exporting purposes. The report is saved to a location
selected by the user, for example to a Floppy, Compact or MO disk, or a
Network location.
To save a file in PDF (or CHM) format:
Save As 1. After creating and editing the report, press the Save as soft key
rotary. A Save As dialog box is displayed.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the location where the file is to be saved from the
Save as dropdown list, and press Select.
Select 3. TRACKBALL to the format in which the file is to be saved from the
Save as type dropdown list, and press Select.
Keyboard 4. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to type in the file name in the File
7 Name field.
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to the on-screen Save button and press Select. The
report will be saved in the selected format.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
To retrieve and view a file saved in PDF (or CHM) format:

Freeze 1. Press Freeze.
Note: Do not enter the Report function.
TRACKBALL 2. Press the Trackball button on the control panel until Pointer is
highlighted. The arrow cursor will be displayed on the screen.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL the cursor to the image and press Menu on the control
panel. A pop-up menu is displayed.
Menu
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to Explore and press Select to highlight this option. The
Explorer window is displayed.
5. TRACKBALL to the location of the PDF or CHM file in the dropdown

Select list and press Select twice on the file name.
6. Close the Explorer window. The selected file is displayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
6RIW.H\)XQFWLRQV
The following soft key menu is displayed beneath the Patient List
screen.
Soft Key Description
Archived Reports
Displays a list of archived report names on the
clipboard, together with examination dates for a
selected patient.
Cancel
Ignores all changes.
Create New
Displays a newly generated report, to enable
Report editing and/or saving.
Delete
Enables deletion of a selected item, for
example, an examination or report.
Edit
Displays archived data to enable editing.
(Archive soft key)
Displays the list of previous examinations for the

Exam List
selected patient in the Patient Exam List screen.
Images relating to the selected examination are
displayed on the clipboard. (Archive soft key)
OK
Saves all changes. Exits the Archiving function
and redisplays the scanning screen.
Patients List
Redisplays the Patients List screen, including all
the archived patient records in the database.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
PC Print
Prints the report.
Save
Saves the report to the database.
Save as Enables saving of reports in PDF and or CHM

formats.
Scroll Enables scrolling through multi-page reports.
Search Patient Displays the Patients List screen, including all

the archived patient records in the database.
(Archive soft key).
The information includes:
• Last (name)
• First (name)
• ID (number)
• Updated (date of last examination)
• IM (number of images stored)
• SE (number of Stress exams stored)
Select Field Enables moving between the fields in the

Patients List so that characters can be entered
to define a patient search. (Archive soft key)
Select Page Enables scrolling between the four-page patient

information screens (Main, Demographic, Exam
Details and Medical Comments). (Archive soft
key)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting
Select Patient/s Enables scrolling through the Patients List by

rotating the corresponding soft key rotary on the
control panel, to select patient records. (Archive
soft key)
Select Report Enables scrolling through the list of saved

reports that are listed on the clipboard.
Utilities
Displays the data inventory, including the
number of patients, examinations and images
stored in the database, together with the volume
of free database space. It also displays
Personnel List and Backup. (Archive soft key)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Reporting

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Patient Management and Archiving
&KDSWHU
3DWLHQW0DQDJHPHQWDQG
$UFKLYLQJ
,QWURGXFWLRQ
During an examination, the user stores data, images and cineloops for
immediate purposes. The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit
can include an integrated patient archiving system for long-term data
and image storage.
This chapter describes the archiving and backup options in the

following sections:
• Archiving Package, page 10-2, introduces the archiving package.

• Adding or Locating Patient Records, page 10-5, describes how
to add a new patient record to the archive or select an existing
patient record.
• Archiving and Storing Images and Cineloops, page 10-5,
describes how to store images and cineloops to the Vivid 3 Pro/
Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit’s archive.
• Viewing Stored Images and Cineloops, page 10-20, describes
how to view images or cineloops stored in the archive.
• Retrieving and Editing Archived Information, page 10-22,
describes how to review, edit and delete information in the archive.
• Additional Archived Information and Data, page 10-37,
describes additional data that is stored in the archive.
• Backup Procedures, page 10-38, describes the various backup
procedures for the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit.
• Disk Formatting and Labeling Procedures, page 10-53,
describes the various MO and CD-R disk formatting and labeling
procedures.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$UFKLYLQJ3DFNDJH RSWLRQ
The Archiving package enables the user to permanently store images
and cineloops, as well as patient measurements and reports. The
images and cineloops can later be retrieved for review and comparison,
and measurements and reports can be retrieved for editing,
re-annotation and analysis.
Important: Without the Archiving package, the data is only stored for the
duration of the current examination.
Basic patient data is automatically archived in the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3

Expert ultrasound unit for every new patient. If the archiving package is
installed, the entry of an ID and/or a new patient name and other basic
information is registered in the archive, and is available for retrieval.
During an examination, the system stores all patient information,
including personal details, measurements, reports, images and
cineloops to the archive.
Note: If a unique patient ID number is re-entered, the system will prompt the
user to confirm that the new examination is for the same patient for whom the
ID number was previously registered.
Important: Image Export: Image export to external media is a function that is

independent of the archiving package option and is integral to the basic Vivid 3
Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit. Any image data stored in the system can be
exported to external media at any time.
/RFDODQG5HPRWH$UFKLYLQJ
Patient information can be stored locally on each Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3
Expert ultrasound unit, in which case the information is available only
on that unit. Patient information can also be stored in a remote network
archive, in which case all the units connected to the network can
access the archived information.
A file-lock mechanism informs the user if the archived patient

information is currently in use.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
'DWDEDVH0DQDJHPHQW
The user can track the status of the local archive database via the
General Status screen, shown below:
Figure 10-1: General Status Screen
Label Description
Backed Up (Saved Data) After a backup has been performed, the

amount of space on the database that has
been backed up.
Not Backed Up The amount of space on the database that

had been stored and has not yet been
backed up. When the user begins to save
images to the Archive, the pie in the
General Status Screen will reflect the
space usage in a counter-clockwise
movement.
Available (Empty Archive) The amount of space on the database that
is available for storage. When the archive is
empty, 16 GByte (15,974 MByte) of disk
space is available.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
• 13 GB: Under normal, steady workflow, the occupied space of the

disk will oscillate around 13 GB.
• No Back Up Performed / Only 2 GB available space left: If Backup

is not performed, the occupied space will increase in size. The
system will begin to issue a reminder message with each Patient ID
entry. These messages will constantly remind the user to perform
Backup. If the user decides not to backup and simply answers OK,
the user may continue with the exam and may even save images
and loops without further interruption. For a detailed description of
the Backup process, refer to page 10-43.
• No Backup Performed / Only 1 GB available space left: Having

used up almost all the allocated disk space, the user will be
prompted to backup, however, now, the system will not permit any
saving of images or reports. These messages will be displayed
each time the Patient ID or Store buttons are pressed. For a
detailed description of the Backup process, refer to page 10-43.
• No Backup Performed / Only 1/2 GB available space left: The user

will be constantly prompted to backup. No new patient records can
be created. The system will not permit any saving of images or
reports. The user must perform a Back Up, which will allow the
system to perform an automatic purge. For a detailed description of
the Backup process, refer to page 10-43.
• Automatic Purge/Backup Performed: When the occupied space on

the disk increases slightly above 13 GB, it exceeds the internal
purge marker. If a Backup has been performed, at this point the
system will automatically purge (delete) some of the oldest
backed-up exams. For a detailed description of the Backup
process, refer to page 10-43.
Important: Only after some data is backed up will the system begin the
automatic purging process and free up space to again allow storage of
images and reports.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$GGLQJRU/RFDWLQJ3DWLHQW5HFRUGV
This section describes how to add a new patient record to the archive,
and how to select an existing patient record, including the use of filter
and sort functions, in the following sections:
• Adding a Patient Record, page 10-5.

• Beginning an Examination on an Archived Patient, page 10-6.
• Sorting Data, page 10-11.
• Searching with Field Filters, page 10-12.
Important: Patient records can be added to the local archive, as well as to the
remote archive, on condition that the remote archive supports alphanumeric
data. As DICOM does not support alphanumeric data, patient records cannot
be added to a remote DICOM archive.
$GGLQJD3DWLHQW5HFRUG
The first time a patient is examined using the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3
Expert ultrasound unit, patient details such as the patient’s name, age
and unique ID number can be entered. These details are stored in the
patient archive, along with details of the examination, and can be
retrieved and edited at any time.
To add a new patient to the archive:

• Refer to the Beginning an Examination section, page 2-49.
Note: When the Begin Exam soft key is pressed after entering patient details
and information, the new patient is automatically registered and archived if the
archiving package is installed. Images and cineloops can then be saved to the
archive as part of the patient’s archived data.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
%HJLQQLQJDQ([DPLQDWLRQRQDQ$UFKLYHG3DWLHQW
In order to begin an examination for a patient whose details are already
stored in the archive, the user must perform the following three steps:
• Locate the patient record in the archive, below.

• Retrieve the patient’s data from the archive, page 10-22.
• Begin the examination.
To locate a patient record in the archive:
Patient ID 1. Press Patient ID on the control panel. The Select screen is
Figure 10-2: Select Screen

2300163-100 Rev. 0
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to Start New Patient and press Select. An empty Main
Details screen is displayed.
Select
Figure 10-3: Empty Main Details Screen

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Search 3. Press the Search Patient soft key. The Patient List screen is
Patient displayed, listing all archived patients, as shown below.
Figure 10-4: Patient List Screen
The following fields are displayed in the Patient List screen:
Field Description
Last* The patient’s last name.
First The patient’s first name.
ID* The patient’s unique ID number.

Updated The date of the last examination.
Ex The number of stored examinations.
Im The number of stored images.
SE The number of stored stress exams.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Select 4. Search by scrolling through the list using the Select Patient soft
Patient
key rotary,
OR
OR
TRACKBALL
TRACKBALL to the required patient name.
Note: Sort and filter the list using the tools, described on page 10-12.
Select 5. After locating and highlighting the required patient, press Select.
The highlighted patient’s archived record is displayed, comprising
all the archived patient’s stored information. By default, the Main
Details page is displayed, as shown below:
Figure 10-5: Main Details Page

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6. Edit the patient information as required.
OK 7. Press the OK soft key. A new examination, with the current date, is
added to the patient’s archived data. The screen display is ready to
begin the examination.
8. If the patient record cannot be located (indicating that no previous

record exists):
Cancel • Press the Cancel soft key. An empty Main Details page is
displayed, enabling the user to enter new patient information.
Begin Exam • Press the Begin Exam soft key to begin the examination.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6RUWLQJ'DWD
The patient list can be sorted to assist the search, according to a
specific field in the Patient List screen, in ascending or descending
order.
To sort data:
1. Perform steps 1 through 3 of the procedure for locating a patient
record in the archive, page 10-6. The Patient List screen is
displayed, as shown on page 10-8.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the field header by which the sort is to be performed

and press Select.
Select
3. Use the direction arrow to toggle by ascending or descending order.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6HDUFKLQJZLWK)LHOG)LOWHUV
Any field text box in the upper portion of the Patient List screen (Last,
First, ID or Updated) can be used as a search filter.
Figure 10-6: Search Field Filtering
To search using field filters:

Select 1. Rotate the Select Field soft key rotary to move between the fields.
Field
• Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter the first characters of

the required field parameters to begin the search. Characters
may be letters or numbers.
Keyboard
• A specific examination date can be entered in the Updated field

box in two ways: by using the alphanumeric keyboard or by
using the icon found to the right of the field box. Clicking on this
icon opens a monthly calendar, enabling the easy selection of
dates.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Only the names of patients whose criteria match the entered filter
data will be displayed. If there is an exact match of name and/or ID
number, the system will display and highlight that patient on the list.
If there are several patients who were examined on the date
entered in the Updated field box, they will be displayed.
Select 2. Search by scrolling through the list using the Select Patient soft
Patient
key rotary,
OR
OR
TRACKBALL
Important: If there is no match, no listings will be displayed on the

screen.
To restart a search:
Keyboard • Press <Backspace> on the alphanumeric keyboard to erase
the filter box text (or exit and re-enter Archiving, by pressing
Archive twice). The Patient List screen will be redisplayed,
Archive unfiltered.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$UFKLYLQJ6WRULQJ,PDJHVDQG&LQHORRSV
Images and cineloops that are stored during a current examination are
automatically saved to the archive and are displayed during Freeze
Mode as thumbnails on the clipboard.
When an image is stored, all the additional information that is displayed

is saved with it, such as the probe application and image settings.
Annotations or measurements that are marked on the screen are also
stored with the image. When a split screen image is stored, it is stored
exactly as displayed on the screen.
The stored images and cineloop are displayed as thumbnails on the

clipboard, as shown below:
• A filmstrip icon is displayed in the bottom left corner of each

cineloop thumbnail.
• A split screen icon is displayed in the bottom left corner of each
side-by-side thumbnail.
Clipboard area
Stored
cine
loop
Selected
image (12)
Stored
single
image
Up/Down
scroll arrows
Figure 10-7: Stored Images and Cineloops

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Note: The clipboard can display up to 14 thumbnail images on the screen. If

the patient’s file contains more than 14 images, use the TRACKBALL and
Select to select the Up/Down scroll arrows to display additional images.
The same operations that are performed on the images and cineloops
during an examination can be performed on images stored in the
archive, such as:
• Storing an image.
• Extensive post-processing.
• Changing the parameters of a stored image, for example, color
gain, and saving it as a new image.
• Viewing multiple images on the screen.
• Adding annotations.
• Performing measurements.
Note: To enable measurements to be made on images recorded on VCR, the

M&A on VCR option must be selected in the configuration setup. For further
information, refer to Chapter 14, Presets and System Setup.
In addition to the archive, images and cineloops can also be backed up

on MOD (Magnetic Optical Disks) or CD-Rs.
Note: In addition to 2.3 GB Magnetic Optical Disks, 2.6 or 5.2 GB MOD media
can be used for backup purposes as well.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6WRULQJ$Q,PDJH
Stored images are displayed chronologically on the clipboard when in
Freeze Mode.
To store an image in the archive:

Freeze 1. While scanning in any mode, press Freeze to freeze the image.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL through the cineloop to select the required image.
Store 3. Press Store on the control panel. The image is saved in the archive
and a thumbnail is displayed on the clipboard.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6WRULQJD6SOLW6FUHHQ,PDJH
Images displayed in side-by-side split screens are stored in the archive
exactly as they are displayed on the screen.
Split images are displayed chronologically on the clipboard when in

Freeze Mode. A small icon on the thumbnail indicates that the image is
split.
To store a split screen image:

1/2/4 1. While scanning in any mode, press 1/2/4 on the control panel once
to split the screen into two windows, or twice to split the screen into
four windows.
2. Continue scanning as described in the Working in Split Screen

Mode section, page 3-13, to select the required image or cineloop in
each of the windows.
Store 3. Press Store on the control panel. The split image is stored in the
archive exactly as it appears on screen, and a thumbnail is
displayed on the clipboard with a small split screen icon.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6WRULQJD&LQHORRS
A cineloop is a sequence of images usually recorded over the time
frame of one heart beat. The time frame can be shortened or extended
as required by using the soft keys. Cineloops are displayed
chronologically on the clipboard when in Freeze Mode.
Cineloops can be stored at any time during the scan.
To preview and then store a cineloop:

Freeze 1. While scanning in any mode, press Freeze to freeze the image.
Cine 2. Press the Cine Run soft key rotary.

Run
Prev/Next/ 3. Determine the best cineloop to store. Use the soft keys (Prev/Next,
First/End
Marker First, End Marker and so on) to adjust and select the required loop.
Store 4. Press Store on the control panel. The full cineloop is saved in the
archive and a thumbnail of the last cineloop frame is displayed on
the clipboard with a small filmstrip icon.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
'LUHFW6WRUDJH
When the system is configured to enable the Preview Cine before
store function (refer to the Archiving Tab section of Chapter 13, Presets
and System Setup for details), the following procedure enables
cineloops to be stored directly, without previewing.
To store without previewing (Preview Cine before store disabled):

Store
• While scanning, press Store. The last valid cineloop is
automatically stored in the archive and displayed on the
clipboard. Scanning immediately resumes.
When the system is configured to disable the Preview Cine before

store function, as described in the Archive Tab section, page 14-34, the
following procedure enables cineloops to be previewed before they are
stored.
To store directly with preview (Preview Cine before store selected):

Store 1. While scanning, press Store on the control panel. The cineloop is
previewed on the screen (no image is stored on the clipboard).
2. Use soft keys to select and adjust the loop, as described on

page 10-18.
Store 3. To store the cineloop, press Store on the control panel. The
cineloop is displayed on the clipboard with a small filmstrip icon and
is stored,
OR
Freeze If the loop is unsatisfactory, press Freeze to disable Freeze Mode

and resume scanning without storing the image.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
9LHZLQJ6WRUHG,PDJHVDQG&LQHORRSV
A stored image or cineloop may be viewed at any time during the
examination or while browsing through patient records in the archive.
To view a stored image:

TRACKBALL
• TRACKBALL to the required thumbnail image on the clipboard
and press Select. The image is displayed as a full size image.
Select
To view a stored split screen image:

TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the required thumbnail image on the clipboard and
press Select. The image is displayed exactly as it was stored.
Select
Window 2. Press Window Select on the control panel to highlight the side of
Select
the image that is to be displayed as a full size image.
1/2/4 3. Press 1/2/4 on the control panel until the image is displayed as a full
size image.
Important: The entire procedure described above must be repeated to view the
side of a split screen image that was not enlarged.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To view a stored cineloop:

TRACKBALL • TRACKBALL to the required thumbnail image with a filmstrip icon
on the clipboard and press Select. The cineloop is displayed as
a full size image and runs as an endless loop, and the cineloop
soft key menu is displayed, enabling adjustment of the cineloop.
Select
After retrieving a cineloop, post-processing may be performed.
A variety of post-processing functions are available in different
modes. For example, change of gain, baseline, horizontal
sweep, color maps, image layout and size,
and so on.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
5HWULHYLQJDQG(GLWLQJ$UFKLYHG
,QIRUPDWLRQ
The user can access the information stored in the archive in order to
view, edit and/or delete patient information, examinations, reports,
worksheets or images.
(GLWLQJ3DWLHQW'DWDLQWKH$UFKLYH
A patient record must be located in the archive before the user can
begin viewing or editing data. Various tools are available to make this
search as uncomplicated and flexible as possible.
To retrieve and locate an archived patient:

Archive 1. Press Archive on the control panel. The archived Patient List
screen is displayed, as shown on page 10-8.
Select 2. Search the Patient List screen by scrolling through the list using the
Patient
Select Patient soft key rotary,
OR
OR
TRACKBALL
Edit 3. Press the Edit soft key to open the patient’s archived data, which
comprises all the stored information (patient data, exams, images,
and so on).
Select 4. Use the Select Page soft key rotary to scroll between the four
Page
pages of patient information, as follows:

2300163-100 Rev. 0
• Page 1, Main Details
•Page 2, Demographic Details

2300163-100 Rev. 0
• Page 3, Exam Details
•Page 4, Medical Comments

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Note: The information is examination-specific, for example, blood pressure,

referring doctor, and so on. It may differ between examinations. Therefore, the
patient information for each examination can be edited as required. See Editing
Examination, below, for further information.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To edit archived patient information:

1. Follow steps 1 through 3 in the previous procedure for retrieving
and viewing archived patient information.
Keyboard 2. Using the alphanumeric keyboard, add and/or edit any information.
OK 3. Press the OK soft key to save all editing changes or press the
Cancel soft key to ignore all changes. The Patient List is
OR redisplayed.
CANCEL
Note: At any time during the procedure:
• Press Exit or Freeze to return to current patient’s scanning

screen. All changes made will be saved.
• Press the Edit soft key to redisplay the selected patient’s
Main Details pages.
• Press the Patient List soft key to redisplay the archived
Patient List.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To retrieve and/or edit an archived examination:

records is displayed in the Patient List screen, as shown on
page 10-8.
Select 2. Search the Patient List screen by scrolling through the list using the
Patient
Select Patient soft key rotary,
OR
OR
TRACKBALL
Exam List 3. Press the Exam List soft key. The Patient Exam List is displayed.
Figure 10-8: Patient Exam List Screen
Note: The images of the most recent examination are displayed on the
clipboard.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Select 4. Search the Patient Exam List screen by scrolling through the exam
Exam list using the Select Exam soft key rotary,
OR
OR TRACKBALL to the required exam.

TRACKBALL
Note: The images from the selected examination are displayed on the
clipboard.
Edit 5. Press the Edit soft key. All four pages of data relating to the
selected examination are displayed, including images on the
clipboard and fields such as Medical History, Indications, Exam
Reason, Symptoms, Exam Comments, and so on.
Note: The Main Details pages are examination-specific. Information may differ
from examination to examination, for example, blood pressure, referring doctor,
and so on.
Select Page/ 6. Edit the text as required, using the Select Page and Select Field
Select Field
soft key rotaries to move between pages and fields.
OK 7. Press the OK soft key to save all changes,
OR
Press Cancel to ignore all changes. The Patient Exam List is

redisplayed.
Note: At any time:
• Press Exit or Freeze to return to current patient’s scanning

screen.
• Press the Patient List soft key to redisplay the Patient List.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To review and/or edit an archived image:

1. Enter the archive and select the required patient and examination
as described in the procedure for retrieving an archived
examination, on page 10-27.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the required image on the clipboard and press Select.
The image is displayed in full size, and the Archive button is
disabled.
Select
OK
Important: If the selected image displays measurements and annotations,

press the Remove Overlay soft key to remove all annotations and
measurements.
Measure/ 3. Press Measure or Caliper on the control panel to make the

Caliper
required measurements and annotations, and/or the Text button on
the alphanumeric keyboard to insert annotations. Refer to Chapter
6, Cardiac Measurement and Analysis, and Chapter 7, Vascular
Measurement and Analysis for details about making
measurements. Refer to Chapter 2, Getting Started for details about
inserting annotations.
Store 4. Press Store on the control panel to save the image with the new
measurements. The newly revised image is saved as a new
additional image in the archived examination.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To retrieve a stress examination:

page 10-8.
Select
Patient 2. Using the Select Patient soft key rotary, scroll through the list and
select the required patient record that includes stored stress
examinations (indicated in the Se column).
Note: Protocol is enabled and its label lit only for patient records that
include stored stress examinations.
Protocol 3. Press Protocol on the control panel. The stress examination is

displayed with its Stress Template reconstructed.
4. Using the soft keys and the control panel keys, perform the
functions of the stress analysis again, as required. Refer to
Chapter 5, Stress Echo, for further information about stress
examination and analysis.
Protocol 5. Press Protocol again to exit the examination, saving all scoring and
analysis, and to return to the current patient’s scanning screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To retrieve and/or edit a worksheet:

page 10-8.
Select 2. Using the Select Patient soft key rotary, scroll through the list and
Patient
select the required patient record.
Worksheet 3. Press Worksheet on the control panel. The worksheet is displayed.
Figure 10-9: Worksheet
Keyboard 4. Using the alphanumeric keyboard, edit the values as required. An

asterisk is displayed next to each changed value. All changes are
automatically saved.
Worksheet 5. Press Worksheet again to return to the current patient screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
5HGLVSOD\LQJWKH&OLSERDUG
A Time out option in the configuration menu, specifies the duration of
time after which the clipboard and its associated data will disappear
from the screen. The following procedure describes how to redisplay
the clipboard.
To redisplay the clipboard and its images:

TRACKBALL • TRACKBALL over the clipboard area. The thumbnail images are
redisplayed.
'HOHWLQJ$UFKLYHG,QIRUPDWLRQ
Individual images and exams can be deleted from the archive as
necessary. If required, entire patient records can be deleted at one
time.
To delete a patient record:

Archive 1. Press Archive. The list of archived patient records is displayed in
the Patient List screen, as shown on page 10-8.
Select
Patient
2. Use the Select Patient soft key rotary to scroll through the list and
highlight the patient record that is to be deleted.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
3. Press the Delete soft key. A pop-up dialog box is displayed,

Delete
enabling the user to confirm the deletion.
Figure 10-10: Delete Patient Record Dialog Box

TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to Yes and press Select. The selected patient records
are physically removed from the archive.
Note: All the relevant data is physically removed from the hard disk
immediately. This process may take a few minutes.
Select
Note: The current patient record and examination cannot be deleted.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To delete a group of patient records:

Archive 1. Press Archive. The list of archived patient records is displayed in
the Patient List screen, as shown on page 10-8.
Select 2. Press the Select Patients soft key rotary to select the first patient
Patients
record in the group of records that is to be deleted, and continue
scrolling with the rotary to highlight the group.
Select 3. Press the Select Patients soft key rotary again to indicate that the
Patients
group is complete.
Select 4. If required, continue scrolling through the list. Press the Select
Patients
Patients soft key rotary again to restart selection highlighting.
Note: The selection process can be cancelled by centering the TRACKBALL

on the list and pressing Select. All highlighting is cancelled without deleting
the records.
Delete 5. Press the Delete soft key. A pop-up dialog box is displayed, as
shown in the previous procedure.
TRACKBALL 6. TRACKBALL to Yes and press Select. The selected patient records
are deleted from the archive.
Note: The current patient record and examination cannot be deleted.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To delete an image:
Archive 1. Press Archive. The archived Patient List screen is displayed, as
shown on page 10-8.
2. Select a patient record and examination as described in the

procedure for retrieving and editing an archived examination, on
page 10-27. The images associated with the selected examination
are displayed.
TRACKBALL 3. Use the TRACKBALL to place the arrow cursor over the image that is
to be deleted.

shown below.
Figure 10-11: Archived Image Options
TRACKBALL 5. Using the TRACKBALL, select Delete in the pop-up menu and press
Select. The image is deleted.
Note: Images for the current patient and examination cannot be deleted.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To delete an examination:
Archive 1. Press Archive on the control panel.The archived Patient List
screen is displayed, as shown on page page 10-8.
2. Select a patient record as described in the procedure for retrieving
and editing an archived examination, on page 10-27.
Exam List 3. Press the Exam List soft key. A list of the patient’s examinations is
displayed.
TRACKBALL 4. Using the TRACKBALL, scroll through the list and highlight the
examination that is to be deleted.
Delete
5. Press the Delete soft key. A pop-up dialog box is displayed,
enabling the user to confirm the deletion, as shown below.
Figure 10-12: Delete Examination Confirmation Dialog Box
TRACKBALL 6. TRACKBALL to Yes and press Select. The examination is deleted

from the archive.
Note: Examinations for the current patient, including the current

examination, cannot be deleted.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$GGLWLRQDO$UFKLYHG,QIRUPDWLRQDQG
'DWD
Additional information is stored in the database. This data can be
accessed by using the Utilities soft key.
To access additional database information:

Archive 1. Press Archive on the control panel. The archived Patient List
screen is displayed, as shown on page 10-8.
Utilities 2. Press the Utilities soft key. The system displays the General Status
screen. This screen displays the database inventory, including
number of patient records, examinations and images stored. It also
indicates the volume of free space still available for archiving.
Other diverse data information which can be viewed, using the

labeled soft keys and soft key rotaries, includes:
• Personnel List: Enables management of user information. The
user is able to select, add, delete and edit information relating to
the system’s various users/groups. This does not affect the
current user information.
• Removable Media Utility: Provides control options for handling
removable media, including:
formatting/labeling, mounting and ejecting. Displays the total
and available space on the removable media; and media status
(ejected or mounted).
• Patient List: Displays the archived Patient List.
• Backup: Provides information regarding the status of the
backup diskette and enables management of regular backup
scheduling, initiating a non-scheduled Backup and purging
backed up data.
([LWLQJWKH$UFKLYLQJ)XQFWLRQ
Exit The archiving function can be exited by pressing Exit on the control
panel.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
%DFN8S3URFHGXUHV
The Backup procedure backs up patient details, M&A data, stress data,
images (in raw data format) and reports (in CHM format) to the local
MOD or CD-R archive. The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit
archive should be backed up regularly.
Note: The smallest entity in the backup procedure is a single examination
Note: The Patient Archive directory file is backed up on every MO media

that is used for backup. Therefore, the newest MO disk holds the most
updated Patient Archive directory file.
Note: User presets are not backed up during this process.
Note: In addition to 2.3 MOD disks, 2.6 or 5.2 GB MOD media can be used
for Backup purposes as well. (Only 2.3 MOD disks can be used for DICOM
Export since the DICOM standard does to recognize other sizes.)
The system is unavailable for use while images and data are being
backed up. The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit archive
should be backed up regularly. The backup procedure time depends on
the amount of data being backed up. (It takes approximately 20 minutes
to backup a full single side of a 2.3 GB MOD.)
The backup process can be stopped at any time and continued at a

later time. Exams that were not fully backed up, as well as exams not
backed up at all, are backed up during the next backup procedure.
This section details the backup procedures, and includes the following
topics:
• Backup Scheduling, page 10-39, describes how to schedule a

backup.
• Performing a Backup, page 10-43, describes how to perform a
backup.
• Interrupting the Backup Process, page 10-44, describes how to
stop the backup process.
• Purging Backed Up Exams, page 10-45, describes how the
system automatically purges backed up information.
• Restoring from Backup, page 10-45, describes how to restore
data and images from backup.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
%DFNXS6FKHGXOLQJ
The user can initiate an Incremental Backup at any time, or when
prompted by the system. The system can be configured to notify the
user to activate the Backup process, according to the schedule
specified by the user.
Important: Backup will only be performed on data that has not previously been
backed up.
Important: If the date scheduled to perform a Backup passes and the Backup
is not performed, the user will be notified to activate the Backup process each
time the system is started.
Important: The patient archive should be backed up regularly. A weekly

Backup is strongly recommended.
The Backup notification does not obstruct the workflow, and the user can
continue working.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6FKHGXOLQJD%DFNXS
Backup notifications are scheduled on the Backup screen. When the
scheduled time arrives, the user is notified to activate the backup
procedure.
If the date scheduled to perform a Backup passes and the Backup is not
performed, the user will be notified to activate the Backup process each time
the system is started.
To schedule a backup:
Archive 1. Press Archive on the control panel. The Patient List screen is
Utilities 2. Press the Utilities soft key. The General Status screen is displayed,
as shown below.
Figure 10-13: General Status Screen

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Backup 3. Press the Backup soft key. The Backup screen is displayed, as
shown below.
Figure 10-14: Backup Screen
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to and Select the desired timing (Daily, Weekly,

Monthly or None) from the dropdown list in the Backup
Frequency text box. (The user can manually adjust the date
displayed in the Next Backup Date text box.) The system will
prompt to perform the Backup procedure at the scheduled time.
Select
Important: If None is selected, no backup prompts will be activated and

displayed by the system. (Refer to page 9-43 for further details regarding
stopping Backup notification.)
Note: Two buttons appear at the bottom of the Backup screen, and are used to
perform their labeled actions: Incremental Backup and Stop current action.
These actions are described in greater detail in the following pages.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6WRSSLQJWKH%DFNXS1RWLILFDWLRQ
When the scheduled date for performing a backup arrives, the system
notifies the user to activate the backup process. These notifications will
continue appearing each time the system is started, until a backup is
performed. The backup notifications can be stopped in one of three
ways:
• Performing a backup.
• Manually setting a new Next Backup Date in the Backup screen.
• Setting the scheduling option to None.
To stop backup notifications by performing a backup:

• Perform a Backup as described on page 10-43.
To stop backup notifications by setting a new backup date:

1. Perform steps 1 through 3 of the procedure for Scheduling a
Backup, page 10-39.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to Next Backup Date and press Select to enable the
field.
Select
Keyboard 3. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to manually set a new Backup

date.
TRACKBALL To stop backup notifications by setting the scheduling option to

None:
1. Perform steps 1 through 3 of the procedure for scheduling a
backup, page 10-39.
2. TRACKBALL to None in the required Backup Frequency text box list
Select
and press Select.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
3HUIRUPLQJD%DFNXS
The user can initiate an Incremental Backup at any time or when
prompted by the system that the scheduled date for Backup has
arrived.
Important: Only data that has not previously been backed up will be backed up.
Note: It is recommended to prepare (format) a few disks prior to Backup, using

the Removable Media Utility function.
Note: The user will be prompted by the system to insert a new media when the
presently used disk is full and there still remains data for Backup.
To perform a backup:
1. Perform steps 1 though 3 of the Scheduling a Backup, page 9-41.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to Incremental Backup and press Select.
The system will search for a backup disk that has been properly
formatted and labelled. The system will prompt to insert a backup
disk. If needed, follow mount, format and label procedures, as
Select
When the appropriate disk is inserted and mounted, the following
screen is displayed:
Figure 10-15: Removable Media Utility Screen

2300163-100 Rev. 0
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to the OK button and press Select when the correct disk
is mounted and ready.
The system will redisplay the Backup screen and begin the Backup
process. When the Backup process is complete, the system will
automatically purge backed up studies, as described on
Select page 10-45.
Important: If more than one Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound

unit is in use at the site, do not mix disks from different systems. Be
sure to clearly mark and label the disks to distinguish which disks
belong to which system.
,QWHUUXSWLQJWKH%DFNXS3URFHVV
The backup process can be stopped at any time.
To stop the backup process:

1. Perform steps 1 though 3 of the procedure for scheduling a backup,
as described on page 10-40.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to Stop current action and press Select. The Backup
process is stopped.
Select
Important: If during the next, subsequent Backup, only the data on the hard
disk that was not backed up before the process was stopped will be backed up.
Any exams on the hard disk that were only partially backed up due to the
(previous) interrupted Backup process will also be backed up.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
3XUJLQJ%DFNHG8S([DPV
Purging data frees space in the unit’s archive to allow further storage of
images and reports. Only backed up data can be purged from the
archive.
$XWRPDWLF3XUJH
The purge function will be activated automatically by the system. When
the occupied space on the disk increases slightly above 13 GB, it
exceeds the internal system purge marker. At this point, the system will
automatically remove the oldest backed up exams at the following
intervals, when:
• The user presses Patient ID on the control panel.

• The user performs a backup procedure.
• The user deletes patients from the patient list.
• The system enters standby mode.
Note: All patient records remain in the archived Patient List.
5HVWRULQJIURP%DFNXS
Information that has been purged from the system can be restored from
Backup whenever necessary.
Important: Restoring or re-display of backed up data and images can be done

only on the same system they were initially backed up on.
Note: If the thumbnail images on the clipboard on the left side on the screen
appear only as graphic overlays or icons, it means the exam was already baked
up and purged from the system’s internal hard disk.
To restore purged images and reports:

Select
Patients
2. Using the Select Patient soft key rotary, scroll through the list and
highlight the required patient record.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
3. TRACKBALL and highlight the required examination and press Menu

TRACKBALL on the control panel,
OR
Menu
OR
TRACKBALL to an image icon, and press Select. A pop-up menu is
TRACKBALL displayed.
4. TRACKBALL to Restore This exam from Backup and press Select.

Select
The system will display a message prompting the user to mount and
insert the specific backup media containing the desired exam and/
or image. (The prompt includes the name/number of the required
media).
Once the media is inserted, the image and all other relevant data of
the exam from the media will automatically be restored to the
archive, and can be manipulated normally.
Note: The whole set of images of the specified exam will be retrieved in one
procedure.
Note: If there is more than one exam for the patient, the images on the
clipboard will be those belonging to the last exam performed.
Important: The originally backed up data will remain unmodified on the Backup
media.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To restore a specific exam of a patient:

Archive 1. Press Archive on the control panel.
Select 2. Highlight the required patient by using the Select Patient soft key
Patients
rotary.
Exam List 3. Press the Exam List soft key to display the exam list.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the required exam, and press Select.
Select
5. Follow steps 3 and 4 of the previous procedure.

To retrieve an exam without images:
Archive 1. Press Archive on the control panel.
Select 2. Using the Select Patient soft key rotary, scroll through the Patient
Patients
List and highlight the required patient.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
3. Press Report on the control panel.

Report • If the list of saved reports is displayed in yellow font (on the left
area of the screen), TRACKBALL to the report name and press
Select. The selected report will be displayed.
• If the list of saved reports is displayed in red font (on the left
area of the screen), it means that the specific patient has been
backed up and purged from the system’s hard disk. TRACKBALL
to the report name and press Select. The system will prompt
the user to place a specific MOD in order to retrieve the patient’s
report.
Important: Measurements generated by the M&A Package are permanently

stored in the system’s onboard database. These measurements are backed up
but are never purged from the system, as long as the patient has not been
deleted. This permits immediate review and generation reports based on these
measurements at any time.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
([SRUWLQJ,PDJHVDQG5HSRUWVWR
([WHUQDO0HGLD
Images, cineloops and reports can all be exported to any of the
following external media:
• Floppy disk
• Drive U: (the user partition of the hard disk)
• MO disk (available with the Archive option only)
• CD-R (available with the Archive option only)
This data can be exported in several standard formats:
• Still images: JPG, BMP or DICOM

• Loops: MPEG 1, MPEG 4, AVI or DICOM
• Current frame: JPG or BMP
• Patient Data: ASCII
• Reports: CHM (compiled HTML) or PDF
Note: Reports: CHM (compiled HTML) or PDF. If the data has been
exported to Drive U: (User) on the hard disk, it is possible for the user to use
Windows Explorer to access this drive at a later time, to copy files from U: to an
MOD, CD-R or a floppy disk. Refer to page 10-56 for details on the CD-R Writer.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To export an image or a loop to an external media:

TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the required image or loop icon on the clipboard.
Menu 2. Press Menu. A pop-up menu is displayed, as shown below.
Figure 10-16 Export Option Menu
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to Save As and press Select. The Save As window is

displayed, as shown below.
Select
Figure 10-17 Save As Window

2300163-100 Rev. 0
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the required media (options are listed on page 10-49)
in the Save In field box and press Select.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to one of the available formats (options are listed on

page 10-49) in the Save as type: field box and press Select.
Select
Keyboard
6. Using the alphanumeric keyboard, type the file name into the File
name field box.
Note: If A: G: or E: are selected, be sure a CD-R, floppy or MO disk is

inserted in the drive.
TRACKBALL 7. TRACKBALL to Save, and press Select.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To export a report to an external media:

1. Generate a report using the normal procedures, as described in
Chapter 10.
Save As 2. Press the Save As soft key rotary. The Save As window is
displayed (refer to Figure 10-17).
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to the required media (options are listed on page 10-49)
in the Save In field box and press Select.
Note: If A:, E: or G: are selected, be sure a floppy or MO disk is inserted in

the drive.
Select
4. Verify that CHM files or PDF files format is displayed in the Save
as type field box.
Keyboard
5. Using the alphanumeric keyboard, type the file name into the File
name field box.
TRACKBALL 6. TRACKBALL to Save, and press Select.
Note: CHM format can only be read by Windows Explorer Version 4 or

higher.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
'LVN)RUPDWWLQJDQG/DEHOLQJ
MO and CD-R disks can be formatted and labelled as needed during
the backup procedure, using the Removable Media Utility screen and
functions.
Note: It is recommended however, to prepare a few disks prior to Backup.
To access the Removable Media Utility screen:

Utilities 2. Press the Utilities soft key. The General Status screen is displayed,
as shown on page 10-40.
Removable 3. Press the Removable Media Utility soft key. The Removable
Media Utilities
Media Utility screen is displayed.
Figure 10-18: Removable Media Utility Screen
Note: Alternatively, simultaneously press <Ctrl> and <M> on the alphanumeric

keyboard to access this screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
The following functions are available in the Removable Media Utility

screen:
Option Description
Message area Displays information about the disk

capacity.
Media Displays information about the type of the

media.
Media Label Displays the media label.
Media Status Displays the status of the media - mounted

or ejected.
Format Enables the user to label the media.
Eject* Enables the user to eject the media*.

Mount Enables the user to mount the media.
*Ejection of MOD:
In addition to disk ejection utilizing the Removable Media Utility

function, the user can use the following alternative methods:
(1) The MO disk can be ejected at any time during normal workflow by
the simplified procedure: <Ctrl> + <E>.
(2) The system may be configured to eject an MO disk automatically

upon the unit’s shutdown.
To control ejection of MO media upon shutdown:
1. Press Config on the control panel.
2. Select the Archive tab.
3. When Eject MO on shutdown is selected (checkmark in box), the
system will automatically eject the MO media upon shutdown of
unit.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To mount a disk:
1. Insert the disk in the appropriate drive.
2. Perform the above procedure for accessing the Removable Media
Utility screen.
TRACKBALL 3. If Eject is displayed in the Media Status field, TRACKBALL to Mount
and press Select. The Media Status field display changes to
Mounted.
• If the disk is labeled, the label will be displayed in the Media
Label field and information about its capacity will be displayed in
Select
the Message area.
• If the disk is not labeled, format it as described below.
To format a new disk:
1. Mount the disk as described above.
Keyboard
2. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to type a label in the Media Label
field.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to Format and press Select.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To rename or recycle a disk:
Important: Only MOD can be renamed and recycled. CD-R disks can only be
formatted once.
1. Mount the disk as described on page 10-55.

Keyboard
2. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to type a label in the Media Label
field.
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to Format and press Select. The system will reformat
the disk, erasing all its contents and renaming the disk.
Select
Important: After data has been backed up to a disk, the label cannot be
modified or changed without erasing all the data on the disk.
&'5:ULWHU)XQFWLRQDOLW\
When exporting or backing up to a CD-R, upon ejection, the system will
ask the user if the disk is to be finalized.
• If the user answers Yes, The CD becomes read-only, and no

additional data can be saved to the disk. The CD can be viewed on
any Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit, and on any PC.
• If the user answers No, additional data can be saved to the disk.
However, the disk can only be viewed on a Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6\VWHP0HVVDJHV
The system will automatically display messages at various periods to
advise the user:
• As a reminder: When the scheduled backup date is reached (entered

by the user in the Backup Screen, as described on page page 10-39).
Action Required: An Incremental Backup should be done.
Message will be displayed: Each time Patient ID is pressed.
• As a warning/cautionary message. When the archive has only 2 GB
free space available. (Normal workflow is still permitted.)
Action Required: Incremental Back Up should be performed, to free
space.
Message will be displayed: Each time the Patient ID button is pressed.
The user will be able to continue with normal system operation, even if
no action is taken at this time.
• As a WARNING. *If the above warnings are continually ignored, and
the system has only 1 GB free space left available.
Important: No storage of images or reports can be done. All storage will
be prevented until free space is made by first performing Back Up, which
will allow the system to perform the automatic purge.
Message will be displayed: Each time the Patient ID or Store buttons
are pressed.
• As a WARNING. *If the above warnings are continually ignored, and
the system has less than 1/2 GB free space left available.
Important: No new patient records can be created. No storage of images
or reports can be done.
Action Required: The user must perform a Back Up, which will allow
the system to perform an automatic purge.
Note: The user can display the General Status screen to check "Available"
space by pressing the Utilities soft key at any time.
Remember:
• To free space - first perform a Backup to permit the system to

automatically purge the system, as described on page 10-43.
• It is strongly recommended to initiate incremental backups on a regular
basis, or when the system notifications appear.

2300163-100 Rev. 0

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
&KDSWHU
&RQQHFWLYLW\
,QWURGXFWLRQ
This chapter describes the communication and connection options for
the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit with other devices in the
hospital information system, in the following sections:
• Dataflows, page 11-2, describes the concept of dataflows, as well
the dataflow structure and components.
• Supported Dataflows, page 11-6, describes the types of dataflows
supported by the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit.
• Supported Services, page 11-15, describes the types of services
• Exporting Data to DICOM Image Storage, Media Storage or
Excel, page 11-16, describes how to export data to the various
configured services.
• Patient Transfer, page 11-18, describes how to merge patient
information from one database to another.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
'DWDIORZV
Communication between the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound
unit and other information providers on the network takes the form of
dataflows. Each dataflow defines the transfer of patient information
from an input source to the unit, and from the unit to an output source.
Patient information can include demographic data and images, as well
as reports and Measurement and Analysis (M&A) data.
The network interface used by the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit for the exchange of digital images and related
information with a DICOM device is the DICOM Standard 3.0 (1999).
Through the DICOM standard, images and related information can be
transmitted from the unit via the network and read by any other
DICOM-compatible review station, as well as stored on removable
media such as DICOM media storage MO disks or CD-RWs.
When the user selects a dataflow, the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit’s input and output devices are automatically configured
according to the selected dataflow.
By utilizing dataflows, the user can configure the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3
Expert ultrasound unit to optimally meet the needs of the facility, while
keeping the user interface unchanged. Once the dataflow is selected,
the actual location of the database is entirely transparent.
Important: The system’s default dataflow is Local Archive - Int. HD. The user
can select a different dataflow when logging on to the system, as described in
the Selecting a Dataflow when Logging On section, page 11-3, or using the
Archive button during the examination, as described in the Selecting a
Dataflow During an Examination section, page 11-4.
Note: The user can view and check the dataflow currently in use in the System
Configuration window’s Connectivity tab. For details, refer to the Connectivity

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
6HOHFWLQJD'DWDIORZZKHQ/RJJLQJ2Q
When logging on to the system, the user can select the dataflow to be
used. This dataflow will be used for all examinations until another
dataflow is selected.
To select a dataflow when logging on:
+

TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the required dataflow in the Dataflow dropdown list,

and press Select.
Select 3. TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. The User Log On dialog box
closes, and the unit’s input and output devices are configured
according to the selected dataflow. The 2D default scanning screen
is displayed, enabling the user to begin an examination.
Note: For further details regarding Log On and Password protection, refer to the
User Logon section, page 14-76.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
6HOHFWLQJD'DWDIORZ'XULQJDQ([DPLQDWLRQ
At any time during an examination, the user can change the active
dataflow. The newly selected dataflow will apply to all examinations
begun after the dataflow was selected.
To select a dataflow during an examination:
Figure 11-2: Patient List Screen
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the required dataflow in the dropdown list in the

bottom-left corner of the screen, and press Select.
Select
Archive 3. Press Archive on the control panel to exit. The screen that was
active before Archive was first pressed is redisplayed.
Important: A new patient must be created or selected in order to activate the

newly selected dataflow.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
9LHZLQJ'DWDIORZ3URSHUWLHV
The user can view the structure of the dataflow, as well as its various
components in detail, in the Connectivity tab of the System
Configuration window.
To view properties of the dataflow structure:
1. Press Config on the alphanumeric keyboard. The System
Configuration window is displayed.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the Connectivity tab and press Select. The

Connectivity tab is displayed.
3. TRACKBALL to the specific input or output component whose

Select properties are to be viewed in detail, and press Select. The full set
of component parameters are displayed in the Properties area of
the Connectivity tab, as shown below:
Figure 11-3: Connectivity Tab
Note: For detailed procedures for viewing and checking dataflows, devices and
services, refer to the Connectivity Tab section, page 14-63.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
6XSSRUWHG'DWDIORZV
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit supports a variety of
dataflows, ranging from standalone configurations, where the input
device and the output device both reside on the unit itself, to network
configurations, where either the input device or output device, or both,
reside on a network.
The different types of dataflows supported by the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3
Expert ultrasound unit can be divided into three groups. For each
group, the supported dataflows are detailed in a table, in the following
sections:
• Basic Dataflows, below.
• EchoNet Dataflows, page 11-9.
• DICOM Network Dataflows, page 11-11.
%DVLF'DWDIORZV
The basic dataflows include a dataflow that has no output source,
called No Archive, for use in emergencies, as well as dataflows that
work with a local archive installed on the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit and with removable media. These dataflows do not
have network or DICOM capabilities.
When a local archive is installed on the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit, all patient information, including demographic data,
measurements and reports are automatically stored in this archive. The
dataflow selected determines if the patient’s images are also stored in
the local archive, and/or if they are stored on removable media such as
CD-RWs or MODs.
Note: The media is self-contained and independent. This means that the media
always includes the portion of the database that contains the required
information for the patients whose images have been stored on that media.
At any stage, the user can view the currently active dataflow in the
Connectivity tab of the System Configuration window. For details, refer
to the Viewing Dataflow Properties section on page 11-5, and to the
Connectivity Tab section, page 14-63.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
The basic dataflows are detailed in the following table:
Dataflow Name Description
No Archive An emergency dataflow used in situations

when no permanent storage is required or the
password is not available.
When this dataflow is selected, the Vivid 3
Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit temporarily
saves the current examination data in the unit
buffer. Once the examination has been
terminated, data will be available only until the
system is switched off. In order to permanently
save the information, a different dataflow must
be selected before the unit is switched off.
Local Archive - Int. HD A default dataflow that uses the Vivid 3 Pro/
Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit’s Echo
Database 3.0 archive, named Local Archive,
for storing all patient information.
The local archive is used in this case for both
patient archiving (including demographic data,
M&A data and reports), as well as for image
storage.
With this type of dataflow, all images and
patient information should be periodically
stored on removable media for back up, and to
free space in the local archive. For detailed
back up procedures, refer to the Back Up
Procedures section, 38.
Local Archive - MOD A dataflow that uses an MO disk-based

archive for storing all patient information.
Both the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit’s Echo Database 3.0 archive,
named Local Archive, and the MO disk are
used in this case for patient archiving
(including demographic data, M&A data and
reports).
Only the MO disk is used for image storage as
raw data.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
Local Archive - CD-RW A dataflow that uses a CD-RW based archive

for storing all patient information.
Both the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit’s Echo Database 3.0 archive,
named Local Archive, and the CD-RW disk are
used in this case for patient archiving
(including demographic data, M&A data and
reports).
Only the CD-RW is used for image storage as
raw data.
Local Archive - Int. HD + A dataflow that uses the Vivid 3 Pro/

MOD Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit’s Echo
for patient archiving (including demographic
data, M&A data and reports), as well as for
image storage. The images are additionally
stored on an MO disk.
With this type of dataflow, the images stored
on the local archive and on the MO disk are
stored as raw data.
Local Archive - Int. HD + A dataflow that uses the Vivid 3 Pro/

CD-RW Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit’s Echo
for patient archiving (including demographic
data, M&A data and reports), as well as for
image storage. The images are additionally
stored on a CD-RW.
With this type of dataflow, the images stored
on the local archive and on the CD-RW are
stored as raw data.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
(FKR1HW'DWDIORZV
The EchoNet dataflows include dataflows that work with centralized
network databases, as well as with the local archive and removable
media.
When a local or central archive is configured for the Vivid 3 Pro/
Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit, all patient information, including
demographic data, measurements and reports are automatically stored
in this archive. The EchoNet dataflow selected determines where the
patient’s information and images are stored:
• In the local archive (HD).
• In a centralized network location.
• On removable media such as MODs or CD-RWs.
• Any combination of the three.
Connectivity tab of the System Configuration window. The network
connections can also be verified. For details, refer to the Connectivity
The EchoNet dataflows are detailed in the following table:
Remote Archive + Int. HD A dataflow that uses a remote archive

database, either on a SonoPAC
workstation or on an EchoServer for patient
archiving, while the Vivid 3 Pro/
Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit’s local
archive is used for image storage.
With this type of dataflow, the images
stored on the local archive are stored as
raw data.
Remote Archive - Remote A dataflow that uses a remote archive

Storage database, either on a SonoPAC
archiving, while a network image volume is
used for image storage.
With this type of dataflow, the images can
be stored on a local hard drive, a SonoPAC
workstation or to an EchoServer volume.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
Remote Archive - MOD A dataflow that uses a remote archive

archiving, while an MO disk based
database is used for image storage.
stored on the MO disk are stored as raw
data.
Remote Archive - CD-RW A dataflow that uses a remote archive

archiving, while a CD-RW based database
is used for image storage.
stored on the CD-RW are stored as raw
data.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
',&201HWZRUN'DWDIORZV
The DICOM network dataflows include dataflows that work with DICOM
servers and centralized network databases, as well as with the local
archive and removable media.
When a local or central archive is configured for the Vivid 3 Pro/
Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit, all patient information, including
demographic data, measurements and reports are automatically stored
in this archive. The DICOM network dataflow selected determines
where the patient’s images are stored:
• In the local archive (HD).
• On the DICOM Server.
• In a centralized network location.
• On removable media such as MODs or CD-RWs.
• Any combination of the above.
Connectivity tab of the System Configuration window. The network
connections can also be verified. Refer to the Connectivity Tab section,
page 14-63, for details.
The DICOM network dataflows are detailed in the following table:
Local Archive - DICOM Server A dataflow that uses the Vivid 3 Pro/
+ Int. HD Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit’s Echo
Database 3.0 archive, named Local
Archive, for patient archiving (including
personal details and reports), while both a
DICOM server and the local archive are
used for image storage.
stored on the local archive are stored in
DICOM media format and as raw data,
while the images stored on the DICOM
server are stored in DICOM media format
and/or as raw data.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
Remote Archive - DICOM A dataflow that uses a remote archive

Server + Int. HD database, either on a SonoPAC
workstation or on an EchoServer, for
patient archiving (including personal details
and reports), while both a DICOM Server
and the local archive are used for image
storage.
Server are stored in DICOM media format
and/or as raw data.
DICOM verification, which validates the
connection to the DICOM Server, is
performed during login.
Remote Archive - DICOM A dataflow that uses a remote archive

Server + Network Volume database, either on a SonoPAC
workstation or on an EchoServer, for
patient archiving (including personal details
and reports), while a DICOM Server and
network volume are used for image
storage.
stored on the DICOM server are stored in
DICOM media format and/or as raw data,
while the images stored on the Network
Volume are stored in DICOM media format
and as raw data.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
Modality Worklist - Local A dataflow that searched the DICOM

Archive + DICOM Server + Modality Worklist (input source) for patient
Int. HD information, which is then copied to the
local database. The Vivid 3 Pro/
Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit’s Echo
Database 3.0 archive, named Local
Archive, is used for patient archiving
(including personal details and reports),
while both a DICOM server and the local
archive are used for image storage.
Server are stored in DICOM media format
and/or as raw data.
Modality Worklist - Remote A dataflow that searched the DICOM

Archive - DICOM Server + Modality Worklist (input source) for patient
Int. HD information, which is then copied to the
remote database archive. The remote
database archive, either on a SonoPAC
workstation or on an EchoServer, is used
for patient archiving (including personal
details and reports). The images are stored
on a DICOM Server and to a local archive.
stored on the DICOM Server are stored in
DICOM media format and/or as raw data,
while the images stored on the local archive
are stored in DICOM media format and as
raw data.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
Modality Worklist - Remote A dataflow that searches the DICOM

Archive + DICOM Server + Modality Worklist (input source) for patient
Network Volume information, which is then copied to a
remote database archive. The remote
database archive, either on a SonoPAC
workstation or on an EchoServer, is used
for patient archiving (including personal
details and reports). Both a DICOM Server
and to a local archive.
stored on the network volume are stored in
while images stored on the DICOM Server
are stored in DICOM media format and/or
as raw data.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
6XSSRUWHG6HUYLFHV
Services are the prime elements of a dataflow. Before the Vivid 3 Pro/
Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit can be configured to work according to a
defined dataflow, the services associated with that dataflow must be
configured.
Note: The services associated with the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound
dataflows are cannot be configured by the user. A meeting of both the GE
Service representative and the local IT personnel must be arranged for
configuration.
The services listed below are supported by the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3

Expert ultrasound unit:
• Echo Database 3.0
• DICOM Media Creator
• DICOM Storage
• DICOM Storage Commitment
• DICOM Verification
• DICOM Modality Worklist
• DICOM Modality Perform Procedure Step (MPPS)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
([SRUWLQJ'DWDWR',&20,PDJH
6WRUDJH0HGLD6WRUDJHRU([FHO
Data may be exported from the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound
unit to various configured services, including:
• DICOM Image Storage
• Media Storage
• Excel
Note: Multiple patients may be exported simultaneously to DICOM Image

Storage or Media Storage services. However, when exporting to Excel, each
patient must be exported individually.
To export a patient or patients:

Select 2. Use the Select Patient / Select Patients soft key rotary to scroll
Patient
through the patient list and select the patient, or patients whose
images are to be exported.
• To select a single patient, use the Select Patient soft key rotary
to scroll to the required patient. The patient name is highlighted.
• To select a group of patients, use the Select Patient soft key
rotary to scroll to the first patient in the group, then press the
Select Patient rotary to select the patient. Pressing the rotary
also changes the function of the rotary to Select Patients,
enabling a group of patients to be selected.
• Continue scrolling, using the Select Patients soft key rotary. All
the names are highlighted as they are selected.
• Press the Select Patients soft key rotary again when the last
patient in the group has been selected.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity

shown below:
Figure 11-4: Export Pop-up Menu
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the required option (Export to DICOM Image

Storage or Export to Media Storage or Export to Excel) from the
displayed menu. The configured services of the highlighted choice
are displayed, as shown in the example below for the Export to
Media Storage option:
Figure 11-5: Export to Media Storage Services
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to the required service and press Select.
6. TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. The highlighted patient data will

Select be transferred to the selected service.
Important: If required, the system will prompt the user to insert a storage
media, such as an MO disk. Refer to the Disk Formatting and Labeling
section, page 10-53 for detailed instructions for formatting and inserting
media.
Important: When exporting to Excel, the destination path to which the data
will be sent to must be assigned in the Archive Tab, as described on page
14-34. When exporting to Excel, a dialog box will be displayed enabling the
user to enter a name for the Excel file being created. The default system
generated file name is:
Last Name_First Name_Birthdate (yyyy, mmm, dd)_Patient ID number. xls

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
3DWLHQW7UDQVIHU
The Patient Transfer tool enables the user to copy or move patient
information, such as images, reports and M&A information from one
database (input source) to another database (destination output).
Utilities To move or copy patient information from one database to another:

1. Press the Utilities soft key. The Utilities screen is displayed.
Transfer 2. Press the Transfer soft key rotary. The Patient Transfer screen is
displayed, with the input source data on the left side of the screen
and the destination source data on the right side of the screen, as
shown below:
Figure 11-6: Patient Transfer Screen

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to the required Input database source from the Input
dropdown list on the upper-left of the Patient Transfer screen, and
press Select. A list of all information stored in this selected Input
database is displayed on the left side of the Patient Transfer
screen.
Select
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the required Destination database, where the patient

information is to be copied or moved, from the Destination Output
dropdown list on the upper-right of the Patient Transfer screen, and
press Select.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to the checkboxes along the bottom of the Patient

Transfer screen and select or deselect the options as appropriate:
• Copy: When this option is selected, the selected patient
information is retained in the original Input database and copied
to the Destination database. When this option is not selected,
Select the selected patient information is removed from the original
Input database and transferred to the Destination database.
• Images: When this option is selected, the images for the
selected patient are copied or transferred.
• MA Info: When this option is selected, the M&A information for
the selected patient is copied or transferred.
• Reports: When this option is selected, the reports for the
selected patient are copied or transferred.
Note: By default, all four checkboxes are selected.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Connectivity
Select 6. Use the Select Patient/Select Patients soft key rotary on the
Patient
control panel to scroll through the Input database’s Patient List (on
the left side of the screen) and highlight the patient/s to be
transferred and/or copied to the destination database.
TRACKBALL 7. TRACKBALL to the on-screen Move button at the top of the Patient
Transfer screen, and press Select. The data specified in step 5 for
the patient selected in step 6 is copied or transferred to the
Destination database and is displayed on right side of the Patient
Transfer screen.
Select
Notes:
• If there is an identical match of the Patient Name, ID and Birth Date fields
in the Destination output database, the system will automatically overwrite
and replace the data.
• If there is a match between any two of the Patient Name, ID and Birth
Date fields in the Destination output database, a dialog box is displayed
advising the user that an identical information exists, and requesting that
the user confirm the transfer or copy before any data is overwritten.
To exit the Patient Transfer:

Exit
• Press Exit on the control panel,
OR
Freeze Press Freeze to exit Freeze Mode.
The scanning screen is redisplayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
&KDSWHU
3HULSKHUDOV
,QWURGXFWLRQ
This chapter describes the peripherals that can operate with the Vivid 3
Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit, in the following sections:
• System Connections for Peripherals, page 12-2, describes the
system connection requirements, features and specifications.
• Printers, page 12-4, describes the various printers that are
• Video Cassette Recorder, page 12-10, describes the video tape
recorders supported by the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound
unit, and provides instructions for VCR operation.
Note: Each of the peripherals have European and US versions.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
6\VWHP&RQQHFWLRQVIRU3HULSKHUDOV
This section provides information on the system connections for
peripheral use.
On-board peripherals can operate from three power outlets:
• 8 A @ 120 V or lower.
• 4 A @ 220 V or higher.
• 500 VA total.
Link Type
VGA Sockets (2)
Socket Video Out
Composite B&W CCIR or RS-130
Composite Color PAL or NTSC
S-Video Y/C, PAL or NTSC
RGB PAL or NTSC
Composite color PAL or NTSC Video In
S-Video Y/C, PAL or NTSC
Audio Stereo Left-Right Out Audio Out (to VCR)
Audio Stereo Left-Right In Audio In (from VCR)
External Microphone
Serial Ports (2) RS-232
Parallel Port PC
Socket USB
Fire Wire IEEE-1394
Remote Print Command Make-Break by Relay
TTL Levels (+5V to Ground)
Ethernet Network RJ-9
Modem RJ-6
Footswitch (on patient trace Vingmed S5, 3 button
I/O front panel)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
Figure 12-1: Rear Panel Connectors

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
3ULQWHUV
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit supports both a black &
white and a color thermal printer, as well as a color InkJet printer. The
following printers are located on board the unit, and are controlled from
the control panel using the Print A and Print B buttons:
• Sony Black & White Thermal Video Printer, below.
• Sony Color Thermal Video Printer, page 12-6.
• HP InkJet Printer, page 12-8.
6RQ\%ODFN :KLWH7KHUPDO9LGHR3ULQWHU
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit supports a black and
white thermal printer. European and US printer specifications are listed
below.
(XURSHDQ6SHFLILFDWLRQV
The following specifications apply to the SONY UP-890CE (CCIR) used
in Europe.
Property Specification
Size Approx. 154 mm (Width) x

106 mm (Height) x 303 mm
(Diameter)
Weight 3.6 kg
Printing Paper Size 110 mm (Width) x 87 mm

(Height)
Printing Method Thermal
Input Mains Voltage 200-220 V (50/60 Hz)
Power Dissipation Approx. 200 W
Data Input Composite B/W Video (CCIR)
Gradation 256 Grey Levels
Printing Time Approx. four seconds
Paper Sony UPP-110HD
Safety Regulations IEC601-1 and IEC950

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
866SHFLILFDWLRQV
The following specifications apply to the SONY UP-890MD (RS-180)
used in the US.

(Diameter)
Weight 3.6 kg

(Height)
Input Mains Voltage 115 V
Data Input Composite B/W Video

(RS-170)
Gradation 256 Grey Levels

Printing Time Approx. four seconds
Paper Sony UPP-110HD
Safety Regulations UL544 and IEC601-1

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
6RQ\&RORU7KHUPDO9LGHR3ULQWHU
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit supports a color
thermal printer. European and US printer specifications are listed
below.
The following specifications apply to the SONY UP 2800P (PAL) and
SONY UP 2950 MD (PAL) used in Europe.

(Diameter)
Weight Approx. 10.5 kg

(Height)
Input Mains Voltage 220 V-240 V (50/60 Hz)

Data Input Composite Color, Y/C or RGB
Gradation 256 level process for three

colors
Printing Time Approx. 35 seconds
Paper Sony UPC-1010
Safety Regulations IEC601-1 and IEC-950

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
866SHFLILFDWLRQV
The following specifications apply to the SONY UP2950 MD (NTSC)
used in the US.

(Diameter)

(Height)
Input Mains Voltage 115 V
Data Input Composite Color, Y/C or RGB
Gradation 256 level process for three

colors
Paper Sony UPC-1010
Safety Regulations UL1950

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
+3,QN-HW3ULQWHU
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit supports a color inkjet
printer. The printer specifications are given below.
(XURSHDQDQG866SHFLILFDWLRQV
The following specifications apply to the HP 990 Cxi used in both
Europe and the US.

(Diameter)

(Height)
Printing Method InkJet
Input Mains Voltage 100 V - 240 V (50/60 Hz)

Data Input Parallel IEEE1284 - compliant

with 1284-B
Color Resolution 300 x 300 dpi
Paper Standard (A4, US Letter)
Safety Regulations IEC601-1 and IEC-950,

UL1950

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
3ULQWHU&RQILJXUDWLRQ
The HP DeskJet Toolbox can be activated through the system. This
toolbox allows printer calibration, as well as control of the ink and other
printer utility functions.
To activate the HP DeskJet Toolbox:
Freeze 1. While scanning in 2D-Mode, press Freeze to freeze the image.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the image and press Menu on the control panel. A
pop-up menu is displayed.
Menu
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to the Explorer option on the pop-up menu and press
Select. The Explorer dialog box is displayed.
Select 4. On drive U:, TRACKBALL to the file called HP DeskJet 970c Series
V.2.0 Toolbox and press Select. A sandclock is activated for a few
seconds, after which the main HP DeskJet Toolbox dialog box is
displayed.
5. Configure the printer settings according the HP instructions.
Note: Other printer setting utilities are available using the System Configuration
window. For details, refer to the Printers Tab section, page 14-59.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
9LGHR&DVVHWWH5HFRUGHU
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit supports a Sony Video
Cassette Recorder (VCR). The VCR is connected to the unit and
operated using the control panel buttons and soft keys, as described in
the VCR Operation section, page 12-12.
The SONY SVO-9500-MDP2 VCR supported by the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid
3 Expert ultrasound unit has the following features:
• On-screen VCR Counter Display.
• On-screen VCR Status Display.
• Direct VCR Control from the alphanumeric keyboard.
• Auto search for blank tape.
• Shuttle - Jog Control.
• Counter Number Search.
European and US printer specifications are listed on the following
pages.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
The following specifications apply to the SONY SVO-9500-MDP2 (PAL)
used in Europe.

(Diameter)
Weight Approx. 12 kg
Tape Format S-VHS or VHS
Input Mains Voltage 220 V-240 V (50/60 Hz)

Data Input Composite Video or
S-Video (Y/C),
Stereo Left-Right Audio In,
RS-232 for Control
S/N Ratio (Video) More than 45 dB
S/N Ratio (Audio) More than 40 dB
Safety Regulations IEC601
866SHFLILFDWLRQV
The SONY AVO-9500-MD2 (NTSC) used in the US requires 115 V
input mains voltage. All other specifications are the same as those for
the European model described above.
Important: Manual calibration and all measurement capabilities of the system

can be performed on VCR-captured images.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
9&52SHUDWLRQ
The VCR is attached to the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit
and is operated using the control panel buttons and soft keys, as listed
in the soft key map and table below.
Important: Once connected to the unit, only the EJECT button is active on the
VCR machine.
The soft key map and table below describe the function of each soft key
in the VCR operation. The map illustrates the soft keys on the control
panel that correspond to the soft keys on the screen. For a detailed
description about using the soft keys, refer to the Soft Keys section,
page 2-43.
9&56RIW.H\0DS
Normal 1 3 5 7 9 11
Pressed 2 4 6 8 10 12
Soft Key Status/Function
Play Freeze Stop
1 Cine Scroll
2 RUN Cine
3 Stop Stop Play
4 Search Search Stop
9 Fast Forward Fast Forward Fast Forward
10 Rewind Rewind Rewind
11 Play Speed Play Speed
12 Freeze/Play Freeze/Play

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
Note: Since the soft key menu is interactive, the cineloop soft key controls can
be used, as described in the Using the Soft Keys section, page 3-3. Use the
TRACKBALL or the arrows on the alphanumeric keyboard to view the cineloop
frame by frame.
The soft keys can be used to perform actions on the recorded session,
such as speed adjustment, rewinding and fast forwarding.
• Play and Stop: Starts and stops the playback.
• Fast forward: Fast forwards the recording.
• Rewind: Rewinds the recording.
• Play speed: Adjusts the speed of all play modes (regular playback,
fast forward and rewind).
• Freeze: Freezes the playback. The soft key controls enable
cineloop review.
• Search: Searches for a specific counter number location while the
VCR is in either Play or Freeze status.
9&56RIW0HQX
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit enables the following
VCR soft menu options:
.
Pop-up Soft Menu

Contrast
Brightness

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
VCR Status Information

VCR status information is displayed in the VCR Control area, at the
bottom-right corner of the screen. The following three parameters are
displayed:
• Tape name.
• Counter number.
• VCR status.
The following VCR status icons, displayed on the screen in the VCR
Control area, indicate the current VCR function.
VCR on
Fast Forward
Rewind
Play
Searching
Pause
Stop
Shuttle - Jog
VCR is inactive, although a

video tape is in the VCR.
Important: Before starting to record, ensure that the tape label has been
entered into the system and that the VCR counter is set correctly. To enter a
label or adjust the counter, refer to the Adjusting the Counter section,
page 12-16.
Important: If the Smart VCR option is selected, a barcode is displayed in the

upper-right corner of the screen. This option enables M&A measurements and
annotations to be made on played-back images. For details, refer to the
VCR/ECG Tab section, page 14-46.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
5HFRUGLQJDQG5HYLHZLQJDQ([DPLQDWLRQ
Entire exams can be recorded by the VCR for review. When playing
back an examination, part of it can be saved as a cineloop. The
sequence is then played back from the system’s memory, and the user
can perform further operations. For further information on storing
images from a cineloop and performing measurements, refer to the
Storing a Cineloop section, page 10-18.
To record an examination:
VCR Record • Press VCR Record on the control panel. A red dot is displayed on
the screen near the VCR counter, indicating that recording has
begun.
• Press VCR Record again to stop recording.
To playback a recorded exam:
VCR Play B. • Press VCR Play B. on the control panel.
Freeze • Press Freeze during playback to store the last few seconds as a
cineloop.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
$GMXVWLQJWKH&RXQWHU
The user can start the counter at different points, as required.
To adjust the counter:
TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the counter in the VCR Control area on the screen.
When the cursor changes to a hand, press Select. A pop-up menu
is displayed, as shown below:
Select
Figure 12-2: Adjust VCR Counter Pop-up Menu
Keyboard 2. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter an identifying name in the

7 Tape name field, if required.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
Keyboard 3. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter the counter number in the
7 counter field,
OR
TRACKBALL TRACKBALL to Reset Counter and press Select to reset the counter
to 0:00:00.
Select 4. TRACKBALL to Done and press Select to save the changes.
Note: Selecting Cancel will undo the current changes to the counter.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Peripherals
6HDUFKLQJIRUD&RXQWHU1XPEHU
The user can search for a specific counter number location while the
VCR is either in Play or Freeze mode.
Search To search for a specific counter number:

1. Press the Search soft key. The Search dialog box is displayed, as
shown below:
Figure 12-3: Search Dialog Box
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the Counter Number field and use the alphanumeric
keyboard to manually adjust the counter number to the required
number.
Keyboard
7
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to the Go To button and press Select. The VCR will
begin the search, displaying a Search icon in the VCR Control
area of the screen. Once the required counter number is found, the
VCR status icon will switch to the Play icon, and the VCR will begin
playing back the tape from the user-selected location.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
&KDSWHU
3UREHV
,QWURGXFWLRQ
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit can be operated with a
wide range of probes for various applications.
This chapter describes the probes that are compatible with the Vivid 3
Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit, and includes the following sections:
• Environmental Requirements, page 13-2, describes the
conditions under which probes should be operated, stored and
transported.
• Probe Orientation, page 13-3, describes where the orientation
markers are located on the probes.
• Probe Labeling, page 13-4, describes the contents and location of
the probe labels.
• Probe Integration, page 13-7, describes the procedures for
connecting, activating and disconnecting probes.
• Care and Maintenance, page 13-11, describes the maintenance
procedures for probes, including inspection, cleaning and
disinfection.
• Probe Safety, page 13-17, describes safety precautions that should
be taken to protect the user and the equipment from harm.
• Probe Types, page 13-19, describes the compatible probe types,
as well as their capabilities, functions and operating procedures.
On the Vivid 3 Pro ultrasound unit, probes are easily connected into
either of the two standard active probe ports or the pencil probe port.
An inactive park port is also provided.
On the Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit, probes are easily connected into
any of the three standard active probe ports or the pencil probe port.
For the user’s convenience, three probe holders on either side of the
control panel ensure flexibility for the user in the positioning of the
probes. The probe holders also keep the probe heads from swinging
freely, protecting them from damage.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
(QYLURQPHQWDO5HTXLUHPHQWV
Probes should be operated, stored and transported within the
parameters outlined below.
Property Operational Storage Transport

Temperature 10o to 40o C -10o to 60o C - 40o to 60o C
50o to 104o F 14o to 140o F - 40o to 140o F
Humidity 30% to 85% 30% to 90% 30% to 90%

non-condensing non-condensing non-condensing

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
3UREH2ULHQWDWLRQ
Some probes have an indentation (notch) for orientation on the probe
housing. Other probes are provided with a green orientation LED near
their heads (refer to Figure 13-1). This notch or LED corresponds with a
green dot on the scanning screen that indicates the orientation of the
probe to the scan.
LED
Notch
Figure 13-1: Orientation Markers on Probe
Probe
orientation
indicator
Figure 13-2: Probe Orientation Indicator on Screen

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
3UREH/DEHOLQJ
Each probe is labeled with the following information:
• Name of distributor and manufacturer.
• Operating frequency.
• GE model number.
• Probe serial number.
• Month and year of manufacture.
The probe name, displayed on the probe houseing and the connector,
can be read when the probe is connected to the unit.
CE Mark
0301
Probe Name
Figure 13-3: Probe Labeling (Example)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
The probe name, together with a picture of the probes currently

connected to the unit, is displayed on the Select Probe and Application
screen.
• The Select Probe and Application screen on the Vivid 3 Pro
ultrasound unit will display three possible probe connections, two
active probes and one pencil probe, as shown below:

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
• The Select Probe and Application screen on the Vivid 3 Expert

ultrasound unit will display four possible probe connections, three
active probes and one pencil probe, as shown below:
When a probe is selected, the probe name is automatically displayed in

the title bar of the scanning screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
3UREH,QWHJUDWLRQ
Probes can be connected to any of the active probe ports. When a
probe is connected to the unit, it is automatically detected and
displayed in the Select Probe and Application screen, from where it can
be selected and activated by the user.
This section describes the procedures for connecting and activating
probes, and includes the following topics:
• Connecting the Probe, below.
• Activating the Probe, page 13-9.
• Disconnecting the Probe, page 13-10.
Warning: The transesophageal probes require special handling. Refer to the

user documentation enclosed with these probes.
&RQQHFWLQJWKH3UREH
Probes can be connected to the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound
unit at any time, whether the unit is on or off.
Warning: DO NOT touch the patient and any of the connectors on the
ultrasound unit simultaneously, including the ultrasound probe connectors.
To connect a probe:
1. Carefully remove the probe from its storage case and unwrap the
cord.
Warning: Do not allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the
probe head can result in irreparable damage.
2. Place the probe in one of the probe holders on the left or right of the
control panel.
3. Rotate the lock on the connector counterclockwise to unlock it.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
4. Align the connector to the probe port, as shown below, and carefully
push it into place, with the cable pointing upwards.
Lock
Unlock
Figure 13-6: Connecting a Probe
5. Rotate the lock clockwise to secure the probe connector.
6. Position the probe cord so that it is not resting on the floor, enabling
it to move freely.
Note: Take the following precautions with probe cables:
• Keep free from the unit’s wheels.

• Do not bend.
• Do not cross cables between probes.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
$FWLYDWLQJWKH3UREH
When a probe is connected to the unit, it is automatically detected by
the unit.
To activate a probe while scanning a patient:
1. Press Probe on the control panel. The Select Probe and
Application screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-4 (Pro) and
Figure 13-5 (Expert).
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the required probe and application and press Select.
The probe and application are selected.
Select
&RXSOLQJ*HOV
During an ultrasound scan, a conductive gel or couplant must be
applied liberally to the probe to ensure optimal transmission of energy
between the patient and the probe.
Caution: Coupling gels should not contain ingredients known to cause probe
damage, such as:
• Methanol, ethanol, isopropanol or any other alcohol-based product

• Mineral Oil
• Iodine
• Lotions
• Lanolin
• Aloe Vera
• Olive Oil
• Methyl or Ethyl Parabens (para hydroxybenzoic acid)
• Demethylsilicone

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
'LVFRQQHFWLQJWKH3UREH
Probes can be disconnected at any time from the Vivid 3 Pro/
Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit, regardless of whether the unit is on or
off.
To disconnect probes:
1. Rotate the probe connector lock counterclockwise to unlock, as
shown below:
Lock
Unlock
Figure 13-7: Disconnecting a Probe
2. Ease the connector from the port.
3. Ensure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its
storage box.
Note: All probes not connected to the unit should be stored in their provided
storage cases.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
&DUHDQG0DLQWHQDQFH
Follow the maintenance schedule below to ensure optimum operation
and safety.
Task After Each Use Daily
Inspect the Probes x
Clean the Probes x

Disinfect the Probes x
This section details the maintenance tasks, and includes the following
topics:
• Inspecting Probes, page 13-12.
• Cleaning Probes, page 13-13.
• Disinfecting Probes, page 13-15.
Warning: Improper handling can lead to early probe failure and electric shock
hazards. Follow the specific cleaning and disinfection procedures provided in
this chapter and the germicide manufacturor’s instructions. Failure to do so will
void probe warranty.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
,QVSHFWLQJ3UREHV
Inspect the lens, cable and housing of a probe following each use. Look
for damage that might allow liquid into the probe. Inspect the probe
prior to use for damage to, or degeneration of, the housing, strain relief,
lens and seal.
Warning: If any damage is found, do not use the probe until it has been
repaired by a GE service representative.
Keep a maintenance log and note all probe malfunctions.
Strain relief
Housing Seal
Lens
Figure 13-8: Probe Parts

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
&OHDQLQJ3UREHV
Probes should be kept clean in order to maintain optimal performance
and avoid risk of disease transmission.
Warning: When cleaning a probe, ensure that its immersion level does not
exceed that shown in Figure 13-9.
To clean the probe:

1. After each use of a probe, disconnect it from the unit and remove all
coupling gel, by wiping the probe with a soft cloth and rinsing with
water.
2. Wash the probe with mild soap in lukewarm water, taking care not to
immerse it past the level indicated in its immersion diagram, shown
in Figure 13-9.
3. Scrub the probe with a soft sponge, gauze or cloth to remove all
residue from its surface. Prolonged soaking or scrubbing with a soft
bristle brush may be necessary if material has dried onto the
surface of the probe.
4. Rinse the probe with clean water to remove all soap residue.
5. Air dry or dry with a soft cloth.
6. Disinfect the probe, as described in the following section.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
3S
M3S
5S 10S
7S 2D
6D
Fluid Level
7L
5C 10L
3.5C 12L
Contact level with

patient environment
Figure 13-9: Probe Immersion Levels

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
'LVLQIHFWLQJ3UREHV
Ultrasound probes must undergo high-level disinfection and be covered
by a sterile sheath, using sterile techniques, when performing scans
where the skin surface is compromised (for example, during biopsy or
intraoperative procedures). High-level disinfection can be achieved
using a liquid chemical germicide.
The recommended germicide for this use on all GE probes is Cidex (not
Cidex 7 nor Cidex Plus). Cidex has been evaluated and found to be
compatible with the probe materials. Please refer to the Reference
Manual for alternative germicides that can be used.
For proper handling and exposure times, always refer to the labeling
provided with the germicide for high-level disinfection.
All visible residue must be removed during the cleaning process to

ensure effectiveness of the germicide.
To disinfect the probe:

1. Prepare the germicide solution according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. Follow the manufacturer’s precautions for storage, use
and disposal.
2. Place the clean, dried probe in contact with the germicide for the
time duration specified by the manufacturer.
Note: High-level disinfection is recommended for surface probes and is

required for transesophageal probes. Follow the germicide manufacturer’s
recommended contact time.
3. After removing the probe from the germicide, rinse it according to

the germicide manufacturer’s instructions. Flush all germicide
residue from the probe and air dry.
4. Reconnect the probe to the unit, or store it in its container.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
Warning: Follow the precautions listed below to prevent serious injury or

equipment damage.
• Do not immerse the probe in liquid beyond the level specified for that
probe. Never immerse the probe connector or probe adapters in liquid.
• Do not soak or saturate probes with solutions containing alcohol,
bleach, ammonium chloride compounds or hydrogen peroxide.
• Avoid contact with solutions or coupling gels containing mineral oil or
lanolin.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
3UREH6DIHW\
This section includes information on hazards to both the user and the
equipment, as follows:
• Electrical Hazards, below.
• Mechanical Hazards, below.
• Biological Hazards, page 13-18.
(OHFWULFDO+D]DUGV
Probes are driven by electricity, which can injure the patient or user
when exposed to contact with conductive solution.
• DO NOT immerse the probe into any liquid beyond the level shown
in Figure 13-9. Never immerse the probe connector or adaptors into
any liquid.
• DO NOT subject the probes to mechanical shock or impact, which
may result in cracks or chips in the housing and degraded
performance.
• Inspect the probe before and after each use, as described in the
Inspecting Probes section, page 13-12, for damage or degradation
to the housing, strain relief, lens and seal.
• DO NOT apply excessive force to the probe cable, to prevent
insulation failure.
• Electrical leakage checks should be performed regularly by a GE
service representative or qualified hospital personnel. Refer to the
Service Manual for leakage check procedures.
0HFKDQLFDO+D]DUGV
Take the following precautions to avoid mechanical hazards.
• Observe immersion levels, as shown in Figure 13-9.
• DO NOT apply excessive force when inserting or manipulating the
transesophageal probe.
• Inspect probes for sharp edges or rough surfaces that could injure
sensitive tissue.
• DO NOT bend or pull the cable forcefully, to avoid mechanical
shock or impact to the probe.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
%LRORJLFDO+D]DUGV
To minimize disease transmission, legally marketed, sterile,
pyrogen-free sheaths should be used for each probe recommended for
biopsy, intracavity, or intraoperative procedures. The flexible,
disposable sheath should cover the probe and the probe cable.
To reorder sheaths, contact:
CIVCO Medical Instruments Co., Inc.
102 Highway 1
South Kalona, Iowa 52247
U.S.A.
Caution: Adequate cleaning and disinfection are essential to prevent disease

transmission. It is the responsibility of the user to verify and maintain the
effectiveness of the infection control procedures in use. Always use sterile,
legally marketed probe sheaths for transesophageal procedures.
Caution: Devices containing latex may cause severe allergic reactions. Refer
to Medical Alert on Latex Products, FDA, March 29, 1991, in the Reference
Manual for further information.
Caution: DO NOT use pre-lubricated condoms as a sheath for a probe.

Lubricants in condoms may not be compatible with probe construction.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
3UREH7\SHV
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit supports four types of
probes:
• Phased Array Sector Probes: Phased Array Sector probes are
designated by the suffix "S"; the multi-plane TEE probe is
designated by the prefix "P" or the suffix "T".
• Continuous Wave Doppler Probes: Continuous Wave Doppler
probes are designated by the prefix "P" and the suffix "D".
• Curved Array (Convex) Probes: Convex probes are usually
designated by the prefix/suffix "C".
• Linear Array Probes: Linear Array probes are designated by the
prefix/suffix "L".
• Intraoperative Probes: Intraoperative probes are designated by
the prefix "i" or "T".
This section describes the various probe types, their capabilities,
functions and operating frequencies.
3UREH1DPLQJ&RQYHQWLRQV
In the probe examples listed below, the letters and numbers relate to
the probe naming conventions.
Probe Name Conventions Type
C358 C - Type Convex Linear

3 - Center Frequency
58 - Array Aperture
(mm)
P2D P - Type Pencil CW

2 - Center Frequency
D - Doppler

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
3UREH'HILQLWLRQV
The designations of the letters in the name of a probe are defined as
follows:
Designation Definition
B Bipolar Endocavity
E Endo
L Linear
S Sector
C Curved
i or T Intraoperative
T or P TEE (Single or Multiplane)
P or D CW Doppler

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
3KDVHG$UUD\6HFWRU3UREHV
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit operates with the 3S,
5S, 7S, 10S, PAMTEE (5T), 6T, 8T and P509 phased array sector
probes, as described on the following pages.
63UREH
Probe 3S
Catalog No. H4550SZ
Description General purpose sector

probe. Operational in the
following modes:
• 2D-Mode
• M-Mode
• Color M-Mode
• Doppler (PW & CW) Mode
• Color Flow
• Power Doppler
Intended Uses • General Cardiology

• Pediatric Cardiology
• Transcranial
• Vascular
Features • Small footprint

• Wideband for 2D-Mode
resolution and
homogeneity
• CFM/Doppler sensitivity
• Ergonomics for scanning
and cleaning
• Wide field of view
• Steerable Doppler
Image Frequency 1.5 - 3.6
Doppler Frequency 1.8 - 2.5
Figure 13-10: 3S Probe

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
63UREH
Probe 5S
Catalog No. H4901RA

following modes:
• 2D-Mode
• M-Mode
• Color M-Mode
• Color Flow Mode
• Power Doppler Mode

• Vascular

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
63UREH
Probe 7S
Catalog No. H4000P

following modes:
• 2D-Mode
• M-Mode
• Color M-Mode
• Color Flow Mode

• Neonatal head
• Vascular

• Wideband for 2D-Mode
resolution and
homogeneity
and cleaning

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
63UREH
Probe 10S
Catalog No. H4901PC

following modes:
• 2D-Mode
• M-Mode
• Color M-Mode
• Color Flow Mode
Intended Uses • Pediatric Cardiology

• Neonatal head
• Vascular

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
73UREH
Probe 5T
Catalog No. H48301B

following modes:
• 2D-Mode
• M-Mode
• Color M-Mode
• Doppler (PW & CW)
Mode
• Color Flow Mode
• Transesophageal
Features • Multi-plane imaging

• Small footprint
• Good 2D-Mode resolution
• CFM/Doppler Sensitivity
• Ergonomics for
manipulation of the
handle
Figure 13-14: 5T Probe

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
73UREH
Probe 6T
Catalog No. H45001YD

following modes:
• 2D-Mode
• M-Mode
• Color M-Mode
Mode
• Color Flow Mode
• Transesophageal


2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
73UREH
Probe 8T
Catalog No. H4500YE

following modes:
• 2D-Mode
• M-Mode
• Color M-Mode
Mode
• Color Flow Mode
Intended Uses • Pediatric Cardiology
• Transesophageal


2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
33UREH -DSDQ2QO\
Probe P509
Catalog No. H44201TG

following modes:
• 2D-Mode
• M-Mode
• Color M-Mode
Mode
• Color Flow Mode
• Transesophageal

Figure 13-17: P509 Probe

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
1RQ,PDJLQJ'RSSOHU3HQFLO3UREHV
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit operates with the
non-imaging CW pencil probes described on the following pages.
' 3' 3UREH
Probe 2D (P2D)
Catalog No. H4830JE
Description Non-imaging pencil probe

for obtaining Continuous
Wave Doppler data.
Operational in Doppler CW
Mode.
Intended Uses Cardiology
Doppler Frequency 2.0
Figure 13-18: 2D (P2D) Probe

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
' 3' 3UREH
Probe 6D (P6D)
Catalog No. H4830JG
Description Non-imaging pencil probe

for obtaining Continuous
Wave Doppler data.
Operational in Doppler CW
Mode.
Intended Uses • Carotid

• Vascular
• Extremities
Figure 13-19: 6D (P6D) Probe

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
&XUYHG$UUD\ &RQYH[ 3UREHV

The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit operates with the C358
Curved Array probe.
&3UREH
Probe C358
Catalog No. H40212LC

Description General purpose curved array
(convex) probe. Operational
in the following modes:
• 2D-Mode
• M-Mode
• Color Flow Mode
• Doppler PW Mode
Intended Uses • Abdominal

• OB/GYN
• Vascular
Capabilities • Wide field of view

• Penetration
• Multi-focus 2D
and cleaning
Figure 13-20: C358 Curved Array Probe

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
/LQHDU$UUD\3UREHV
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit operates with the 7L,
10L, i739 and T739 linear array sector probes, as described on the
following pages.
/ / 3UREH
Probe 7L
Catalog No. H40412LF
Description General purpose linear

following modes:
• 2D-Mode
• M-Mode
• Doppler PW Mode
• Color Flow Mode

• Lower and upper
extremities
• Superficial
• Vascular
Features • Multi-focus 2D
Figure 13-21: 7L (546L) Probe

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
/ / 3UREH
Probe 10L
Catalog No. H40412LG

Description General purpose linear
following modes:
• 2D-Mode
• M-Mode
• Doppler PW Mode
• Color Flow Mode

• Lower and upper
extremities
• Superficial
• Vascular
Figure 13-22: 10L (739L) Probe

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
L3UREH
Probe i739
Catalog No. H40212LF
Description Intraoperative linear probe.

Operational in the following
modes:
• 2D-Mode
• M-Mode
• Doppler PW Mode
• Color Flow Mode
Intended Uses • General

• Intraoperative
Figure 13-23: i739 Probe

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
73UREH
Probe T739
Catalog No. H40212LM
Description Intraoperative linear probe.

Operational in the following
modes:
• 2D-Mode
• M-Mode
• Doppler PW Mode
• Color Flow Mode
Intended Uses • General

• Intraoperative
Figure 13-24: T739 Probe

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
$GDSWHU
Adapter
Catalog No. H45001YF

Description Adapter that connects the
following Vivid FiVe and
System FiVe probes to the
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3
Expert:
• PAMPTE (H4830KK)
• GTv (H45011AA)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
%LRSV\
The following section describes how to use the biopsy guide bracket.
%LRSV\*XLGH%UDFNHW,QVWUXFWLRQV
Ensure that protective gloves are worn when working with the biopsy
guide.
To attach the Ultra-Pro™ biopsy guide:
1. Remove the probe from its holder or carrying case and carefully
examine it for any damage.
2. Clean and high-level disinfect the probe.
3. Locate the appropriate biopsy guide bracket by matching the label

on the biopsy guide bracket with the probe ID label (227s, 546L,
739L, and so on.)
4. With the GE probe ID label facing the user (probe orientation

marker on the left), slide the biopsy guide bracket onto the end of
the probe until it clicks and locks in place. The needle clip should be
on the same side as the probe’s orientation (scan direction) marker.
Caution: The biopsy guide bracket must be installed correctly, in order

to properly execute the biopsy and avoid injury due to needle
positioning error.
5. Inspect a sterile sheath to ensure it is free of holes and defects.
6. Place a sufficient amount of coupling gel on the probe face.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Probes
7. Place the probe sheath over the probe and biopsy guide bracket.
Wrap the sheath around the cable and secure the sheath with
elastic bands. Rub a finger over the tip of the probe to ensure that
all air bubbles have been removed.
Caution: Devices containing latex may cause severe allergic reactions.

Refer to Medical Alert on Latex Products, FDA, March 29, 1991, in the
Reference Manual for further information.
8. Snap the needle clip onto the biopsy guide bracket.
9. Select the needle barrel with the desired gauge (remove the needle
barrel from the plastic ring by twisting it back and forth).
10. Snap the needle barrel into the needle clip, with the desired gauge
toward the body of the needle clip.
A description of specific biopsy needle attachments will be included in a

later version of this manual.
7UDQVHVRSKDJHDO3UREH
Refer to the Multiplane TE Probe User Manual, enclosed with the
probe. The manual includes detailed maintenance and safety issues.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Presets and System Setup
&KDSWHU
3UHVHWVDQG6\VWHP6HWXS
,QWURGXFWLRQ
This chapter describes how to select and modify application presets,
and how to configure system parameters, and includes the following
sections:
• Application Presets, below, describes the procedures for
modifying factory presets and creating customized presets.
• System Configuration, page 14-9, describes the procedures for
configuring system settings, such as footswitch operation and
weight unit preferences, via the System Configuration window.
• Users, page 14-72, describes user groups and the user logon
procedure.
$SSOLFDWLRQ3UHVHWV
Application presets, which determine the settings a probe will use for
the study, are configured for each probe type. The presets are selected
in the Select Probe and Application screen. The name of the current
application preset is displayed in the title bar at the top of the screen
when in any scanning mode.
There are three different types of presets:
• Factory-defined presets: Supplied as part of the system.
• User-modified presets: Modified by the user and saved under the
factory-defined name.
• User-created presets: New presets created and defined by the
user, and saved under a unique name.
Important: New preset settings are valid only for the specific combination of
probe, application icon and patient type. Any other combination is not affected
by the preset modification.
Note: There is no way of distinguishing between the different types of presets

when the Preset List is displayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6HOHFWLQJDQ$SSOLFDWLRQ3UHVHW
The application presets to be used in an exam are selected in the
Select Probe and Application screen. Different probe application
presets can be selected during scanning.
Notes:
• The Select Probe and Application screen on the Vivid 3 Pro ultrasound
unit will display three possible probe connections, two active probes and
one pencil probe.
• The Select Probe and Application screen on the Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound
unit will display four possible probe connections, three active probes and
one pencil probe.
To select a probe application preset:

Probe 1. Press Probe on the control panel,
OR
Press Preset on the alphanumeric keyboard.

One of the following Select Probe and Application screens is
displayed:

2300163-100 Rev. 0
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the required application preset, and press Select. The
system settings for all the scanning modes are adjusted
accordingly, and the user can begin scanning.
Note: The name of the selected preset is displayed in the title bar of the
Select
screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0RGLI\LQJ)DFWRU\'HILQHG3UHVHWV
Application presets can be modified as required. Modifications of a
factory-defined application preset can be saved under the
factory-defined name (user-modified), or as a new preset with a new
name (user-created).
8VHU0RGLILHG3UHVHWV
When the factory-defined presets for an application are modified and
saved under the factory-defined name, the preset becomes a
user-modified application preset. User-modified application presets are
only available to members of the user group active when the
modifications were made.
Notes:
• Factory presets can be restored. For details, refer to the Restoring

Factory-Defined Presets section, page 14-6.
• For details on user groups, refer to the Users section,
page 14-72.
To modify a factory preset:
1. Select the probe and application preset, as described in the
Selecting an Application Preset section, page 14-2.
2. Adjust the scanning parameters in any of the scanning modes, as

required.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
3. While the unit is in scanning mode, simultaneously press

<Ctrl> + <Preset> on the alphanumeric keyboard. The Save Preset
dialog box is displayed. The name of the application preset appears
+ in the title bar of the dialog box, for example Cardiac.
Figure 14-3: Save Preset Dialog Box
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to Save current and press Select to save the

user-modified preset under the factory-defined preset name.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
5HVWRULQJ)DFWRU\'HILQHG3UHVHWV
User-modified application presets can be restored to the original factory
default, if required. A preset can be restored to the
factory-defined settings at any time during the operation of the unit.
Important: Only user-modified presets can be restored to their original settings.
Note: If the Restore Factory on-screen button is disabled (grey), the selected
preset is a user-created preset and not a user-modified preset. There is no
factory default for user-created presets.
To restore factory presets:

Application screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 14-1 (Pro) or
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the application preset for which the factory preset
settings are to be restored, then press Select to highlight the
preset.
Select
3. Simultaneously press <Ctrl> + <Preset> on the alphanumeric

keyboard. The Save Preset dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 14-3.
+
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to Restore Factory and press Select. The factory

preset settings are restored.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
8VHU&UHDWHG$SSOLFDWLRQ3UHVHWV
User-created application presets are new presets created by a user,
stored under new names. The user-created presets are only available
to members of the user group active when they were defined. Only
user-created application presets can be permanently deleted from the
system.
To create a new user-created application preset:
1. Select a probe and application preset, as described in the Selecting
an Application Preset section, page 14-2.
2. Adjust the scanning parameters as required.
3. While the unit is in scanning mode, simultaneously press

<Ctrl> + <Preset> on the alphanumeric keyboard. The Save Preset
dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 14-3.
+
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the Create new field and use the alphanumeric
keyboard to type a name for the new application preset.
Keyboard
7
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to Save with new Name, and press Select to save the
new preset under the newly created name.
Important: Ensure that the preset is saved under a unique name. If a

Select factory-defined or user-modified preset name is used, the previous
preset will be replaced and lost.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To delete a user-created application preset:

Application screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 14-1 (Pro) or
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the name of the user-created preset that is to be

deleted. The name is highlighted.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to Delete and press Select. The application preset is

deleted.
Important: Only user-created presets can be deleted from the system.

Select Factory-defined presets and user-modified presets cannot be deleted.
The on-screen Delete button will be disabled (grey) when a
factory-defined or user-modified preset is selected.
6DYLQJ$SSOLFDWLRQ3UHVHWV
Any changes made to application presets are user-group specific,
meaning that they apply only to members of the user group active when
the changes were made.
All system configurations, including the application presets for a
specific user group, can be saved to disk for backup.
Note: Refer to the System Tab section on page 14-11 for details on saving
application presets to disk and loading application presets from disk.
Once saved to disk, the presets can be restored to the same unit and
user group, or copied to another unit or another user group.
Note: For details on user groups, refer to the Users section on page 14-72.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6\VWHP&RQILJXUDWLRQ
The System Configuration window enables the user to customize
various settings and preferences related to basic operating parameters,
using the following tabs:
• Hospital Info Tab, page 14-11.
• System Tab, page 14-11.
• MA Options Tab, page 14-24.
• Archive Tab, page 14-34.
• Stress Tab, page 14-38.
• Report Tab, page 14-42.
• VCR/ECG Tab, page 14-46.
• Annotation Settings Tab, page 14-49.
• System Options Tab, page 14-53.
• Vocabulary Tab, page 14-55.
• Printers Tab, page 14-59.
• Connectivity Tab, page 14-63.
• Miscellaneous Tab, page 14-71.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To perform system configurations:

Configuration window is displayed, with the Hospital Info tab
selected.
Figure 14-4: Hospital Info Tab
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the required tab and press Select.
3. Configure the parameters, as described on the following pages.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
+RVSLWDO,QIR7DE
The Hospital Info tab, which is displayed automatically when the
System Configuration window is opened, as shown in Figure 14-3,
enables the user to configure basic information about the facility, such
as its name, address and telephone and fax numbers.
• The contents of the Institution Name field are displayed in the title
bar of the screen in every scan mode. The remaining fields may
appear on printed reports.
• The Installation Date field displays the date on which the system
was delivered to the hospital. This date is entered by the GE
customer service representative.
6\VWHP7DE
The System tab enables the user to configure display-related settings,
such as the system date and time, and to define the footswitch
operation.
Figure 14-5: System Tab

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Time Out Area

The Time Out (sec) area enables the user to specify the amount of
time (in seconds) after which the following functions are displayed or
hidden:
STANDBY Timeout: The amount of time after which the system

switches to Standby Mode when it is not
being used.
Hide Clipboard: The amount of time after which the clipboard

display is hidden.
Soft Menu Timeout: The amount of time after which the soft key
menu display is hidden.
Default PC Cursor Position Area
The Default PC Cursor Position area enables the user to specify the
default location of the PC cursor on screen.
Footswitch Area
The Footswitch area enables the user to define the functions that will
be performed when each of the three pedals on the footswitch is used.
Date/Time Area
The Date/Time area enables the user to set the system date and time,
and define the format of the date and time display.
Note: The date can only be adjusted one day forward or one day backward.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Use Password Checkbox

The Use Password checkbox enables the user to password-protect
the archived data in the system, thus ensuring patient confidentiality. If
this checkbox is selected (indicated by a checkmark ), the
User Log On dialog box is displayed automatically each time the
system is started. The system password must be entered in this dialog
box before the user is allowed to retrieve information from or save
information to the patient archive. If this checkbox is not selected, no
password is needed to access the archive.
Gate/ROI Move Field
The Gate/ROI Move field enables the user to select the movement
speed.
Keyboard Field
The Keyboard field enables the user to activate support of the
International text keyboard for French, German, Italian, Portuguese,
Spanish and Scandinavian languages, and other special characters.
To activate the International keyboard:
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the System tab and press Select. The System tab is
Select 3. TRACKBALL to International in the Keyboard dropdown list, and

press Select.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Once activated, the following procedure must be used to type

international and special characters.
To type international characters:
1. Simultaneously press and hold <Ctrl> + <Alt> on the alphanumeric
keyboard, with one hand.
+
2. Press the special character required with the other hand (press the
<Caps Lock> key when required).
Standard International International

Vivid 3 Pro/ Characters Characters
Vivid 3 Expert WITHOUT using Caps Using Caps Lock key
Key Lock key

2300163-100 Rev. 0

Key Lock key

2300163-100 Rev. 0

Key Lock key

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Language Field
The Language field enables the user to define the required language.
Preset Buttons
Three preset buttons appear on the bottom of the System tab.

• The Save Presets button enables the user to save application
presets, measurement and analysis configurations, stress
templates and system presets to diskettes.
• The Restore Presets button enables the user to restore presets
from diskettes. The user can restore settings that have become
corrupted, as well as transfer user-modified and user-created
presets from one user group to another, or from one machine to
another.
• The Restore Factory button removes all user-modified and
user-created presets, and reinstates the factory-defined presets.
Notes:
• The Save Presets, Restore Presets and Restore Factory buttons

apply only to the presets for the active user group. Therefore,
before saving or restoring presets, ensure that the user is logged on
to the correct user group.
• The user group name is displayed in the title bar of the Select Probe
and Application screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Application presets, measurement and analysis configurations, report

templates, stress templates and system presets can be saved to
diskettes, for backup or for transfer to a different unit.
To save presets to diskette:
1. Insert an empty PC-formatted diskette.

4. TRACKBALL to Save Presets and press Select. The Save Presets

Select screen is displayed, as shown below:
Figure 14-6: Save Presets Screen

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Note: The user cannot select individual presets. Instead, the user can
select any number of topics to be saved. These topics include, for example:
• Applic: All the probe application presets.
• M&A: All the M&A presets found in the MA Options tab.
• System: All the system related parameter presets found in the
System tab.
• Stress Templates: all the stress templates found in the Stress
Templates tab.
• Report Templates: All the report templates found in the Report
Templates tab.
• Network Properties: TCP/IP settings.
• Dataflow: All the dataflow items found in the Connectivity tab.
TRACKBALL 5. In the Select Topics area, TRACKBALL to the checkbox next to the
topic(s) to be saved and press Select. A next to the topic
indicates that it has been selected. All items belonging to that topic
will be saved.
Select
6. TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. The system saves the presets

to the disk.
TRACKBALL 7. TRACKBALL to CLOSE and press Select. The System tab is

redisplayed.
8. TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. The scanning screen is

Select redisplayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Loading or Restoring Presets from Disk

Presets saved on diskettes can be restored or loaded to any Vivid 3
Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit.
To load or restore presets from disk:
1. Insert a diskette containing previously saved presets.

Select 4. TRACKBALL to Restore Presets and press Select. The Restore

Presets screen is displayed, as shown below:
Figure 14-7: Restore Presets Screen

2300163-100 Rev. 0
topic(s) to be loaded or restored from the diskette and press Select.
A next to the topic indicates that it has been selected. Any
number of topics can be selected.
Select Note: Presets cannot be selected individually. Instead, topics are selected.
All the presets or settings belonging to the selected topic(s) are loaded.
TRACKBALL 6. TRACKBALL to Restore and press Select. The system loads the
presets, overwriting user-modified presets belonging to that topic.
Select 7. TRACKBALL to CLOSE and press Select. The System tab is

redisplayed.
TRACKBALL 8. TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. The scanning screen is

redisplayed.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Restoring Factory Presets

Factory presets can be restored, as required. All user-modified and
user-created presets for the selected user group are overridden in this
procedure.
To restore factory presets:
Select 3. TRACKBALL to Restore Factory and press Select. The Restore

Factory Presets screen is displayed, as shown below:
Figure 14-8: Restore Factory Presets Screen

2300163-100 Rev. 0
topic(s) to be restored and press Select. A next to the topic
indicates that it has been selected. All items belonging to that topic
are restored.
Select
5. TRACKBALL to Restore and press Select. The system loads the

presets, overwriting user-modified presets belonging to that topic.
TRACKBALL 6. TRACKBALL to CLOSE and press Select. The System tab is

redisplayed.
Select 7. TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. The scanning screen is

redisplayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0$2SWLRQV7DE
The MA Options tab enables the user to select the tools that will be
available in Measurement and Analysis modes. These tools include
menus, studies, parameters in each study, and so on.
Figure 14-9: MA Options Tab/Tools Subsidiary Tab
The MA Options tab contains the following four subsidiary tabs:

• Tools Tab, page 14-27.
• Studies Tab, page 14-28.
• Assignment Tab, page 14-30.
• Worksheet Tab, page 14-31.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0$2SWLRQV7DE&RQILJXUDWLRQ
The functions in each of the MA Options tab’s subsidiary tabs are
selected and configured as described below.
To configure functions and select items in the MA Options tab:

TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the MA Options tab and press Select.
3. TRACKBALL to the required subsidiary tab and press Select. The tab
Select is displayed, enabling the user to select items (studies, parameters,
measurements and so on) and configure the function to which the
tab relates.
Select 4. Press Select on the items or parameters that are to be available. A

in the box adjacent to an item indicates that the item that has
been selected. This means that the item will be available when the
currently active Measurement and Analysis package is selected.
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to either OK or Cancel and press Select to save or

cancel configuration changes and return to the basic scanning
screen.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To rearrange the order of items and assign the default tool:

TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the MA Options tab and press Select.
3. TRACKBALL to the required subsidiary tab and press Select. The tab
Select is displayed, enabling the user to select items (studies, parameters,
measurements and so on) and configure the function to which the
tab relates.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the item (tool, study, parameter, and so on) to be

moved and press Select.
Important: Not all items can be moved. If the order option is available,
up and down arrow buttons are displayed.
Select
5. TRACKBALL to the up or down arrow buttons to the right of the items

list and press Select to move the item up or down, as required. The
order of the items in the list corresponds to the order in which they
are displayed in the Measurement and Analysis menus.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
7RROV7DE
The Tools tab enables the user to select tools and results parameters
for Measure and Assign measurements. The Tools tab contains the
following two areas, as shown in Figure 14-9.
• Tools List: A complete list of all the tools that are available for all
modes. In the Tools List area, the user can control which of the
available tools is displayed and the order in which they are
displayed.
Note: The first selected tool in the Tools subsidiary tabs Tools List area is
the default tool. The default tool is automatically assigned to soft key
position three (upper-left).
• Results List: The outputs or results of every tool selected in the

Tools List area. Some tools have multiple results. The user can
control which of the available outputs is displayed and the order in
which they are displayed.
Note: Refer to page 14-26 for the procedure for rearranging the order of
items.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6WXGLHV7DE
The Studies tab enables the user to select the studies that are
available for Assign and Measure measurements, as well as the
measurements included in each study, and the measured parameters.
Figure 14-10: MA Options Tab/Studies Subsidiary Tab

2300163-100 Rev. 0
The Studies tab contains the following three areas, as shown in

Figure 14-10.
• Studies List: A complete list of all the studies available for all
modes, for example, LV Vol 2CH (2D-Mode) or LA/Ao(M) (M-Mode).
• Measurement Lists: A complete list of all the measurements for a
study selected and highlighted in the Studies List area, when
applicable. The user can select or deselect measurements, as well
as change the order of the measurements.
• Measured Parameters List: A complete list of all the parameters
for a measurement selected and highlighted in the Measurement
Lists area, when applicable. The user can select or deselect
parameters, as well as change the order of the parameters. These
parameters are displayed in the results box during measurement.
Note: Measurements and measured parameters can be included or excluded
by selecting or deselecting the checkboxes, and the order of the measurements
can be adjusted by using the up and down arrows, as described in the
MA Options Tab Configuration section, page 14-25.
Two options can be selected for each study selected in the Studies
List area:
• Autojump: When this option is selected (indicated by a
checkmark ), the system will automatically jump to the next
measurement in the study. When this option is not selected, the
user is required to manually select the next measurement.
• Remain in study upon scan: When this option is selected
(indicated by a checkmark ), the user will return to the same
study after deselecting Freeze Mode. When this option is
deselected, the user system exits the Measurement and
Analysis package after the user deselects Freeze Mode.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$VVLJQPHQW7DE
The Assignment tab enables the user to select the parameters for use
with Measure and Assign measurements. The parameters are listed
according to tools/modes.
Figure 14-11: MA Options Tab/Assignment Subsidiary Tab
Note: Parameters can be included or excluded by selecting or deselecting the

checkboxes, and the order of the parameters can be adjusted by using the up
and down arrows, as described in the MA Options Tab Configuration section,
page 14-25.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
:RUNVKHHW7DE
The Worksheet tab enables the user to configure the measurements
that are included in Worksheets by selecting them from the appropriate
list.
Figure 14-12: MA Options Tab/Worksheet Subsidiary Tab

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Vascular Applications
When a vascular application is selected, the Worksheet tab displays
the following areas:
• The Parameters List area on the left lists each of the available
vascular measurement parameters.
• The Custom Configuration area on the right lists each of the
available vascular measurement groups.
To select or deselect a group of measurements:
TRACKBALL • TRACKBALL to the group in the Custom Configuration area and
press Select. The group is selected, indicated by a checkmark
in the checkbox adjacent to the group name. The appropriate
measurements are automatically selected in the Parameters
List area, indicated by a checkmark in the checkboxes
Select adjacent to the measurement names.
TRACKBALL • To deselect a group of measurements, TRACKBALL to the group

in the Custom Configuration area and press Select. The
group is deselected, indicated by an empty checkbox adjacent
to the group name. The appropriate measurements are
automatically deselected in the Parameters List area, indicated
Select by empty checkboxes adjacent to the measurement names.
Cardiac and OB/GYN Applications

When a Cardiac, OB or GYN application is selected, the Worksheet
tab displays a list of all the available measurements. The
measurements can be selected as described in the MA Options Tab
Configuration section, page 14-25.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0$2SWLRQV)HDWXUHV
The following five optional features are found at the bottom of each of
the MA Options subsidiary tabs:
• Clear on Cine Scroll: When this option is selected (indicated by a
checkmark ), the measurements overlay is cleared and removed
from the cineloop immediately when the Scroll Cine rotary is used.
If this option is not selected, the measurements overlay will remain
on the cineloop, even though the cine has been scrolled.
• M TimeLine: When this option is selected (indicated by a
checkmark ), a horizontal time line drawn through the caliper will
be displayed across the whole image when the user is working in
M-Mode.
• M DepthLine: When this option is selected (indicated by a
checkmark ), a vertical depth line drawn through the caliper will be
displayed across the whole image when the user is working in
M-Mode.
• S TimeLine: When this option is selected (indicated by a
checkmark ), a horizontal time line drawn through the caliper will
be displayed across the whole image when the user is working in
Doppler Mode.
• S FreqLine: When this option is selected (indicated by a checkmark
), a vertical frequency line drawn through the caliper will be
displayed across the whole image when the user is working in
Doppler Mode.
Note: It is possible to select the Time/Depth or Time/Frequency displays

simultaneously. In this case, both a horizontal line and a vertical line will be
displayed through the caliper.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$UFKLYH7DE
The Archive tab enables the user to set general parameters related to
the Archive function, including:
• Cineloop viewing.
• Patient information.
• Confirmation of deletion commands.
• Type of backup device.
• Ejection of backup media upon shutdown.
• Export file paths.
• Split screen management.
• FlexiView automatic storage time intervals.
• Back-up on power off.
Figure 14-13: Archive Tab
Important: The Archive tab is displayed even if the Archive Package option is
not installed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Backup Patient Archive on Power Off
When this option is selected (indicated by a checkmark ), the system

will back-up all alphanumeric data to the user partition of the hard disk
when shut down.
Note: As the backup process takes some time, selecting this option will effect
the timing of the shutdown procedure.
Display Patient’s Gender On Screen
When this option is selected (indicated by a checkmark ), the patient’s

gender is displayed in the patient information area of the scanning
screen.
Note: Gender is not displayed in OB applications.
Delete Confirmation
When this option is selected (indicated by a checkmark ), the user is

always prompted to confirm a delete command. When this option is not
selected, delete commands are completed without user confirmation.
Weight Units
This field enables the user to select the weight unit (kg. or lb.) to be
used during examinations, as well as in the Patients Details pages.
Height Units
This field enables the user to select the height unit (cm. or in.) to be
used during examinations, as well as in the Patients Details pages.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Patient ID Page Type

This field enables the user to select one of the following four screen
layout templates for the Patient ID/Details pages.
• Type A: Displays the Patient ID, Last and First Name, Weight,
Height, BSA, BP, and other fields.
• Type B: Displays all the fields as Type A with the exception of
Patient ID.
• Type C: Displays all the fields as Type A with the exception of
Patient ID, Weight, Height, or BSA. It also displays the Sonographer
Name.
• Type D: Displays all the fields as Type A with the exception of
Patient ID, Weight, Height, BSA, BP and Sonographer Name.
Title Additional Patient Info

This field enables the user to select additional data to be displayed in
the patient information area of the scanning screen’s title bar. The
default setting is Label, enabling either free text format or an empty
field. Other options include Label & Age, Age, and Date of Birth.
Note: In OB applications, the label will contain the LMP and will override any of
these selections.
Backup Device Is
This field enables the user to select the type of media to which data is
stored during a backup procedure. Options include MOD and CD-R.
Eject MO Disk on Shutdown
When this option is selected (indicated by a checkmark ), the system

automatically ejects the backup media when the unit is shut down.
Export Excel File Path

This field enables the user to define the location of ASCII files in the
user partition of the internal hard disk. The user can select the path to
the ASCII file storage location from the dropdown list displayed when
the on-screen Browse button is selected.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Enter From Halves to Quad
When this option is selected (indicated by a checkmark ), Quad View

is enabled. The user can use the 1/2/4 button on the control panel to
toggle between viewing a single image, two images or four images on
the screen simultaneously. When this option is not selected, Quad View
is disabled. The user can only use the 1/2/4 button on the control panel
to toggle between viewing a single image or two images on the screen
simultaneously.
Preview Cine Before Store
When this option is selected (indicated by a checkmark ), when the

user presses Store, cineloops will be viewed before they are stored.
The user must press Store a second time to perform the actual
cineloop storage. If Freeze is pressed before Store is pressed a
second time, the cineloop will not be saved. When this option is not
selected, cineloops are stored immediately the first time the user
presses Store.
FlexiView Time Interval (sec)

If the FlexiView option is installed, this field enables the user to
configure the automatic time-triggered cineloop storage function in
FlexiView. At the end of the time period defined here (in seconds), a
cineloop is automatically stored in the archive, without interrupting the
user’s monitoring of the procedure.
Notes:
• For details on the FlexiView option, refer to the FlexiView section,

page 8-3.
• This option will be displayed even if the FlexiView option is not
installed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6WUHVV7DE
The Stress tab enables the user to manage stress templates, including:
• Stress template selection.
• Default stress template designation.
• Definition of the order of Quad View stress exams during Analyze
Mode.
Figure 14-14: Stress Tab
• The templates available in the system are listed in the left area.
• The templates activated for the Stress Package are listed in the
right area.
Important: The Stress tab will only be displayed if the Stress Package option
is installed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Activating Stress Templates

The user can define the stress templates activated for the currently
selected application.
To activate a stress template:
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the Stress tab and press Select. The Stress tab is
Select 3. TRACKBALL to the template to be activated from the list of available

templates in the left area, and press Select.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to and press Select to move the template to

the right area.
Select 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to activate additional templates.
Note: The stress templates are listed in the right area, and appear in the
application in the order that they are selected.
To remove a stress template from an application:

TRACKBALL 1. TRACKBALL to the template in the right area and press Select.
2. TRACKBALL to and press Select to move the template to

Select
the left area.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Assigning the Default Template

The first template listed in the right area is the default template.
To rearrange the template order and assign a default template:
Select 3. TRACKBALL to the template to be moved (in the right area) and press
Select to highlight the template.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the up or down arrow to the left of the template list
and press Select to move the template to the required location in
the list.
Note: The first template listed becomes the default template.

Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Deleting User-Created Stress Templates

User-created stress templates can be deleted from the system.
Factory-defined templates cannot be deleted.
To delete a user-created stress template:
Select
3. TRACKBALL to the template to be deleted from the available
templates listed in the left area, and press Select.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the Delete button and press Select.
Note: Refer to the Editing and/or Creating Stress Templates section,

page 5-24, for details on creating and editing stress templates.
Select
Stress Analyze Group Transpose

When this option is selected (indicated by a checkmark ), the order in
which comparison images are displayed in the Quad View during the
Analyze mode of a Stress exam is from left to right (side-to-side). When
this option is not selected, the images are displayed from top to bottom.
Note: Changes made to this option are reflected only in future exams.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
5HSRUW7DE
The Report tab enables the user to set general parameters related to
reports, including:
• Report template selection for specific applications.
• User-defined report template creation.
• Default report template designation.
Figure 14-15: Report Tab

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Activating Report Templates

The user can define the report templates activated for the currently
selected application.
• All of the available factory-defined templates, and any user-created
templates for the selected application are listed in the left area. The
templates belong to the application selected from the dropdown list
above the left area.
• All the templates that the user has selected which are currently
active are listed in the right area. These templates are active for the
specific application, selected from the dropdown list above the right
area.
Important: Every application will contain a different set of factory-defined (and

user-created) templates. The user can customize each application’s active
template list.
To activate a report template:

TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the Report tab and press Select. The Report tab is
Select 3. TRACKBALL to the application from which the templates are to be

activated in the dropdown list above the left area, and press Select.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the application for which the template is to be

activated in the dropdown list above the right area, and press
Select.
Select 5. TRACKBALL to the template to be activated from the list of available

templates in the left area, and press Select.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
TRACKBALL 6. TRACKBALL to the arrow and press Select to move the

template to the right area.
Select 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to activate additional templates.
The report templates are listed in the right area, and appear in the
application in the order that they are selected.
To deactivate a report template:

3. TRACKBALL to the application from which the templates are to be

Select deactivated in the dropdown list above the left area, and press
Select.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the application for which the template is to be

deactivated in the dropdown list above the right area, and press
Select.
Select 5. TRACKBALL to the template to be deactivated from the list of

currently active templates in the right area, and press Select.
6. TRACKBALL to and press Select to move the template to

the left area.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to deactivate additional templates.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Assigning the Default Template

The first template listed in the right area of the Reports tab is the
default template.
To rearrange the template order and assign a default template:
Select 3. TRACKBALL to the template to be moved (in the right area) and press
Select to highlight the template.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the up or down arrow to the left of the template list
and press Select to move the template to the required location in
the list.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
9&5(&*7DE
The VCR/ECG tab enables the user to set parameters for the video
recorder and ECG unit connected to the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit.
Figure 14-16: VCR/ECG Tab

2300163-100 Rev. 0
VCR Options Area

The VCR Options area contains the following options:
• The Video Mode dropdown list enables the user to select the type
of video system (PAL or NTSC).
• The SmartVCR checkbox, when selected (indicated by a
checkmark ), enables Measurement and Analysis measurements
and calculations on recorded VCR images.
Note: For Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert integrated VCRs, a barcode is displayed

in the upper right of the screen during the recording process, indicating that the
option is enabled. For non-GE installed VCRs, a barcode is displayed in the
upper right of the screen at all times, if the SmartVCR option is selected,
regardless of whether recording is taking place.
• The Patient Name on Second Line checkbox enables the user to

swap the position of the first (Patient Name and ID) and the second
(Institution Name) lines of the screen display. When this option is
selected (indicated by a checkmark ), the Patient Name and ID
will be displayed on the second line, and the Institution Name will be
displayed on the first line.
Note: This option should only be used for cases when an external monitor,
without the underscan option, is used for reviewing VCR playback. This option
ensures that the Patient Name and ID are displayed during review.
ECG and Phono Options Area

The ECG and Phono Options area enables the user to specify the
types of ECG and Phono connected to the unit, as well as the
parameters associated with them.
• In the ECG Exist, ECG External, Phono Exist and Phono Filter
fields, the user can select the appropriate checkboxes and options
for the units that are connected to the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit.
• In the No. of Periods to Store (auto-locate) field, the user can
define the number of heart cycles (1-4) of the frozen image that will
be displayed in the multiple screen/split screen when in freeze
mode.
• In the Standard Systole Time (msec) field, the user can define the
default systole time, which enables cineloop synchronization.
• In the Store time without ECG (msec) field, the user can define
the default length of a cineloop when there is no ECG trace.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Analyze Only Systole

When the Analyze only Systole checkbox is selected (indicated by a
checkmark ), the system places markers only on the systole portion,
for synchronization and analysis purposes.
Advanced Synchronization
When the Advanced Synchronization checkbox is selected (indicated
by a checkmark ), a special synchronization algorithm takes place.
This algorithm allows non-linear stretching of the time base to
compensate for non-linearity of the heart cycle between the resting HR
and elevated HR.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
$QQRWDWLRQ6HWWLQJV7DE
The Annotation Settings tab enables the user to define the primary
and secondary fonts used for annotations. In this tab, the user can
define the fonts (type, size and color), as well as the default position
(home location) of the text cursor on the screen when the Text key on
the alphanumeric keyboard is pressed.
Figure 14-17: Annotation Settings Tab

2300163-100 Rev. 0
&RQILJXULQJ)RQWV
The required font color, style and size of both the primary and
secondary fonts can be configured.
To configure the fonts:
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the Annotation Settings tab and press Select.
3. TRACKBALL to the font to be changed (Primary or Secondary) in the

Select Fonts area, and press Select. The font name is highlighted.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the Change button and press Select. The Font dialog
box is displayed, as shown below:
Select
Figure 14-18: Font Dialog Box

2300163-100 Rev. 0
5. Select the required font, color, style and size.
TRACKBALL TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. The Annotation Settings tab is

redisplayed.
Select
6HWWLQJWKH+RPH3RVLWLRQIRUWKH7H[W
&XUVRU
The user can set the home position for the text cursor in the System
Configuration window or during scanning, as described in the
procedures below.
To set the home position for the text cursor in the System
Configuration window:
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the Annotation Settings tab and press Select.
3. TRACKBALL to the Home Position for Text area, and adjust the X
Select and Y values as required.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To set the home position for the text cursor during scanning:
1. In any of the scanning screens, press Text on the alphanumeric
keyboard.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the location on the display to be set as the text

cursor’s home location.
Select
Menu 3. Press Menu on the control panel. A list of vocabulary terms is

displayed.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to Set Home Position and press Select. The X and Y
values of the text cursor position are recorded in the Annotation
Settings tab of the System Configuration window and set as the
default home location until redefined.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6\VWHP2SWLRQV7DE
The System Options tab enables the user to install optional features,
such as the Patient Archive, to the system.
Figure 14-19: System Options Tab

2300163-100 Rev. 0
,QVWDOOLQJ2SWLRQV
Optional features, such as ATO and the Patient Archive, can be
installed as required.
To install new options:
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the System Options tab and press Select. All the
possible options are displayed. Each installed option has the status
Installed.
Note: The option name and Key field for options that are not available for
Select the specific ultrasound unit will be disabled (grey).
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to the Key field next to the required option name, and
use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter the password supplied by
GE.
Keyboard
7
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to Apply and press Select. The status of the option
changes to Installed.
Select
Warning: If an incorrect password is entered in the Key field and the Apply
button is selected, the option, even if it has already been correctly installed in
the system, will be removed from the system.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
9RFDEXODU\7DE
The Vocabulary tab enables the user to add, modify, remove and
change the placement of vocabulary used in the Annotations Package.
Factory presets can also be restored.
Figure 14-20: Vocabulary Tab
Configurations are made for each application preset. The title bar near
the top of the tab will always show the name of the probe, the
application and the preset the user is working with, in the following
format: Probe/Application/Preset. The vocabulary of that specific probe
and application can be added to or modified.
Note: Ensure that the user is logged on to the correct preset before making any
changes.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0RGLI\LQJ9RFDEXODU\6HWWLQJV
The vocabulary settings for the currently selected application can be
modified as required.
To modify the vocabulary settings for an application preset:
Application screen is displayed.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the application preset whose vocabulary settings are

to be changed and press Select. The application preset name is
highlighted.
Select

TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the Vocabulary tab and press Select. The

Vocabulary tab is displayed. The name of the probe and
application preset is displayed in the title bar near the top of the
screen, under which the annotations configured for the application
preset are listed.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
5. Perform one of the following procedures:

TRACKBALL • To add an annotation, TRACKBALL to Add and press Select. The
Add dialog box is displayed, as shown below:
Select
Figure 14-21: Add Dialog Box
Keyboard • Use the alphanumeric keyboard to type the new annotation.

7
TRACKBALL • TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. The annotation is added
to the list in the Vocabulary tab, beneath the currently
selected annotation.
Select
• To modify an annotation, TRACKBALL to the annotation and press

Select. The annotation is highlighted.
• TRACKBALL to Modify and press Select. The Modify dialog
box is displayed, as shown below:
Figure 14-22: Modify Dialog Box

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Keyboard • Use the alphanumeric keyboard to modify the annotation.
7
TRACKBALL • TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. The annotation is
modified in the list in the Vocabulary tab, beneath the
currently selected annotation.
Select
TRACKBALL • To remove an annotation, TRACKBALL to the annotation and

press Select. The annotation is highlighted.
• TRACKBALL to Remove and press Select. The annotation is
removed from the selected application preset’s vocabulary
list.
Select
TRACKBALL • To restore factory presets, TRACKBALL to Restore Factory and

press Select. The selected application preset’s vocabulary list is
restored to its factory-defined settings.
TRACKBALL
Select
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
3ULQWHUV7DE
The Printers tab enables the user to configure and set the default
printer, calibrate the printer, as well as control the speed versus the
quality of the printout.
Figure 14-23: Printers Tab

2300163-100 Rev. 0
6HWWLQJWKH'HIDXOW3ULQWHU
The currently selected default printer is shown in the text box above the
option buttons in the Printers tab.
To set the default printer:
Configuration screen is displayed.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the Printers tab and press Select. The Printers tab
is displayed, as shown in Figure 14-23.
3. In the Currently Installed Printers area, TRACKBALL to the printer

Select that is to be selected as the default printer and press Select. The
printer is highlighted.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the Set as default button and press Select. The
selected printer is set as the default printer, and is shown in the text
box above the option buttons.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
&RQWUROOLQJWKH6SHHGYV4XDOLW\RI3ULQWRXWV
For faster printouts, Draft print quality is recommended, while for better
quality, Best print quality is recommended.
To control the speed and quality of printouts:
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the Printers tab and press Select. The Printers tab
is displayed, as shown in Figure 14-23.
Select 3. TRACKBALL to the Default Printer Settings button and press

Select. The Document Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown
below:
Figure 14-24: Document Properties Dialog Box

2300163-100 Rev. 0
4. Select the print quality according to the user requirements. For

details, please consult the HP DeskJet Printer User Guide.
TRACKBALL 5. When all necessary changes have been completed, TRACKBALL to

OK and press Select. The Printers tab is redisplayed.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
&RQQHFWLYLW\7DE
The Connectivity tab enables the user to view the connection and
communication setup of the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit
with other devices in the hospital information system.
• During normal operation, the Views subsidiary tab enables the user
to view and select dataflows, and verify network connections.
• The Tools subsidiary tab enables the user to format and verify
removable media.
• The Local Settings subsidiary tab enables the user to view the
local unit’s name, IP settings and network identification name.
Note: Additional tabs are available to service personnel. For details, refer to the
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert Service Manual.
Note: Refer to Chapter 11, Connectivity, for a detailed explanation of the

dataflows described in this section.
Figure 14-25: Connectivity Tab

2300163-100 Rev. 0
9LHZV6XEVLGLDU\7DE
The Views subsidiary tab provides three viewing options:
• Current Dataflow View, which displays the currently selected
dataflow, as well as the devices configured for the dataflow.
• Dataflow View, which displays all the dataflow options configured
for the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit, as well as the
devices configured for each dataflow.
• Network View, which displays the network structure, including all
the servers in the network, as well as the devices configured for
each server.
The structure of the tab remains identical in all the views:
• The Network area on the left side of the Views tab contains a
network tree, listing dataflows, as well as the devices and services
configured for each dataflow.
• The middle area of the Views tab provides buttons which enable
the user to select which network data is displayed in the Properties
area, or check a displayed service.
• The Properties area on the right side of the Views tab displays the
properties of the service currently selected in the Network area.
These properties are defined during service configuration.
Current
The Current button enables the user to access the Current Dataflow
View. In this view, the currently selected dataflow, as well as the
devices and services configured for the dataflow, are displayed.
The name of the dataflow is shown above the Network area. The type
of dataflow (input or output) and a list of services configured for the
dataflow are shown as part of the network tree.
The network connection of the device or service can be verified using
the Check button, as described in the Check section, page 14-66.
When a device is selected in the tree, the properties that were defined
for it during configuration are displayed in the Properties area.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Dataflow
The Dataflow button enables the user to access the Dataflow View. In
this view, the dataflows configured for the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit, as well as the devices configured for each dataflow, are
displayed.
The names of the dataflows, the type of devices associated with the
dataflows (input or output) and a list of devices configured for the
dataflow are shown as part of the network tree.
The network connection of the device or service can be verified using
the Check button, as described in the Check section, page 14-66.
When a service is selected in the tree, the properties that were defined
for it during configuration are displayed in the Properties area.
Network
The Network button enables the user to access the Network View. In
this view, the network structure, including all the devices in the network,
as well as the services configured for each device, is displayed.
The network connection of a device or service can be verified using the
Check button, as described in the Check section, page 14-66.
When a device or service is selected in the tree, the properties that
were defined for it during configuration are displayed in the Properties
area.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Check
The Check button enables the user to verify the network connection of
a selected device or service.
To check the device or service connection:
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the Connectivity tab and press Select. The

Connectivity tab is displayed, as shown in Figure 14-25.
Select 3. Access the appropriate view by selecting either the Current,

Dataflow or Network buttons.
TRACKBALL 4. In the Network area, TRACKBALL to the device or server to be

verified and press Select. The service properties are displayed in
the Properties area.
Select
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to the Check button and press Select. The system
verifies that the selected device or server connection is working.
• If the connection is working, a green checkmark is displayed on
the left of the device or service name in the network tree.
• If the connection is not working, a red "X" is displayed next to
Select
the device or service name in the network tree.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
7RROV6XEVLGLDU\7DE
The Tools subsidiary tab enables the following functions, related to
removable media, to be performed:
• Verification of DICOM directory on removable media.
• Initializing of pre-formatted removable media (MO disk, CD or
floppy disk).
Figure 14-26: Connectivity Tab/Tools Subsidiary Tab

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Initialization and DICOM verification of removable media

Initialization and DICOM verification of removable media can only be
performed on preconfigured removable media. A removable media
station is configured by associating the service DICOM media storage
to the appropriate server.
To verify a removable media:
1. Insert a removable media into the unit.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the Media dropdown list and press Select. A list of
pre-configured media options is displayed.
Select 3. TRACKBALL to the required media and press Select.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the Verify on-screen button and press Select. The
unit will verify the DICOM directory on the selected media.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
To initialize a removable media:

1. Insert a removable media into the unit.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the Media dropdown list and press Select. A list of
pre-configured media options is displayed.
3. TRACKBALL to the required media and press Select.

Select
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the Label text box and type in a unique name for the
removable media.
5. TRACKBALL to the Format As dropdown list and press Select. A list

Select of formatting options is displayed (DICOM, Database or Blank).
TRACKBALL 6. TRACKBALL to the on-screen Initialize button and press Select.
Select

2300163-100 Rev. 0
/RFDO6HWWLQJV6XEVLGLDU\7DE
The Local Settings subsidiary tab provides the following information:
• Computer Name: The local ultrasound unit’s serial number.
• Local Settings: The IP settings for the local ultrasound unit.
• Network User Name: The local ultrasound unit’s name for
identification within an EchoNet environment.
Note: This information can only be viewed by the user. This data can be
configured and/or changed only by GE Technical Support. Please contact the
local system administrator and the GE service personnel.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
0LVFHOODQHRXV7DE
The Misc (Miscellaneous) tab enables the user to select various
Doppler and measurement options.
'RSSOHU2SWLRQV
Smart Doppler 60
When this option is selected (indicated by a checkmark ), both the

angle correct cursor and the Doppler interrogation beam marker can be
rotated at the same time. For any vessel angle within a given range, the
interrogation angle will be retained at a constant 60 degrees.
0HDVXUHPHQWV
Caliper expansion distance (pixels)
When a pair of calipers are a short distance from each other, the caliper
markers will remain small to avoid hiding small anatomy.
The number of pixels configured in this option is the distance at which
the pair of calipers will become enlarged.
Mini Report enabled
When this option is selected, (indicated by a checkmark ), the

Mini-Report will be enabled and will be displayed at all times in the OB
applications.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
8VHUV
Logging on to the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit as a user
and part of a default or user-defined group enables user group-specific
settings and presets to be used.
Important: Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound units without the Archiving

option do not support user groups.
8VHU*URXSV
Up to five user groups can be configured in the system. Unique system
presets can be configured for each user group. Each group’s presets
are independent of the presets of other user groups.
Each user defined in the system belongs to either one of the
user-defined groups or to the default group. When a user logs on, the
system presets defined for that user’s group are loaded. Any changes
the user makes to the presets while working are saved, and will apply
only to users belonging to that user group.
If a user does not want to belong to a special group, they can be
assigned to the Default user group, which is the main group of users.
Note: On Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound units without the Archiving

option, all users are members of the Default user group.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
&RQILJXULQJ8VHUV
Users are viewed, added, deleted and edited in the Personnel List
screen. Information for each user, such as name, title and group ID, is
entered. Once entered, some of this information is transferred to and
shown automatically on the Exam Comments page of the Patient
Details screen.
$GGLQJD1HZ8VHU
Each new user must be configured in the system and assigned to a
user group.
To add a new user to the system:
displayed.
Utilities 2. Press the Utilities soft key. The General Status screen is displayed.
Personnel 3. Press the Personnel List soft key. The Personnel List screen is
List
displayed.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Add 4. Press the Add soft key. The Personnel Information screen is
Figure 14-27: Personnel Information Screen
Keyboard 5. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter the user information in the
7 following fields, using the TRACKBALL or the Tab key to move
between fields.
• User ID: The user name that will be displayed in the Select
your name dropdown list during log on.
• First Name: The user’s first name.
• Last Name: The user’s last name.
• Title: The user’s title.
• Group ID: The identification number of the group to which the
user belongs.
• Initials: The user’s initials.
• Referring/Physician/Sonographer...: The user’s position. For
each user, any combination of positions can be defined.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Done 6. Press the Done soft key to save the information. The Personnel List
screen is redisplayed, and includes the new user.
Note: The user’s title and initials are not shown in the Personnel List screen.
(GLWLQJD8VHU
User details can be updated as necessary, for example, if the user’s
name changes, or to assign the user to a different user group.
To edit a user:
displayed.
Utilities 2. Press the Utilities soft key. The General Status screen is displayed.
Personnel 3. Press the Personnel List soft key. The Personnel List screen is
List
displayed.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the user whose information is to be edited.
Edit 5. Press the Edit soft key. The Personnel Information screen is
displayed, showing the selected user’s information.
Keyboard 6. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to edit the user information, as

7 required, using the TRACKBALL or the Tab key to move between
fields.
Done
7. Press the Done soft key to save the changes. The Personnel List
screen is redisplayed and includes the updated user information.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
8VHU/RJRQ
Logging on as a user and part of a defined group enables user-specific
and user-defined settings and presets to be used. In addition, the user
name is automatically entered in the Exam Comments page of the
Patient Details screen.
The system can be operated without logging on as a user. In this case,
the settings and presets of the last user group to be activated are
loaded.
Note: The first time the system is operated, the user is defined as a default user
belonging to the Default group, the main group of users.
To log on:
+

dropdown list and press Select.
To choose a dataflow, TRACKBALL to the required dataflow in the

Dataflow dropdown list and then press Select. (The dataflow
Select defines how patient information and images are managed and
stored. Refer to Chapter 11, Connectivity, for a detailed description
of the different dataflow options available.)

2300163-100 Rev. 0
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. The user group to which the
user belongs is displayed in the Group field.
Select
TRACKBALL 4. If the system is password protected, a password will be requested.

TRACKBALL to the Password field and use the alphanumeric
Keyboard
7
TRACKBALL 5. TRACKBALL to OK and press Select. The 2D default scanning
screen in displayed, enabling the user to begin an examination, as
described in the Beginning an Examination section, page 2-49.
Note: The user’s name and user group are displayed in the title bar at the
Select top of the screen.

2300163-100 Rev. 0

2300163-100 Rev. 0
User Maintenance
&KDSWHU
8VHU0DLQWHQDQFH
,QWURGXFWLRQ
After delivery and installation of the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit, the service representative will make contact in order to
schedule the first of several routine service visits. These are designed
to protect the customer’s investment in the ultrasound unit, and to
ensure that the unit constantly operates at maximum efficiency.
This chapter describes the additional procedures that comprise an
internal routine maintenance program, and includes the following
sections:
• Periodic Maintenance, page 15-2, describes the periodic
maintenance procedures.
• iLinq, page 15-2, describes iLinq, a feature that enables remote
servicing and procedures for maintaining the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3
• Inspecting the System, page 15-3, describes the monthly
maintenance procedures.
• Cleaning the Unit, page 15-4, describes the weekly maintenance
procedures.
• Prevention of Static Electricity Interference, page 15-5,
describes how to reduce the likelihood of electrostatic discharge.
• Handling Probes, page 15-5, describes the correct handling of
probes.
• Troubleshooting, page 15-6, describes basic troubleshooting
procedures.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
User Maintenance
3HULRGLF0DLQWHQDQFH
A schedule of periodic maintenance is strongly recommended. This
should be coordinated with the local service organization in your
country. Regular maintenance of the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit ensures that the system operates correctly, and remains
fully functional.
Note: As part of a periodic maintenance program, the system’s isolation

transformer should be tested at least every two years, to facilitate the detection
of possible short-circuits between the secondary output and ground.
L/LQT
The iLinq feature enables GE service personnel to remotely access the
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit to perform basic system
diagnostics and problem identification.
Important: Always coordinate with GE service personnel before activating

iLinq.
To activate iLinq:
1. Advise GE service personnel that iLinq is being activated.
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the iLinq icon, located in the bottom-right corner of

each of the scanning and archiving screens, above the soft key
menu, as shown below:
iLinq Icon
Figure 15-1: iLinq Icon

2300163-100 Rev. 0
User Maintenance
Select 3. Press Select. The icon changes and GE service personnel are
allowed to remotely access the system.
Note: During diagnostic testing by GE service personnel, the user will be

advised of the diagnostics being done by prompts displayed on the screen.
TRACKBALL 4. When GE service personnel advise that the remote service is

complete, TRACKBALL to the iLinq icon and press Select to
deactivate the feature. The standard iLinq icon is redisplayed.
Select
,QVSHFWLQJWKH6\VWHP
The following components of the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound
system should be examined at least monthly:
• Connectors on cables, for any mechanical defects.
• Entire length of electrical and power cables, for cuts or abrasions.
• Equipment, for loose or missing hardware.
• Control Panel, for defects.
• Brakes.
Danger: To avoid electrical shock hazard, do not remove panels or covers from
the console. Qualified service personnel must perform this servicing. Failure to
do so could cause serious injury.
Electrical Hazard: If any defects are observed or malfunctions occur, do not

operate the equipment, and inform a qualified service representative.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
User Maintenance
&OHDQLQJWKH8QLW
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit requires weekly care
and maintenance to function safely and properly.
Important: The ultrasound unit must be shut down (power off) during the
cleaning process.
The following components should be cleaned, as described below:

• Air Filter: Clean the unit’s air filter to ensure that a clogged filter
does not cause the unit to overheat and reduce system
performance and reliability. It is recommended that the filter be
cleaned once a month. The air filter is situated in the front of the
unit, above the probe connector area.
Shake the filter in an area away from the unit. Wash the filter with a
mild soapy solution, then rinse and dry with a cloth.
Important: Allow the filter to dry thoroughly before re-installing it in the unit.
• Control Panel: Diligent cleaning of the ultrasound unit’s control

panel reduces the risk of spreading infection from person to person,
and also helps to maintain a clean working environment. Prior to
cleaning, turn off the power to the system. Use a soft cloth
moistened with water or a mild soap solution. For difficult spots or
general cleaning, an all-purpose cleaner may also be used.
• Monitor: Gently wipe the monitor face with a soft, non-abrasive

cloth. If necessary, moisten the cloth with a mild, non-abrasive
detergent solution diluted with water.
Important: Do not use any type of solutions containing alcohol, benzene,

or a similar additive, as these may damage the anti-reflective coating. To
avoid scratching the screen surface, do not rub, touch or tap the screen
surface with sharp or abrasive items, such as ballpoint pens.
• System Cabinet: Moisten a soft, non-abrasive folded cloth with a

mild, general purpose, non-abrasive soap and water solution or a
general purpose disinfectant. Wipe down the top, front, back and
both sides of the system cabinet. Do not spray any liquid directly
into the unit.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
User Maintenance
3UHYHQWLRQRI6WDWLF(OHFWULFLW\
,QWHUIHUHQFH
Interference from static electricity can damage electronic components
in the system. The following measures help reduce the likelihood of
electrostatic discharge:
• At least monthly, wipe the alphanumeric keyboard and monitor with
lint-free tissue or a soft cloth dampened with anti-static spray.
• Spray carpets with an anti-static spray because constant walking on
carpets in or near the scanning room may be a source of static
electricity.
• Securely ground the unit using a power line or ground connector at
the back of the system.
+DQGOLQJ3UREHV
All the probes for the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit are
designed and manufactured to provide trouble-free, reliable service. To
ensure this, correct handling of probes is important and the following
points should be noted:
• Do not drop a probe or strike it against a hard surface, as this may
damage the transducer elements and acoustic lens, or may crack
the housing.
• Do not use a cracked or damaged probe. If a probe is cracked or
damaged, call the GE field service representative immediately to
obtain a replacement.
• Avoid pulling, pinching or kinking the probe cable, since a damaged
cable may compromise the electrical safety of the probe.
• To avoid the risk of a probe accidentally falling, do not allow the
probe cables to become entangled or to be caught by the wheels of
the system.
Note: For detailed information on handling endocavity probes, refer to the

appropriate supplementary instructions for each probe. Also, refer to
Chapter 13, Probes, for detailed probe handling, cleaning and disinfecting
instructions.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
User Maintenance
7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ
The system is engineered for reliable operation and consistent,
high-quality performance. Automatic self-testing facilities are provided
to monitor system operation and to detect faulty operation as soon as
possible, thereby eliminating unnecessary downtime. The detection of
any serious malfunction results in immediate interruption of scanning,
and is indicated by an error message on the monitor screen.
0RQLWRU$OLJQPHQW
Upon monitor or unit rotation, the monitor may display geometric
distortion of the image tilt due to electromagnetic interference.
To correct image tilt distortion:
1. Press the JAGTM control dial found in the bottom-center of the lower
monitor frame casing. The Main menu is displayed.
2. Rotate the JAG control dial to highlight the MORE option and press
the JAG control dial. The Advanced Options menu is displayed.
3. Rotate the JAG control dial to highlight the Rotation icon, and press
the JAG control dial to activate this option.
4. Rotate the JAG control dial to adjust the image display tilt and press
the JAG control dial to save the tilt adjustment.
5. Rotate the JAG control dial to highlight EXIT and press the JAG
control dial to exit the Advanced Options menu.
6. Rotate the JAG control dial to highlight EXIT and press the JAG
control dial to exit the Main menu and return to the ultrasound
display.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
User Maintenance
$FWLYLW\/RJDQG3UREOHP5HSRUWV
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit automatically logs any
error messages that occur during system operation, on a daily basis, for
technical support analysis purposes (if required). These daily log
reports are retained in the system and can be recalled for 90 days.
A reporting tool exists which enables the user or GE service personnel
to download the log report to a floppy disk.
In addition to the automatic error tracing, the reporting tool enables the
user to create a specific problem report, by adding comments and
embedding a current screen capture in the daily report.
To create a problem report:
1. Press <Ctrl> and <F> simultaneously on the alphanumeric
keyboard. The Failure Report window is displayed, as shown below.
The current date is displayed in the Store Daily History field, and
+
the current time is displayed in the Failure Time field.
<F>
Figure 15-2: Failure Report Screen
Keyboard 2. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter a description of the

7 problem or occurrence.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
User Maintenance
3. Select the Attach screen snapshot checkbox to attach the current

screen capture, if required.
TRACKBALL 4. TRACKBALL to the on-screen Add To History button and press

Select. All comments entered and the current screen are captured
and embedded into the daily log.
Select
To download a daily log:

1. Press <Ctrl> and <F> simultaneously on the alphanumeric
keyboard. The Failure Report screen is displayed, as shown in
Figure 15-2.
+
<F>
TRACKBALL 2. TRACKBALL to the Store Daily History dropdown list and press
Select. A calendar is displayed, as shown below:
Select
Figure 15-3: Failure Report Calendar

2300163-100 Rev. 0
User Maintenance
TRACKBALL 3. TRACKBALL to the required date and press Select.
4. TRACKBALL to the on-screen Save To Diskette button, and follow

the system instructions. This downloaded report can then be given
Select
or sent by e-mail to GE technical support for analysis.
6\VWHP0DOIXQFWLRQ
Note the following points in the event of error or system malfunction:
• Write down all displayed error messages.
• Write down the System Serial Number, found on the label at the
back of the unit.
• If possible, write down the currently installed software version.
To locate the software version:
displayed, showing the software version number in the title bar.
• Write down the probe, imaging mode, application icon and
application package that was in use at the time of the
malfunction.
Select
• If applicable, write down the button or key sequence that
immediately preceded the malfunction.
• Turn the unit off.
• Do not use the unit until authorized service personnel have
restored it to its fully operational state.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
User Maintenance
5HVWDUWLQJWKH8QLW
If the system malfunctions, the scanning is immediately interrupted and
an error message is displayed. Once the malfunction has been fixed,
restart the unit as described in the following procedure.
To restart the unit after a malfunction has occurred:
On/Off 1. Verify that the LED label for the On/Off button is lit or blinking,
indicating that the unit is in standby mode.
2. If the button label is not lit, check that the main power cable is
plugged properly into the wall socket.
3. Note any displayed error messages.
4. Turn off all peripherals.
ON Position
5. Switch the circuit breaker up to the ON position if it is in the OFF
ON ON
position. The circuit breaker should remain in the ON position.
6. Wait ten seconds before switching the unit back on.
Important: If the unit still does not complete its initialization process,
disconnect the power cable and call the service representative.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
&KDSWHU
6DIHW\
,QWURGXFWLRQ
This section describes the important safety measures that should be
taken before operating the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit.
Procedures for simple care and maintenance of the unit are also
described.
Various levels of safety precautions may be found on the equipment,
and different levels of severity are identified by one of the following
icons that precede precautionary statements in the text.
The following icons are used to indicate precautions:
Danger: Indicates that a specific hazard exists that, given inappropriate

conditions or actions, will cause:
• Severe or fatal personal injury
• Substantial property damage
Warning: Indicates that a specific hazard is known to exist that, given

inappropriate conditions or actions, may cause:
• Severe personal injury
• Substantial property damage
Caution: Indicates that a potential hazard may exist that, given inappropriate
conditions or actions, can cause:
• Minor injury
• Property damage
Note: Indicates precautions or prudent-use recommendations that should be

used in the operation of the ultrasound unit, specifically:
• Use of the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit as a prescription

device, under the order of a physician.
• Maintaining an optimum unit environment.
• Reference to the User’s Manual.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
,PSRUWDQW6DIHW\&RQVLGHUDWLRQV
1RWLFH$JDLQVW8VHU0RGLILFDWLRQ
Never modify this product, including system components, software,
cables, and so on. User modification may cause safety hazards and
degradation in system performance. All modifications must be
performed by qualified GE personnel.
This section includes considerations for the following:
• Patient safety
• Personnel and equipment safety
The information contained in this section is intended to familiarize the
user with the hazards associated with the use of the unit, and to alert
them to the extent to which injury and damage may occur if the
precautions are not observed.
Users are obligated to familiarize themselves with these safety
considerations and to avoid conditions that could result in injury or
damage.
3DWLHQW6DIHW\
Warning: The concerns listed below can seriously affect the safety of patients
undergoing a diagnostic ultrasound examination.
3DWLHQW,GHQWLILFDWLRQ
Always include proper identification with all patient data and verify the
accuracy of the patient’s name and/or identity number when entering
such data. Ensure that the correct patient ID is provided on all recorded
data and hard copy prints. Identification errors could result in an
incorrect diagnosis.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
'LDJQRVWLF,QIRUPDWLRQ
The images and calculations provided by the system are intended for
use by competent users as a diagnostic tool. They are explicitly not to
be regarded as the sole, irrefutable basis for clinical diagnosis. Users
are encouraged to study the literature and reach their own professional
conclusions regarding the clinical utility of the system.
The user should be aware of the product specifications and of the
system accuracy and stability limitations. These limitations must be
considered before making any decision based on quantitative values. If
in doubt, the nearest GE Ultrasound Service Office should be
consulted.
Equipment malfunction or incorrect settings can result in measurement
errors or failure to detect details in the image. The user must become
thoroughly familiar with the operation of the unit in order to optimize its
performance and to recognize possible malfunctions. Application
training is available through the sales representative.
0HFKDQLFDO+D]DUGV
Damaged probes or improper use and manipulation of the
transesophageal probe can result in injury or increased risk of infection.
Inspect probes frequently for sharp, pointed or rough surface damage
that could cause injury or tear protective barriers (gloves and sheaths).
Transesophageal probe safety: Never use excessive force when
manipulating the transesophageal probe. The detailed user manual
enclosed with the transesophageal probe should be read carefully.
Electrical Hazard: A damaged probe can increase the risk of electric
shock if conductive solutions come in contact with internal live pads.
Inspect probes often for cracks or openings in the housing and holes in
and around the acoustic lens, or other damage that could allow
moisture to enter. Become familiar with the use and care precautions
described in the Care and Maintenance section, page 13-11.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
3HUVRQQHODQG(TXLSPHQW6DIHW\
Danger: The hazards listed below can seriously affect the safety of personnel
and equipment during a diagnostic ultrasound examination.
([SORVLRQ+D]DUG
Never operate the equipment in the presence of flammable or
explosive liquids, vapors or gases. Malfunctions in the unit, or sparks
generated by fan motors, can electrically ignite these substances.
Users should be aware of the following points to prevent such explosion
hazards:
• If flammable substances are detected in the environment, do not
plug in or turn on the system.
• If flammable substances are detected after the system has been
turned on, do not attempt to turn off or unplug the unit.
• If flammable substances are detected, evacuate and ventilate the
area before turning off the unit.
,PSORVLRQ+D]DUG
Do not subject the unit to serious mechanical shocks because the
cathode ray tube (CRT) can implode if struck or jarred. This may cause
pieces of glass and/or phosphor coating to fly into the air and result in
serious injury.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
(OHFWULFDO+D]DUG
To avoid injury:
• Do not remove the unit’s protective covers. No user-serviceable
parts are inside. If servicing is required, contact qualified technical
personnel.
• Connect the attachment plug to a hospital-grade grounding outlet to
ensure adequate grounding.
• Do not place liquids on or above the unit. Conductive fluids seeping
into the active circuit components may cause short circuiting, which
could result in an electrical fire.
• An electrical hazard may exist if any light, monitor or visual indicator
remains on after the unit is turned off.
• Fuses blown within 36 hours of being replaced may indicate a
malfunctioning electrical circuit within the system. In this event, the
unit must be checked by GE Ultrasound service personnel. No
attempt should be made to replace the fuses with others of a higher
rating.
Warning: The internal circuits of the unit use high voltages, capable of causing
serious injury or death by electrical shock.
0RYLQJ+D]DUG
Special care must be used to avoid injury when moving or transporting
the unit.
• Always be sure the pathway is clear.
• Limit the speed of movement to a careful walk.
• Use at least two people when moving the unit on inclines.
• Ensure that the unit is well prepared before transporting. Refer to
the Transportation and Positioning section, page 2-20, for more
information.
Caution: The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit weighs between

160 kg - 190 kg (353 lb - 419 lb).

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
%LRORJLFDO+D]DUG
For patient and personnel safety, beware of biological hazards while
performing transesophageal procedures. To avoid the risk of disease
transmission:
• Use protective barriers (gloves and probe sheaths) whenever
necessary. Follow sterile procedures, as required.
• Thoroughly clean probes and reusable accessories after each
patient examination and disinfect or sterilize, as needed. Refer to
Probes, for probe use and care instructions.
• Follow all in-house infection control policies as they apply to
personnel and equipment.
3DFHPDNHU+D]DUG
The possibility of the system interfering with pacemakers is minimal.
However, as this system generates high frequency electrical signals,
the user should be aware of the potential hazard this could cause.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
'HYLFH/DEHOV
The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels
and other important information provided on the equipment.
Label/Icon Purpose Location
Identification and • Manufacturer’s Rear of unit,

Rating Plate name and address near power
• Date of inlet.
manufacture
• Model and serial
numbers
• Electrical ratings
Class II Equipment, in Rear of unit,

which protection probe
against electric shock connectors.
does not rely on basic
insulation only.
Provides additional
safety precautions
such as double
insulation or reinforced
insulation, because
there is no provision
for protective earthing
or reliance upon
installation conditions.
Device Listing/ Laboratory logos or Rear of unit.

Certification Labels labels that denote
conformance with
industry safety
standards, for
example, UL or IEC.
CE certification mark. Rear of unit.

0344

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
(OHFWULFDO6DIHW\
,QWHUQDOO\&RQQHFWHG3HULSKHUDO'HYLFHV
The system, together with its peripheral devices, such as video tape
recorders and printers, meets UL-2601-1 and IEC 601-1 standards for
electrical isolation and safety. These standards are applicable only
when the specified peripheral devices are plugged into the AC outlets
provided in the unit.
([WHUQDO&RQQHFWLRQRI2WKHU3HULSKHUDO
'HYLFHV
Other external devices, such as laser cameras, printers, VCRs and
external monitors, usually exceed allowable leakage limits, and when
plugged into separate AC outlets that are then connected to the unit,
are in violation of patient safety standards. Suitable electrical isolation
of such external AC outlets may be required in order to meet UL-2601-1
and IEC 601-1 standards for electrical leakage.
8/6WDQGDUG
Interconnection of external equipment must not exceed the total
combined leakage current of 100 µA under no-fault and single-fault
conditions.
,(&6WDQGDUG
Interconnection of external equipment should not exceed the total
combined leakage current of 300 µA under no-fault and single-fault
conditions.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
2ZQHU5HVSRQVLELOLW\
It is the responsibility of the owner to ensure that anyone operating the
system reads and understands this section of the manual. However,
there is no representation that the act of reading this manual renders
the reader qualified to operate, inspect, test, align, calibrate,
troubleshoot, repair or modify the system. The owner should make
certain that only properly trained, fully qualified service personnel
undertake the installation, maintenance, troubleshooting, calibration
and repair of the equipment.
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit owners should ensure that
only properly trained, fully qualified personnel are authorized to operate
the system. Before authorizing anyone to operate the system, it should
be verified that the person has read, and fully understands, the
operating instructions contained in this manual. It is advisable to
maintain a list of authorized users.
Should the system fail to operate correctly, or if the unit does not
respond to the commands described in this manual, the user should
contact the nearest field Service Office.
For information about specific requirements and regulations applicable
to the use of electronic medical equipment, consult the appropriate
local, state and federal agencies.
Caution: Federal law restricts this device to use by, or on the orders of, a
physician.
3RVVLEOH%LRORJLFDO(IIHFWV
For a detailed explanation of possible biological effects, refer to the
Reference Manual, which includes a copy of Medical Ultrasound
Safety, American Institute of Ultrasound and Medicine, 1994.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
3RZHU,QIRUPDWLRQRQ6FUHHQ
In the scan parameter area, two fields are allocated for the display of
power values as follows:
MI =
TIX =
Abbreviation Description
MI Mechanical Index
TIB Thermal Index in Bone
TIS Thermal Index in Soft Tissue
TIC Thermal Index in Cranium
TIX TIB, TIS, or TIC. Selected in accordance with the

mode of operation and the application.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
6DIHW\RI8OWUDVRXQG
$/$5$6WDWHPHQW
Ultrasound procedures should be performed using output levels and
exposure times As Low As Reasonably Achievable (ALARA) while
acquiring clinical information.
The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit employs the principle of
ALARA in configuring factory defaults.
This default level takes effect:
• When the system is first turned on.
• When a new patient is entered.
• When changing from one exam category to another.
• When changing from one application to another.
Refer to the Reference Manual, which includes a copy of Medical
Ultrasound Safety, American Institute of Ultrasound and Medicine,
1994, for further details.
7UDLQLQJ
During each ultrasound examination, the user is expected to weigh the
medical benefit of the diagnostic information that would be obtained
against the risk of potential harmful effects. Once an optimal image is
achieved, the need for increasing acoustic output or prolonging the
exposure cannot be justified.
It is recommended that all users receive proper training in applications
before performing them in a clinical setting. Contact the sales
representative for training assistance.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
$OOHUJLF5HDFWLRQV7R/DWH[&RQWDLQLQJ
0HGLFDO'HYLFHV
Due to reports of severe allergic reactions to medical devices
containing latex (natural rubber), the FDA advises health-care
professionals to identify latex-sensitive patients, and be prepared to
treat allergic reactions promptly. Latex is a component of many medical
devices, including surgical and examination gloves, catheters,
incubation tubes, anesthesia masks and dental dams. Patient reaction
to latex has ranged from contact urticaria to systemic anaphylaxis.
For more details regarding allergic reaction to latex, refer to Medical
Alert on Latex Products, FDA, March 29, 1991, in the Reference
Manual.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
6\VWHP&RQWUROV$IIHFWLQJ$FRXVWLF
2XWSXW
The initial means by which the user can affect acoustic output are by:
• Selecting a probe.
• Selecting an application (category of examination).
• Selecting the imaging mode or particular characteristics.
The user controls that may affect the acoustic output are:
• Acoustic output control
• Transmit frequency
• Focal depth
• Sector size
• Range in 2D-Mode, Velocity in Doppler Mode and CFM-Mode
(PRF)
• Doppler sample volume (pulse length)
• Steering angle
3UREH6HOHFWLRQ
As long as the appropriate application is available, any probe can be
used with the knowledge that the intensities fall at, or below, those
stated in the Acoustic Output Data Tables (see the Reference Manual).
The duration of patient exposure is most likely minimized with the use
of a probe that is optimized to provide resolution and focal depth
appropriate to the examination.
$SSOLFDWLRQ6HOHFWLRQ
Selecting the probe and application preset appropriate to a particular
ultrasound examination automatically provides acoustic output limits
within FDA guidelines for that application. Other parameters that
optimize performance for the selected application are also set
automatically, and should assist in reducing the patient exposure time.
Refer to the Selecting a Probe and Application section,
page 2-62, for information on selecting a probe and application preset.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
&KDQJLQJ,PDJLQJ0RGHV
Acoustic output depends on the imaging mode selected. The choice of
mode (2D-Mode, M-Mode, Doppler Mode or CFM-Mode) determines
whether the ultrasound beam is stationary or in motion. This greatly
affects the energy absorbed by the tissue.
Note: Detailed Acoustic Output Data Tables are provided in the Reference
Manual. Refer to Chapter 3, Modes, for complete information on changing
imaging modes.
7UDQVPLW3RZHU
In all operating modes, the system has automatic control over transmit
power values, depending on the system settings. Only the use of the
Soft Menu rocker, to access and adjust the Transmit Power options,
can affect acoustic output.
The default settings of the Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert ultrasound unit
are application-dependent and do not exceed the following FDA
recommended limits:
FDA Recommended Guidelines

Application ISPTA (mW/cm2) MI
Fetal and other* 94 1.9
Cardiac 430 1.9

Peripheral vessels 720 1.9
*Abdominal, intra-operative, pediatric, small organ (breast, thyroid,

testes, and so on), neonatal cephalic and adult cephalic.
The Acoustic Output default value is dependent upon the activation of
the following factors:
• Probe
• Probe frequency
• Application
• Mode
• Transmit depth
Each of these factors contributes to the overall acoustic default value.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
This default level takes effect:

• When the system is first turned on.
• When a new patient is entered.
• When changing from one exam category to another.
• When changing from one application to another.
The default output level is set at the factory and is based on machine
settings that yield an optimum image for the type of patient
examination. At the same time, the output level is set well below the
FDA application specific limits for derated ISPTA Intensity or MI.
The default power is probe and application dependent, and is between
50% and 80% of the maximum allowed power for the selected probe
and application. The user can override the default settings, but care
should be taken to observe the displayed MI and TI values.
Power-up and user-programmable levels of acoustic output and
application-specific acoustic outputs can be found in the Reference
Manual.
&RPELQHG0RGHV
When operating in a combined mode, such as 2D and M-Modes, the
total acoustic output is comprised of contributions from each individual
mode. Depending on the modes in use, either or both output indices
may be affected.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
(OHFWURPDJQHWLF&RPSDWLELOLW\ (0&
AII types of electronic equipment may characteristically cause
electromagnetic interference with other equipment, transmitted either
through air or connecting cables. The term Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) indicates the capability of the equipment to curb
electromagnetic influence from other equipment, while at the same time
not affecting other equipment with similar electromagnetic radiation.
Radiated or conducted EMC can cause distortion, degradation or
artifacts in the ultrasound image that could potentially obscure
diagnostic information.
Important: This unit carries the CE mark. The Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert
ultrasound unit complies with regulatory requirements of the European
Directive, 93/42/EEC, concerning medical devices. It also complies with
emission limits for a Group 2, Class A Medical Device as stated in
EN 60601-1-2 (IEC 601-1-2).
There is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular

installation. If this equipment is found to cause or respond to
interference, which may be determined by turning equipment on and
off, qualified service personnel should attempt to correct the problem by
one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the affected device.
• Increase the separation between the unit and the affected device.
• Power the equipment from a source other than that of the affected
device.
• Consult the service representative for further suggestions.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any interference or responses
caused by the use of interconnecting cables other than those
recommended, or by unauthorized changes or modifications to the unit.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety
To comply with the regulations on electromagnetic interference for a

Group 2, Class A Medical Device, all interconnecting cables to
peripheral devices must be shielded and properly grounded. Use of
cables not properly shielded and grounded may result in the equipment
causing or responding to radio frequency interference, in violation of
the European Union Medical Device Directive and FCC regulations.
Do not use devices which intentionally transmit RF signals, for
example, cellular phones, transceivers or radio controlled products, in
the vicinity of this equipment, as they may cause performance outside
the published specifications. Keep the power to these types of devices
turned off when near this equipment.

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Safety

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Index
,QGH[
1XPHULFV Analysis 5-12
bullseye scoring diagram 5-16
2D Caliper 7-4
exercise stress examinations 5-18
OB Package 8-17
scoring acquired heart cycles 5-13
2D Gain
selecting and storing heart cycles
adjusting 3-6
5-20
2D Image
Angio Mode 3-69
enlarging 3-34
soft key combinations 3-71
2D Maps soft key 3-76
soft menu 3-74
2D-Mode 1-1, 2-42, 2-65, 3-1, 3-6, 5-5,
Angle 3-77
6-5, 6-48 correct 3-77
accessing 3-6
Annotations
soft key map 3-17
inserting 2-68
soft menu 3-18
Application
using zoom 3-7
selecting 2-62
2D-Mode tools 7-3
Archive 2-39
distance 7-3
Archived information
$ additional data 10-37
deleting 10-32
Abdominal evaluation 8-51 editing 10-22, 10-29
bladder volume retrieving 10-22
measurements 8-52 Archiving 10-2
organ dimension cineloops 10-14
measurements 8-52 configuration 14-34
study protocols 8-51 exiting 10-37
Acoustic output local and remote 10-2
description of default settings 16-14 package 10-2
Acquired images Assign and Measure 2-38, 6-1
deleting or replacing 5-8 manually changing a value 6-53
Acquisition 5-1 prompted step-by-step procedures
Activity log 15-7 6-47
Adapter 13-36 selecting a study 6-43
ALARA Statement 16-11 Assignment tab 14-30
Allergic Reactions To Latex-Containing ATO
Medical Devices 16-12 See Automatic Tissue Optimization
Alphanumeric keyboard 2-6, 2-30, 2-46 Audio Volume 3-77
Amplitude map 3-69 Auto Update 3-77
Automatic time-triggered cineloop
storage 8-8
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Index I

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Index
Automatic Tissue Optimization 3-16, Cardiac applications 14-32

8-2 Cardiac measurement and analysis 6-1
Automatic trace 7-15 Carotid artery evaluation 7-24
OB package 8-30 basic evaluation 7-24
Pulsitivity Index (PI) 7-15 calculations 7-23
Resistivity Index (RI) 7-15 extended evaluation 7-24
Available study protocols 7-22 measurements 7-23
worksheet 7-25
%
CFM-Mode 3-1, 3-19
Back Up 9-15 accessing 3-19
performing 10-43 smoothing 3-89
soft key functions 9-15 soft key map 3-22
Baseline CHM files
color 3-78 retrieving and viewing 9-14
Doppler 3-78 Cine control
Biological hazards soft key map 3-10
probes 13-18 Cine Run 3-78
Biopsy guide bracket 13-37 Cine Scroll 3-78
Bodymark annotations Cineloops 2-39, 2-41, 3-8
deleting 2-76 archiving 10-14
inserting 2-74 automatic time-triggered storage
modifying 2-75 8-8
Buttons direct storage 10-19
archiving & reporting 2-39 playback 3-8
display format 2-37 preview 10-18
exit 2-38 reference 8-6
freeze 2-36 storing 2-29, 2-67, 10-14, 10-18
illumination 2-30 viewing stored 10-20
measurement 2-38 Cleaning
physio 2-40 ultrasound unit 15-4
pre-examination 2-33 Clipboard 2-66
print 2-40 redisplaying 10-32
scan mode selection 2-34 time out 10-32
VCR control 2-40 Color
Doppler 1-1
& flow imaging (CFM) 3-19
Calculation Values M-Mode 1-1
changing manually 6-53 Color Maps soft key 3-79
excluding 6-53 Color mode 2-42
including 6-53 Combined modes 16-15
Caliper 6-2, 6-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-7, 7-9, Compress
7-12, 7-18 2D 3-79
Measure and Assign 6-2, 6-3 M 3-79
Index II Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Index
Compression (Doppler) 3-87 Dataflows 11-2

Configuration 14-9 basic 11-6
date & time 14-12 DICOM network 11-11
hospital info 14-11 EchoNet 11-9
MA options 14-25 selecting during an examination 11-
system 14-11 4
user 14-72 selecting when logging on 11-3
Configuring fonts 14-50, 14-51 supported 11-6
Configuring users 14-73 supported services 11-15
Connecting peripherals 2-11 viewing properties 11-5
Connecting the unit 2-10 Date/time area 14-12
Connectivity tab 14-63 Depth adjustment 2-77
Continuous Wave Doppler (CW) 3-52 Device labels 16-7
accessing 3-52 Diagnostic information 16-3
Contour 3-79, 3-87 DICOM 11-1
Control panel 2-6, 2-30 exporting to DICOM media 11-16
alphanumeric keyboard 2-46 Display adjustment 2-42
archiving & reporting buttons 2-39 2D gain 2-42
display format buttons 2-37 active gain 2-42
exit button 2-38 depth 2-42, 2-77
freeze button 2-36 steer 2-42
icons 1-8 TGC gain sliders 2-42
layout 2-31 using soft menu options 3-87
measurement buttons 2-38 zoom 2-42, 2-77
Physio button 2-40 Display monitor 2-6
pre-examination buttons 2-33 adjusting 2-27
print buttons 2-40 Distance 7-3
rotaries 1-8 Dobutomine 5-10
scan mode selection buttons 2-34 Doppler Maps soft key 3-80
soft keys 3-76 soft key map 3-63
Trackball operation 2-41 Doppler Mode 1-1, 2-37, 3-2, 3-52, 4-2,
VCR control buttons 2-40 6-22, 6-48
Curved array (convex) probes 13-31 CW-Mode soft menu 3-68
C358 probe 13-31 PW-Mode soft menu 3-65
CW-Mode 2-42 Doppler Mode tools 7-11
single point velocity 7-11
'
Doppler options 14-71
Data Duplicating an image 3-15
sorting 10-11 Dynamic Range 3-88
Database management 10-3
Dataflow View 14-65
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Index III

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Index
( Footswitch 2-7
connecting 2-13
ECG
operation 2-48
adjusting display 4-5
Footswitch area 14-12
soft key functions 4-10
Frame Averaging 3-88
trace 4-2
Frame Rate 3-81, 3-88
Editing and/or creating stress
Freeze
templates 5-24
button 2-35
saving an edited template 5-31
Frequency 2D 3-81
Electrical Hazards
probes 13-17 *
Electrical outlet
Gate/ROI move field 14-13
connecting 2-11
GYN Package 8-49
Electrical safety
calculations 8-50
requirements 2-10
ovarian measurements 8-49
Electrodes
study protocols 8-49
soft keys 4-5
uterine measurements 8-50
Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) 16-16 +
interference 2-4
Electrostatic interference 15-5 Hazards 16-1
Ellipse Tool biological 16-6
OB package 8-19 electrical 16-3, 16-5
Environmental requirements 2-4 explosion 16-4
probes 13-2 implosion 16-4
Equipment safety 16-4 mechanical 16-3
Examination moving 16-5
beginning 2-49 pacemaker 16-6
delete 10-36 safety 16-2
Exporting data 11-16 Heartbeat
selecting 3-8
) Horizontal Sweep 3-81
HR measurement tool
Fetal heart evaluation 8-50
OB package 8-23
FlexiView
full screen 8-11 ,
OR package 8-3
quad screen 8-4 Identification 16-2
single screen 8-11 iLinq 15-2
Flexiview Images
reference cineloops 8-6 archiving 10-14
Focus 3-80 delete 10-35
Foot brake 2-7 storing 10-14, 10-16
storing on VCR 2-67
storing to the database 10-16
Index IV Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Index
viewing stored 10-20 Measure and Assign 6-1, 6-3

Initialization 2-15 area 6-7
Interference caution 1-2 height 6-17
International keyboard 14-13 length 6-5
Invert 3-81 measurement tools 6-3
measurements 6-4, 6-5
.
time-caliper measurements 6-15
Keyboard field 14-13 velocity 6-22
Keyboard. See Alphanumeric keyboard volume measurements-Area/
Knobs 2-30 Length (AL) 6-10
volume measurements-Method of
/ Disks (MOD) 6-10
Language field 14-17 Measure and Assign 2-38
Layout 3-82 configuration 14-24
LED control panel button 1-8 parameter labels 7-4, 7-6, 7-8, 7-
Linear array probes 13-32 10, 7-12, 7-14, 7-16, 7-19
10L probe 13-33 Measure and Assign (Free Style)
7L probe 13-32 parameter labels 8-31
i739 probe 13-34 Measurements 2-29, 14-71
T739 probe 13-35 2D-Mode 6-5
Local settings 14-70 2D-Mode tools 7-3
Logging on 2-49 area 6-7, 7-9
unprotected system 2-54 buttons 2-38
Low PRF 3-82 distance 7-3
Low Vel. Reject (Color) 3-82 Doppler Mode 6-22
Low Vel. Reject (Doppler) 3-82 heart rate 6-13
height 6-17
0 length 6-5
M-Mode 6-15, 6-48 LV 6-19
soft key map 3-36 M-Mode 6-15
soft menu 3-38 performing 2-77, 6-5
MA options tools 6-3, 7-3
features 14-33 velocity measurements 6-22
Maintenance 15-1 volume 6-10
periodic 15-2 Mechanical hazards
probes 13-11 probes 13-17
Manual trace 7-18 Mini-report
OB package 8-33 OB package 8-15
Pulsatility Index (PI) 7-18 M-Mode 1-1, 2-42, 3-1, 3-31, 4-2
Resistivity Index (RI) 7-18 accessing 3-32
M-Caliper adjusting 2D image 3-33
OB package 8-25 adjusting gain 3-33
Measure 6-2 dual or quad display 3-35
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Index V

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Index
resizing/repositioning 3-34 Operator controls 2-29

using zoom 3-34 Optional features
Mode management 3-3 installing 14-53
Modes 2-29, 3-1 Optional packages
2D-Mode 3-6 GYN Package 8-49
Angio Mode 3-69 OB Package 8-12
CFM-Mode 3-19 OR Package 8-2
Color M-Mode 3-40 OR Package 8-2
combined 2-37 automatic tissue optimization 8-2
Doppler PW-Mode 3-53 FlexiView 8-3
M-Mode 3-31 Owner responsibility 16-9
1 3
Network connection Parameter adjustment
verifying 14-66 rotaries 2-42
New patient 2-58 Soft Menu rocker 2-44
Non-imaging doppler pencil probes Password 2-50, 14-13
P2D probe 13-29 changing 2-51
P6D probe 13-30 no password option 2-53
Nyquist limit 3-78 Patient
add to the database 10-5
2
delete record 10-32
OB Package 8-12 editing data 2-56, 2-61
adjusting the calculation chart 8-45 identification 16-2
adjusting the calculation method report 2-39
8-44 safety 16-2
calculations 8-40 transfer 11-18
measurement charts 8-38 Patient data
measurement tools 8-16 editing 10-22
mini-report 8-15 Patient details
operating 8-12 OB Package 8-13
patient details 8-13 Patient information
performing an evaluation 8-14 copying 11-18
performing measurements 8-15 moving 11-18
study protocols 8-35 PDF files
worksheet 8-42 retrieving and viewing 9-14
OB study protocols Pedal 2-13
amniotic fluid index 8-37 Percentage A reduction 7-7
early gestation 8-36 Percentage D reduction 7-5
fetal growth - extended 8-37 Peripherals 2-7, 2-29, 12-1
OB/GYN applications 14-32 external connection 16-8
On/Off 2-6, 2-15 internally connected 16-8
Operating environment 2-3 system connections 12-2
Index VI Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Index
Personnel safety 16-4 10L probe 13-33

Phased array sector probes 13-21 10S probe 13-24
10S probe 13-24 3S probe 13-21
3S probe 13-21 5S probe 13-22
5T probe 13-25 5T probe 13-25
6T probe 13-26 6T probe 13-26
7S probe 13-23 7L probe 13-32
8T probe 13-27 7S probe 13-23
P509 probe 13-28 8T probe 13-27
Phased arrays sector probes activating 13-9
5S probe 13-22 adapter 13-36
Phono biological hazards 13-18
trace 4-2 C358 probe 13-31
Physiological module 4-1 care and maintenance 13-11
Plug & scan 2-19 cleaning 13-13
Power 3-88 connecting 13-7
display values 16-10 connecting and disconnecting 2-25
On/Off 2-15 coupling gels 13-9
requirements 2-3 curved array (convex) probes 13-31
Prescription device 1-2 definitions 13-20
Preset buttons 14-17 disconnecting 13-10
Presets 2-63, 14-1 disinfecting 13-15
application preset selection 14-1 electrical hazards 13-17
creating 2-46 environmental requirements 13-2
loading or restoring from disk 14-20 handling 15-5
modifying 14-4 holders 2-6
restoring 14-6 i739 probe 13-34
restoring factory 14-22 inspecting 13-12
saving 14-8 integration 13-7
saving to diskette 14-18 labeling 13-4
selecting 14-2 linear array probes 13-32
user-created 14-7 mechanical hazards 13-17
user-modified 14-4 naming conventions 13-19
Printers 12-4 non-imaging doppler pencil probes
B/W thermal video 12-4 13-29
color thermal video 12-6 orientation 13-3
configuration 12-9 P2D probe 13-29
configuring 14-59 P509 probe 13-28
HP InkJet 12-8 P6D probe 13-30
selecting default 14-59 ports 2-6
setting default 14-59 safety 13-17
speed vs. quality 14-61 selecting 2-62
Probes 1-1 T739 probe 13-35
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Index VII

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Index
transesophageal probe 13-38 stress examination 10-30

types 13-19 worksheet 10-31
Problem reports 15-7 Right Atrium Pressure Selection 6-52
Projections ROI
acquisition 5-4 length 3-84
PS & ED 7-13 size 3-84
PS & ED Tool Run Cine 3-84
OB Package 8-27
6
Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW) 2-42, 3-52
accessing 3-52 Safety 1-1, 16-1
ALARA 16-11
5
application selection 16-13
Realtime spectral tracing and biological hazard 16-6
measurement function 7-32 caution 16-1
auto trace in scanning mode 7-32 changing imaging modes 16-14
Rear panel connections 2-12 danger 16-1
Records electrical 16-8
add to the database 10-5 electrical hazard 16-3
adding or finding 10-5 electromagnetic compatibility
locate previous 10-6 (EMC) 16-16
Region of interest (ROI) 3-19 explosion hazard 16-4
Reinstalling 2-24 hazards 16-2
Reject (Doppler) 3-89 implosion hazard 16-4
Reject M 3-84 important considerations 16-2
Removable media mechanical hazards 16-3
tools 14-67 moving hazard 16-5
Reports 9-1 moving precautions 2-20
activating templates 14-43 pacemaker hazard 16-6
add images 9-8 personnel and equipment 16-4
assigning default template 14-45 probe selection 16-13
creating 9-1 probes 13-17
edit archived 9-12 transmit power 16-14
editing 9-4 ultrasound 16-11
exporting 9-13 warning 16-1
generate 9-3 Sample Volume 3-85
print 9-9 Scanning
retrieve and view archived 9-10 basic operations 2-67
save archived as new 9-12 beginning 2-65
saving 9-13 modes 1-3
storing 2-29 screen layout 2-65
Retrieve Searching
cineloop 10-21 field filters 10-12
image 10-29 restart 10-13
Index VIII Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Index
Second-harmonic mode 3-81 projections 5-5

Shutdown protocols 5-2
emergency 2-18 quad view 5-12
full 2-18 report 5-23
Site selecting projection/level 5-7
requirements 2-3 stress templates 5-2
Soft keys 2-29, 2-30, 2-43, 2-66, 3-3 timers 5-10
activation 3-76 Stress templates
functions 3-76 activating 14-39
labels 3-76 assigning default 14-40
map 3-3 deleting user-created 14-41
rotary 1-8 management 14-38
using 3-3 Studies tab 14-28
Soft Menu rocker 1-8, 2-44, 3-3, 3-4 Study protocols
functions 3-87 abdominal evaluation 8-51
Sonographers 2-2 GYN Package 8-49
Speakers 2-6 Switching off 2-16
Specifications System
US 12-7 cleaning 15-4
Spectrum measurements 7-13 inspecting 15-3
Resistivity Index (RI) 7-13 System connections 12-2
Split screen peripherals 12-2
1/2/4 button 2-37 printers 12-4
enlarging display area 3-15 System controls affecting acoustic
Standard control panel button 1-8 output 16-13
Standards System malfunction 15-9
IEC 601-1 16-8 System setup 14-1
possible biological effects 16-9
7
UL-2601-1 16-8
Standby mode 2-16 T2 timer 5-10
Steer rocker key 1-8 Text annotations 2-29, 2-68
Storage 2-6 deleting 2-71
DICOM image 11-16 inserting 2-68
Excel 11-16 modifying 2-72
Storing settings 14-49
images and cineloops 2-67 Text cursor
images on VCR 2-67 home location 2-73
Stress analyze grouptranspose 14-41 Time from start stamp 8-9
Stress Echo 2-39, 5-1 Time out 10-32
acquisition 5-1 Time out area 14-12
analysis 5-12, 5-13, 5-14 Tissue
Dobutomine 5-10 imaging 3-6
projection matrix 5-5 moving 3-31
Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Index IX

2300163-100 Rev. 0
Index
priority 3-89 Viewing completed calculations and

Tools tab 14-27 scoring 5-23
Trace Tool Viewing options 14-64
OB package 8-21 Vivid 3 unit
Trackball 1-8, 2-29, 2-30 illustration 2-5
operation 2-41 rear view 2-9
Training 16-11 Vocabulary
Transesophageal probe 13-38 modifying settings 14-56
Transportation 2-20, 2-23 Voltage
Troubleshooting 15-6 checks 2-10
activity log 15-7 Volume flow 7-20
monitor alignment 15-6
:
problem reports 15-7
restarting the unit 15-10 Warning
system malfunction 15-9 electrical hazards 2-2, 16-5
patient safety 16-2
8
safety hazards 16-1
UPS 2-19 Wheels 2-13
User groups 14-72 Worksheet 2-39
Users edit 10-31
adding 14-73 OB Package 8-42
editing 14-75 retrieve 10-31
logon 14-76 Worksheet calculations 6-48
compact 6-48
9
expanded 6-48
Variance Gain 3-89 method 6-49
Vascular applications 14-32 modes 6-48
Vascular measurement and analysis normal 6-48
7-1 Worksheet tab 14-31
Vascular measurement tools 7-2
=
Vascular package
operation 7-2 Zoom 2-77
VCR 2-29, 2-40
European specifications 12-11
operation 12-12
playback 2-40
soft key map 12-12
status icon 2-66, 12-14
VCR/ECG
configuration 14-46
Velocity tool
OB package 8-29
Video Cassette Recorder 12-10
Index X Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

2300163-100 Rev. 0

Vivid 3 Ultrasound

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vivid 3 Ultrasound

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vivid 3 Ultrasound

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Medical Systems

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert

Copyright2001 General Electric Co.

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Table of Contents 1

Table of Contents 2 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

Operator Controls ............................................................................... 2-29

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Table of Contents 3

Table of Contents 4 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

M-Mode Imaging .................................................................................. 3-31

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Table of Contents 5

Doppler Mode Imaging ........................................................................3-52

Table of Contents 6 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Table of Contents 7

Table of Contents 8 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Table of Contents 9

Table of Contents 10 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Table of Contents 11

Table of Contents 12 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Table of Contents 13

Table of Contents 14 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Table of Contents 15

Table of Contents 16 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

Curved Array (Convex) Probes ...................................................................... 13-31

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Table of Contents 17

Table of Contents 18 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Table of Contents 19

Table of Contents 20 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual List of Figures 1

Figure 5-8: Cell Editing Options List 5-29

List of Figures 2 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

Figure 10-7: Stored Images and Cineloops 10-14

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual List of Figures 3

Figure 13-23: i739 Probe 13-34

List of Figures 4 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

Revision Date Reason for Change

Page Number Revision Number Page Number Revision Number

Title Page 0 14-1 thru 14-78 0

Revision History 0 15-1 thru 15-10 0

Table of Contents 0 16-1 thru 16-18

Table of Figures 0 Index I thru X 0

2-1 thru 2-78 0

3-1 thru 3-90 0

5-1 thru 5-32 0

6-1 thru 6-54 0

7-1 thru 7-34 0

8-1 thru 8-52 0

9-1 thru 9-18 0

11-1 thru 11-20 0

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual Revision History A

Revision History B Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

Important: All information in Chapter 16, Safety, should be read and

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual 1-1

1-2 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual 1-3

1-4 Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual

Topics are located in the main table of contents.

Extensive tool that provides easy reference to ideas, topics, terms,

Vivid 3 Pro/Vivid 3 Expert User’s Manual 1-5

Italic type Denotes the names of windows, screens and dialog

<key> Indicates the names of function keys on the